HPAVC

home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search

/ HPAVC / HPAVC CD-ROM.iso / RA_250R.ZIP / RA.DOC < prev next >

Wrap

Text File | 1996-05-01 | 737KB | 17,187 lines

┌─────────┐┌───────┐ ┌────────────┐┌──────────┬───────────┬───────┐ │ ┌───┐ ││ ┌───┘ │ ┌─┐ ┌─┐ ││ ┌───┐ ├────┐ ┌───┤ ┌───┘ │ │ │ ││ └───┐ │ │ │ │ │ ││ │ │ │ │ │ │ └───┐ │ └───┘ └┤ ┌───┘ │ │ │ │ │ └┤ │ │ └┐ │ └┐ │ ┌───┘ │ ┌────┐ │ └─────┤ │ │ │ │ │ └───┘ │ │ │ │ └─────┐ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ └──┘ └──┴─────────┴──┘ └──┘ └───┴───────────┘ └───┘ └─────────┘ ┌──────────┬──────┐ ┌──────┐ ┌───────┐ ┌───────┐ ┌───────┐ │ ┌───┐ │ ┌──┘ │ ┌──┘ │ ┌───┘ │ ┌───┘ │ ┌───┘ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ └───┐ │ └─────┤ └─────┐ │ └───┘ │ │ │ │ │ ┌───┘ └─────┐ ├─────┐ │ │ ┌────┐ │ └────┤ └────┤ └─────┬─────┘ ├─────┘ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ └──┘ └──┴────────┴────────┴─────────┴─────────┴─────────┘ RemoteAccess 2.50 Copyright (C) 1989-1996 Wantree Development & Andrew Milner All Rights Reserved - 1 - Dedicated to the memory of Fred "Levi's" Horner - 2 - ============================================================ Table Of Contents ------------------------------------------------------------ Chapter 1..................................................4 Introduction...............................................4 Top Down View............................................5 Preamble and Credits.....................................7 Licensing Information (Shareware version)................8 How to register..........................................9 The key system..........................................13 Product Support.........................................14 Installation............................................17 Configuration.............................................19 RACONFIG..................................................20 The User Interface......................................20 Running RACONFIG........................................21 THE FILE MENU.............................................22 Switches................................................22 Info....................................................22 Exit....................................................22 DOS Shell...............................................22 THE SYSTEM MENU...........................................22 Paths...................................................23 System................................................23 Menus.................................................23 Text Files............................................23 Msg Base..............................................23 File Base.............................................23 File attach...........................................24 Nodelist..............................................24 CD-ROM temp...........................................24 Semaphore.............................................24 Rearchive.............................................25 RIP Icons.............................................25 System log............................................25 Site Info...............................................25 Name..................................................25 Sysop.................................................26 Location..............................................26 Addresses.............................................26 Security................................................26 THE OPTIONS MENU..........................................26 Messages................................................27 Check For New Mail During Log-on......................27 Full Mail Check.......................................27 Quote String..........................................27 External Editor.......................................28 Default Origin........................................29 Reply Header..........................................29 Expands to the time that the original message (the one....30 Message Uploads.......................................30 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ Echo Net Replies......................................30 Net Kill Sent.........................................31 Confirm Delete........................................31 Net Crash Option......................................31 Net Crash Force.......................................31 Net Attach............................................31 Group Mail............................................32 CC Mail...............................................32 Return Receipts.......................................33 Net Receipts..........................................33 Files...................................................34 Upload Credit.........................................34 Payback Credit........................................34 Touch Dates...........................................34 Show Missing..........................................34 Upload Space..........................................35 Logon New Files.......................................35 New Files Tag.........................................35 Download Start and Download End.......................35 Download Speed........................................36 No Dupe Extension.....................................36 DL Description........................................36 List Format...........................................37 Missing Format........................................39 Upload Scan...........................................39 RAMGR Function Keys...................................40 External Archive Viewer...............................40 Archivers.............................................41 Logoff Warning........................................42 New CD Areas..........................................42 Restrictions............................................42 Log-on Speed..........................................42 ANSI Speed............................................43 No300 Start and No300 End.............................43 Errorlevels.............................................43 Fax...................................................45 Display.................................................45 Monochrome............................................45 Direct Screen Write Mode..............................45 Snow Checking.........................................46 Display Lines (Size)..................................46 Colors..................................................46 Paging..................................................47 Duration..............................................47 Maximum Number........................................47 Ask Why...............................................47 Sysop Messages........................................48 External Chat Utilities...............................48 Suspend Time During Chat..............................48 Automatic Logging of Chat Sessions....................48 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ Paging Availability Schedule..........................49 New Users...............................................49 Security..............................................49 Flags.................................................49 Credit................................................51 Group.................................................52 ANSI..................................................52 AVATAR................................................52 ClrScr................................................52 More..................................................52 Sub Days..............................................52 Upload Credit (number of files).......................53 EchoMail Check........................................53 Sex...................................................53 Data Phone............................................53 Voice Phone...........................................54 One Word Names........................................54 Handle................................................54 Birth Date............................................54 Hot-Keys..............................................54 Full-Screen Message Viewer............................55 Full-Screen Message Editor............................55 IEMSI.................................................55 Language..............................................56 Date Format...........................................56 Capitalize Location...................................57 Upload Credit Kilobytes...............................57 Mailing Address.......................................57 Telephone Scan........................................57 System..................................................58 Fast Log-Ons..........................................58 Check Multi-Node Access...............................58 Remote Sysop..........................................58 Exclude Sysop.........................................58 Text Shells...........................................59 Log Style.............................................59 Multi-Node............................................60 Environment...........................................60 Screen Blanking.......................................60 Pausing After System Messages.........................61 ALT-J Swap (Shelling to DOS)..........................61 Use XMS...............................................61 Use EMS...............................................61 IEMSI.................................................61 Password Echo Character...............................61 Automatic ANSI Detection..............................62 Password Tries........................................62 Password Change Forcing...............................62 Strict Password Checking..............................62 Minimum Password Length...............................63 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ Log-on Time...........................................63 User Inactivity Timeout...............................63 Watchdog Area.........................................63 Sysop Area............................................64 Check DOB.............................................64 Limit Local...........................................64 Save Password.........................................65 Blank Logins..........................................65 Prompts.................................................65 Log-on Prompt.........................................65 Left and Right Brackets...............................65 Language Prompt.......................................65 Language Header.......................................66 Printer.................................................66 Selecting the Printer Port............................66 THE MODEM MENU............................................66 Options.................................................66 Comport...............................................67 Speed.................................................67 Lock..................................................67 Answer................................................67 Delay.................................................68 Buffer................................................68 Break.................................................69 Tries.................................................69 Offhook...............................................69 Commands................................................69 Pause for 1/4 of a second before continuing...............70 Initialization Strings................................70 Busy..................................................70 Answer................................................71 Responses...............................................71 Init..................................................71 Busy..................................................71 Ring..................................................72 Secure................................................72 300 - 38400...........................................73 THE MANAGER MENU..........................................73 Message Areas...........................................73 Moving, Copying and Deleting..........................74 Name..................................................75 Origin................................................75 Read, Write and Sysop Security........................75 Type..................................................76 Status................................................76 Users.................................................77 Days Old, Days Rcvd and Max Msgs......................77 Echoinfo..............................................77 Combined..............................................78 Attaches..............................................78 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ SoftCRs...............................................78 Deletes...............................................79 AKA...................................................79 Age...................................................79 Group.................................................79 Area Type.............................................79 JAMbase...............................................80 AltGroup1, AltGroup2 and AltGroup3....................81 Message Groups..........................................81 Name..................................................82 File Areas..............................................82 Name..................................................83 Path..................................................83 Download, List and Upload Security....................83 New...................................................84 Dupes.................................................84 CD-ROM................................................84 Free..................................................84 LongDesc..............................................84 DirectDL..............................................85 PwdUL.................................................85 UL Scan...............................................85 ArcType...............................................85 DL Days...............................................85 FD Days...............................................86 MoveArea..............................................86 Min Age...............................................86 Password..............................................87 Group.................................................87 Def. Cost.............................................87 Uploads...............................................88 Alternate File Groups.................................88 Device................................................88 AllGroups.............................................89 File Groups.............................................89 Protocols...............................................89 Name..................................................92 Key...................................................92 Ext Ctl File..........................................92 Batch.................................................93 Status................................................93 Log File..............................................93 Control File..........................................93 DL and UL Command Line................................94 DL Ctl String.........................................94 UL Ctl String.........................................95 DL Log Keyword and UL Log Keyword.....................95 Log Name Keyword......................................95 Log Desc Word.........................................95 Languages...............................................96 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ Alt-Function Keys.......................................99 Events.................................................100 Start................................................101 Status...............................................101 Errorlevel...........................................101 Forced...............................................101 Days.................................................102 Menus..................................................102 Control Files..........................................102 Combined...............................................103 Limits.................................................103 Security.............................................104 Time.................................................104 Download Limits for Individual Baud Rates............104 Local................................................104 RatioNum.............................................105 RatioK...............................................105 PerMin...............................................105 FlexTime.............................................106 Session..............................................106 Reset................................................106 ResetOfs.............................................106 ResetAmt.............................................106 Chapter 3................................................108 Menu Administration......................................108 ABOUT MENUS............................................109 MENU LAYOUT............................................109 AUTOMATIC COMMANDS.....................................113 TEMPLATES..............................................114 MESSAGE AND FILE GROUPS................................116 THE TOP MENU...........................................117 SPECIAL SWITCHES.......................................118 GLOBAL MENU............................................119 CREATING MENUS.........................................119 MENU TYPES LISTING.....................................132 Chapter 4................................................189 External Support Files...................................189 OVERVIEW...............................................190 TEXT FILES EXPLAINED...................................190 CONTROL CODES..........................................192 CONTROL CODES LISTING..................................195 System Function Codes................................195 System Data Codes....................................197 User Data Codes......................................198 Padding Control Codes................................200 Color Control Codes..................................200 TEXT FILES LISTING.....................................201 CONTROL FILES..........................................214 Editing Control Files................................214 CONTROL FILES LISTING..................................216 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ Chapter 5................................................220 User Administration......................................220 NEW USER DEFAULTS......................................221 USING REMOTEACCESS MANAGER.............................221 Modifying a User.....................................222 Finding a User.......................................222 Adding a User........................................222 Deleting a User......................................222 Account Record Fields................................223 Guest Accounts.......................................225 RAUSER.................................................225 Chapter 6................................................227 Message Database Administration..........................227 SPECIFICATIONS.........................................228 JAM Database Files...................................228 Hudson Database Files................................229 Something in Common..................................230 LIMITATIONS............................................230 MAINTENANCE............................................230 Running RAMSG........................................231 Errorlevels..........................................234 Chapter 7................................................235 File Database Administration.............................235 ABOUT THE FILE DATABASE................................236 Administration Utilities...............................237 GENFBASE.EXE.........................................237 RAFILE.EXE...........................................243 RAFILE Command-line Parameter Descriptions.........244 RAMGR.EXE............................................249 Chapter 8................................................256 Questionnaires...........................................256 WHAT IS A QUESTIONNAIRE?...............................257 Automatic Questionnaires...............................258 Script Command Listing.................................260 Example Questionnaires.................................270 Chapter 9................................................275 Multi-node Operation.....................................275 CONFIGURATION..........................................276 RACONFIG.............................................276 Paths................................................276 CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT..........................277 Individual Node Configuration........................277 Exit and Log Files.....................................278 Batch Files............................................279 Chapter 10...............................................281 Mail Networking..........................................281 PRINCIPALS OF A MAIL NETWORK.............................282 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS................................282 CONFIGURING REMOTEACCESS...............................283 Node Number..........................................283 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ Message Areas........................................284 Origin Lines.........................................284 NetMail Areas........................................285 Installing the Nodelist Files..........................285 Cost Control...........................................286 A Sample NODECOST.CTL File...........................287 Chapter 11...............................................289 Reference Information....................................289 Sysop Keys and the Status Bar..........................290 Sysop Function Keys..................................290 Sysop ALT Keys.......................................291 Other Sysop Keys.....................................293 RemoteAccess Environment Variables.....................294 RA.EXE Command-line Parameters.........................295 Shell to Mailer Mode...................................298 Errorlevels Returned by RemoteAccess...................299 Batch Files Examples...................................300 A Single-node System.................................300 A Multi-node System..................................302 A Multi-node System in Shell to Mailer Mode..........304 ============================================================ - 3 - Chapter 1 Introduction * * * * This chapter explains how to use this manual as a procedural guide as well as a reference guide. It also explains the icons, sidebars and procedural steps which were included to illustrate step-by-step procedures and highlight various features and functions. - 4 - Top Down View ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ This manual was written with a twofold target audience. First, the novice; one who has never used RemoteAccess before, and second; the experienced Sysop. For the novice, this manual provides clear, in-depth descriptions of concepts and features as well as check-list procedures to assist in feature implementation. For the experienced Sysop, the same features are available in addition to many reference examples and a useful index. In an effort to provide comprehensive documentation, we've taken a top-down approach. Each feature and concept is explained in the order in which it is implemented or configured. The chapters themselves are laid out in order of implementation and usage progression. If you start at the beginning of this manual and work your way through its chapters, you will have learned RemoteAccess from a top down perspective and will be on your way to setting up a unique system all your own. Throughout this manual, you will notice various symbols and text formatting which are used to attract your attention or indicate an action or reference. The following legend gives an explanation for each. The "NOTE" Symbol This symbol is used to attract your attention to important notes. Wherever you see this symbol, read the notes that follow. The CHEVRON POINTER Symbol ">" This symbol is used within a line of text to illustrate how to get to a specific option or feature in the RemoteAccess configuration program (RACONFIG) by selecting the sub- menus pointed to. Wherever you see the > symbol, you will see a map instructing you which pick-list menus should be selected to access a specific area of RACONFIG. Pick-list menus are pull-down or pop-up menus that contain a list of selections from which to choose. Pick-list menus are often available from other pick-list menus. The following example shows how the pointer symbol is used to indicate a position in RACONFIG: System > Paths This indicates that from the main pick-list menu in - 5 - RACONFIG, you should select the System pick-list menu. From the System pick-list menu, you should select Paths. Many references to specific areas of RACONFIG are made in this manner throughout this manual, in order to give you an instant indication where to find a given area in RACONFIG. CHECK LIST Procedures This manual guides you through several step-by- step check-lists that allow easy implementation of certain features of RemoteAccess. Wherever you see numbered lists (i.e. 1), 2), 3)), you will find a check-list procedure. - 6 - Preamble and Credits ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ It seems hard to believe, but the very first version of RemoteAccess was released just over six years ago. Living in Europe and the United States for most of that time has been about the best move I ever made, in terms of my own personal development. When I returned to Australia, I started an Internet division of Wantree. I discovered that juggling RemoteAccess, the Internet, and a usually understanding girlfriend was demanding to say the least. As a result, I have probably not given RemoteAccess as much attention as I have in the past, resulting in more and more protracted release dates for this version. Notwithstanding these obstacles, it's finally finished, and I hope you find the result as useful as past versions. I'd like to thank the RemoteAccess support and beta groups, alone with everyone who has supported the product by buying or registering it. The size of the list of individuals who have contributed in other ways has become ridiculous, so rather than name everyone separately, I will take the easy way out and say "thanks". You know who you are. Andrew Milner, Perth, Western Australia ──────────────────────── - 7 - Licensing Information (Shareware version) ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ "RA" refers to the executable programs and documentation contained in RemoteAccess Bulletin Board Software distribution archives released by Wantree Development (shareware version). 1. RA is the copyrighted material of Wantree Development. It may only be used in accordance with the conditions set out in this license agreement. 2. You may use RA for a period of three weeks on a trial basis in order to determine it's suitability for your particular application. After this period you MUST register each copy of RA that you run simultaneously. Multi-line installations that share a common file base AND have the same name need only register one copy. 3. Registration entitles you to use RA and any future versions of RA for as long as you wish, subject to any special licensing conditions attached to future versions. For details on the registration procedure, refer to the section in this document "HOW TO REGISTER". 4. Wantree Development is in no way obligated to provide future versions of, or support for, RA. 5. Site and Group registrations are available, and are dealt with on a case by case basis. 6. You may not modify or otherwise reverse-engineer RA. 7. You are encouraged to distribute RA provided that no fee is charged for its distribution, and that the distribution archive is not modified in any way. Pay Bulletin Board Systems may however charge their normal fee provided that no additional charge for RA is levied. 8. RA may not be included as part of any software library which is distributed on a commercial basis (commercial = "for money") without prior written permission from Wantree Development. 9. RA may not be used in any unlawful or illegal manner. 10. Wantree Development's liability resulting from your use or inability to use RemoteAccess is limited to the amount that the affected party has paid for it, or in the event that RA was registered with a third party for payment to Wantree Development, liability is limited to the amount that was received by Wantree Development from that third party. - 8 - How to register ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ SHAREWARE version: Systems that qualify for this category must be physically run from a noncommercial site. A site is considered to be noncommercial only if it is a private residence at which no commercial activities are conducted. NOTE: As of this release, the shareware version only supports a maximum of TWO (2) nodes. The Professional version supports up to 250. Print or reproduce the registration form at the end of this section and send it with your registration payment to one of the following sites: AUSTRALIA: AUD60 THE NETHERLANDS: HFL 110 "Registration/RA" "Registration/RA" Wantree Development C/- Peter Janssens Level 3, 28 The Esplanade Patersstraat 48 Perth 6000 5801 AV Venray WESTERN AUSTRALIA Accepts MasterCard, Accepts Visa, Amex Visa, Diners, Amex MasterCard, BankCard USA: $50 CONTINENTAL EUROPE: DM90 "Registration/RA" "Registration/RA" C/- Ed Meloan C/- Frank Altenburg 1110 Terrace Circle Drive Wickopweg 9 North Augusta SC 29841 64289 Darmstadt USA GERMANY ASIA: AUD60 or equivalent UNITED KINGDOM: GBP33 "Registration/RA" "Registration/RA" C/- Teo Chee Kian C/- FlightPath BBS PO Box 0685 PO Box 268 Bukit Merah Central Hounslow TW5 9PZ SINGAPORE 9115 UNITED KINGDOM Accepts MasterCard, Access, Visa * You MUST fill out the registration form correctly in order for your details to be processed. Not doing so will result - 9 - in delays in your key arriving. * Cheques and money orders should be made payable to the person at your registration site. * Please include either a FidoNet address or a stamped, self-addressed envelope so that receipt of your payment can be acknowledged. PROFESSIONAL version: If the system is physically run from a commercial site (ie. the site is not a private residence, or commercial activities are conducted at the site). This is professionally packaged with an expanded ring-bound manual and includes three modules not available in the shareware version: 1. Real-Time Conferencing - supporting up to 250 users concurrently, featuring public/private/password-protected conferences, conference moderators and sub-conferences. 2. RANETMGR - The RemoteAccess Network Manager, a utility designed to give you complete control over a busy multi-node system. Dynamically view the status of each node as users log on and off, what each user is doing, broadcast messages to any combination of nodes and automatically take any combination of nodes down for maintenance. 3. RAEdit - A fully functional, specially customised and registered version of GEdit, a premium full-screen message editor. 4. InterRA - An integrated processor to give RemoteAccess the ability to send and receive Internet News and E-mail via a UUCP connection to an Internet provider. The professional version supports up to 250 nodes and 100 languages, while the shareware version supports a maximum of eight languages and 2 nodes. The professional version of RemoteAccess is sold on a commercial basis only. It is NOT shareware. - 10 - Enquiries for the professional version should be directed to: AUSTRALASIA: Wantree Development Tel: +61 9 481 4433 Level 3, The Griffin Centre Fax: +61 9 481 0393 28 The Esplanade BBS: +61 9 481 0504 Perth 6000 WESTERN AUSTRALIA Internet: rainfo@wantree.com.au USA: Europe: Interscape Development ComDas GmbH 5700 Broadmoor Suite 1014 Rathgeberstrabe 48c Mission, KS 66202 91074 Herzogenaurach USA GERMANY Tel: 1 913 262 4638 Tel: +49 9132 78160 Fax: 1 913 262 4638 Fax: +49 9132 781615 BBS: 1 913 262 6065 BBS: +49 9132 781621 - 11 - *** RemoteAccess REGISTRATION FORM *** Sysop Name _________________________________________________ System Name ________________________________________________ [The above two items are used to generate your registration key and must appear EXACTLY as they do in RACONFIG.] Network Address (number and network name) __________________ Internet e-mail address ____________________________________ Primary BBS telephone number and baud ______________________ Voice telephone number _____________________________________ Hours of BBS operation _____________________________________ Postal Address : ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Version of RemoteAccess registering ______. Registration amount enclosed _______, for ____ copies. What do you like about RemoteAccess? ____________________________________________________________ What enhancements/changes would you like to see in our next release? ____________________________________________________________ - 12 - The key system ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Upon registering you will receive your uniquely generated key. Each key is a small file approximately 2k in size which contains information about your registration. To install the key, simply rename it (if necessary) to RA.KEY and copy it to your RemoteAccess system directory. When RemoteAccess detects a valid key it switches into registered mode, identifying itself by placing a "+" at the end of the version number as well as displaying the name of the system and sysop it is registered to in the "version information" menu function. For example, logging on to a registered system you would see: RemoteAccess 2.50+ Please enter your full name: Features marked in this manual with a {+} are only available when RemoteAccess is running in registered mode. These bonus features show our appreciation of your taking the time to register with us. It should be made absolutely clear that RemoteAccess is still fully functional before it is registered; the bonus features are "nice" but their absence makes the system no less usable. RemoteAccess is not and never will be "DemoWare" or "ExpireWare". WARNING! Your key is unique, and under NO circumstances should it be made available to anyone else. Doing so is a direct violation of the agreement you entered into with us by registering. - 13 - Product Support ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ You can always get the latest shareware version of RemoteAccess and technical support from the following systems: Australasia: Wantree Development Internet: rasupp@wantree.com.au BBS: (09) 481 0504 www.wantree.com.au FidoNet@3:690/418 USA and Canada: (North American RemoteAccess Support group) Bruce Bodger Geoffrey Booher The TruckStop BBS The Gateway Net BBS Tulsa OK Freeport IL 918 254 6618 815 233 5008 FidoNet@1:170/400 FidoNet@1:2270/233 Royce Jones Bob R. DAKIN BBS The Anonymous BBS Bracebridge Ontario Menomonee Falls WI 705 646 2726 414 251 2580 FidoNet@1:221/204 FidoNet@1:154/40 Mike Ehlert Jim Ray Pacific Coast Micro FileQuest Thousand Oaks CA Waco TX 805 494 8327 817 662 2361 FidoNet@1:102/1001 FidoNet@1:388/14 Jim Roe Ben Hamilton Middle Earth The Computer Connection Austin TX Copperas Cove TX 512 835 4848 817 547 7711 FidoNet@1:382/19 FidoNet@1:395/5 Anthony Haxton InterFace BBS Tulsa OK 918 665 3500 FidoNet@1:170/703 - 14 - Europe and others: (European RemoteAccess Support Group) Adrian Pop Can Dogancan Airtel Remote Access Skylight BBS Copthorne ENGLAND Istanbul TURKEY +44 342 717800 +90 1 414 3019 FidoNet@2:440/64 FidoNet@2:430/5 john barton Michael Stenander Barnabas The Caring BBS The Falcon BBS South Ockendon ENGLAND Frederiksberg DENMARK +44 708 670068 +45 31 87 63 35 FidoNet@2:257/168 FidoNet@2:231/19 Joerg Dassler Frank Altenburg RA Support HQ DIE BOX GERMANY Darmstadt GERMANY +49 911 752799 +49 6151 710809 FidoNet@2:2400/1 FidoNet@2:2405/1 Peter Hermann Ugo Uggetti DataComm I/II Venus Braunschweig GERMANY Pavia ITALY +49 531 13216 +39 382 579981 FidoNet@2:240/550 FidoNet@2:331/318 Matej Mihelic Ville Valpasvuo R.I.S.P. The Bermuda Triangle Ljubljana SLOVENIA FINLAND +38 61 199400 +358 14 434695 FidoNet@2:380/103 FidoNet@2:221/11 Peter Janssens Robert Soubie EasyBoard Venray Port de la Lune Venray THE NETHERLANDS Gradignan FRANCE +31 4780 12428 +33 56 89 51 12 Fidonet@2:512/1 FidoNet@2:324/1 Clive Jones Tony van den Bogaert C.A.L.M. Aquarius Alberton SOUTH AFRICA Antwerp BELGIUM +27 11 9001118 +32 3 3663457 FidoNet@5:7101/14 FidoNet@2:292/843 - 15 - SWRAS (Swedish RemoteAccess Support Group): Malte Erikson Johan Nilsson Odens Sal Starbase 42 Onsala SWEDEN Helsingborg SWEDEN +46 300 29436 +46 42 112714 FidoNet@2:203/302 FidoNet@2:200/212 Rolle Meltzer Mats Wallin The "TOWER" of Helsingborg FrontDoor Help Europe Helsingborg SWEDEN Hagersten SWEDEN +46 42 242480 +46 8 6453285 Fidonet@2:200/209 FidoNet@2:201/329 U.K. (United Kingdom RemoteAccess Support Group): Mark Anderson Gary Smith Dregal RemoteAccess FlightPath +44 279 444433 +44 81 759 7775 FidoNet@2:257/605 FidoNet@2:254/99 Adrian Pop Mark Kerr Airtel Yukon Ho! +44 342 717800 +44 232 768163 FidoNet@2:440/64 FidoNet@2:443/59 Dave Parker Edward Hobson Frontier The Power House +44 737 778607 +44 829 782667 FidoNet@2:440/63 FidoNet@2:258/24 - 16 - Installation ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ RemoteAccess should run on any IBM 80x86 compatible computer. The only two programs you will need in addition to the release package are DOS 3.x and a FOSSIL driver. The FOSSIL is a memory-resident program that many communications packages use to communicate with the modem. Two FOSSILs that have been successfully tested with RemoteAccess are Ray Gwinn's X00, and David Nugent's BNU. Either of these should be readily available from any local bulletin board. You will also need a modem that is capable of accepting Hayes- type commands. The minimum memory requirement is approximately 400K, but 512K is recommended. 1. Ensure that your CONFIG.SYS file contains these statements: FILES=20 BUFFERS=25 If you intend to run a multi-node system you may need to increase the number of file handles that DOS can open at one time, by raising the "FILES" value. NOTE: Each additional file handle will reduce available memory by 50 to 60 bytes. The more "BUFFERS" you allocate, the faster RemoteAccess will run. However, each additional buffer allocated will reduce memory available by 500 to 600 bytes. 2. Create a directory to put the main program files in. The configuration examples that follow later assume that this directory (the SYSTEM directory) is C:\RA. 3. Ensure that your AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains a command to set the environment variable RA to your SYSTEM directory, so that RemoteAccess can find its configuration files: SET RA=C:\RA It is possible to increase the overall performance of RemoteAccess by placing the file "RA.OVR" onto a ramdrive. If you elect to do this you must also set the following environment variable: SET RAOVR=F:\ 4. Copy all of the executable and overlay files from the RemoteAccess distribution package into the SYSTEM directory. 5. Create five more sub-directories: - 17 - C:\RA\MSGBASE This will hold the message files the system creates. C:\RA\MENUS To put your menus in, C:\RA\TXTFILES To put files such as welcome and disconnect screens in. C:\RA\ATTACH To hold message file attaches. C:\RA\FILEBASE To hold the file database. This completes the installation, and you are now ready to move on to the CONFIGURATION section. - 18 - Chapter 2 Configuration * * * * This chapter explains the configuration of RemoteAccess which is accomplished with the use of the configuration program, RACONFIG. RemoteAccess can be configured almost completely from within this program. Features and options are explained in the order in which they appear in RACONFIG. You'll learn how each feature functions as you step through this chapter. - 19 - RACONFIG In the RemoteAccess system directory (usually \RA after an initial installation), you'll find several programs which are discussed throughout this manual. One of these is the very powerful, all-around configuration program called RACONFIG. If you're just getting started, you'll want to read this entire chapter which covers every aspect of the RACONFIG program. Or, if you've already configured RemoteAccess, use this chapter as a reference guide. The User Interface ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ RACONFIG uses a full-screen user interface that is completely menu-driven. More specifically, it uses menus that contain pick-lists. A pick-list menu is one in which a list of options is available for selection. This pick-list is usually contained within a small menu window or box. This type of menu selection system is very common and easy to use. Each menu contains a highlighted cursor-bar which is used to select an item to be edited. Throughout this manual, the highlighted cursor-bar is referenced simply as the cursor-bar. The cursor-bar is positioned on any item to be edited or selected by using one of the two following methods: * Pressing the first character of the menu item you wish to select. For example, if one of the pick-list menu choices was File Areas, you could press F to position the cursor- bar or... * Using the cursor positioning keys to move the cursor up or down the pick-list until the cursor-bar is positioned on the File Areas selection. In most instances, pressing <ENTER> with the cursor-bar positioned on the field you wish to edit will place you in edit mode. However, some fields do not require any actual data entry and pressing <ENTER> will simply toggle these fields between the selections available. The escape key serves two purposes within RACONFIG. It is used to exit areas of data entry in most instances. For example, after making changes to a message area, pressing <ESCAPE> exits the message area screen and returns to the message area pick-list menu. Another function of the <ESCAPE> key is to abort field data entry. For example, pressing <ESCAPE> while you are actually entering data will abandon any changes you may have made to that field, restoring it to its original value. - 20 - Running RACONFIG ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ RACONFIG is executed from the DOS command-line. Four command-line parameters are accepted by RACONFIG which alter the mode or manner in which RACONFIG is loaded. The command-line parameters accepted are described below: -B Forces black and white (monochrome) mode. -L Use the language manager directly. -M Use the menu editor directly. To run RACONFIG from the DOS prompt, type: RACONFIG <ENTER> Or if you are using a monochrome display: RACONFIG -B <ENTER> The screen that will appear on your display shows the top- level RACONFIG menu which contains five main menu options. Each option has an associated pick-list menu. The five main options and the selections available under each is listed below: File ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Switches, Info, Exit and DOS shell. System ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Your BBS details; Paths, Site Info, Addresses and Security. Options ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Messages, files, restrictions, errorlevels, display, colors, paging, new users, system, prompts and printer options. Modem ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Modem options, commands and responses. Manager ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── - 21 - Message and file areas and groups, protocols, languages, AltFN keys, events, menus, control files, combined area defaults and Limits. The remainder of this chapter covers each and every option and sub-option. Many of these will require no modification in most new installations, although it is recommended that you select each option as you read through this chapter to get a firsthand look at how data is input and modified with this program. THE FILE MENU The first of the five main menu options is the File menu. It contains miscellaneous options and is the default menu displayed when RACONFIG is loaded. Step through each of these options and see what they do... Switches ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ This option displays the command-line parameters (also known as switches) that RACONFIG accepts. These are the same parameters outlined on the previous page. Info ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ This option displays the RemoteAccess version number for which RACONFIG was created along with the program copyright notice. Exit ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Selecting this option will end program execution and return you to DOS. Pressing <ESCAPE> from a main option menu does the same thing. If any changes have been made to the configuration, you will be prompted "Save changes (Y/n)?" before the program exits. Pressing <ENTER> or "Y" will cause all changes to be saved. Pressing "N" causes all changes to be discarded. The program then exits to DOS. DOS Shell ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ When this option is selected, a DOS shell is loaded so you can do other things. To return to RACONFIG, type "EXIT" followed by <ENTER>, at the DOS prompt. - 22 - THE SYSTEM MENU The System menu is where high-level options for your overall BBS are configured. File locations, site information, network addresses and system security are all configured here. The default settings provided are often times sufficient for proper operation. The installation program inserts the necessary basic system information required. Look at the individual options in the System pick-list. Position the cursor- bar on System and then on Paths and press <ENTER>. Paths ═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The paths shown on your display are those which you specified during program installation. These paths specify where all RemoteAccess files are stored. If a directory path is entered that does not exist, you will be prompted whether to create the directory. The following directory paths may be defined: System ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify where system and configuration files are stored. This directory is referred to as the RemoteAccess system directory throughout this manual. Menus ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the directory where default menus (*.MNU files) are stored. Text Files ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the directory where default text files (*.A?? files) are stored. Msg Base ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Message and user database files are stored in this directory. The only exception to this is when JAM format message areas are in use and separate directories are assigned to JAM message areas. - 23 - File Base ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── File database files are stored in this directory. RemoteAccess creates subdirectories under the directory specified here, to hold file database files for each file area. The subdirectories created and maintained by RemoteAccess are: HDR This directory contains all file database header files. IDX This directory contains all file database index files. TXT This directory contains all file database description text files. File attach ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the directory where files attached to local messages are stored. RemoteAccess creates and maintains subdirectories under this directory automatically whenever files are attached to local messages. These temporary subdirectories are deleted by RemoteAccess when the attached files have been downloaded or the message has been deleted. Nodelist ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the directory where mail network nodelist files are stored. If you are running RemoteAccess in conjunction with a mail network and a Front End Mailer, this directory is generally set to the directory containing the nodelist files used by your Front End Mailer. CD-ROM temp ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When CD-ROM files are downloaded, they are temporarily copied into this directory until the download is completed. This ensures that the CD-ROM drive is not busy for the duration of a download since the files are actually copied to and downloaded from the directory specified here. Semaphore ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the directory where temporary and static files used for multi-node operations are stored. A RAM disk is highly recommended. The Real-Time Conference - 24 - feature relies heavily on the use of semaphore files for passing information between nodes when NETBIOS functionality is not available. If you are running in a multi-node environment and do not have NETBIOS functionality available, the directory specified here should be the drive and path to a directory on a RAM disk. Rearchive ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the directory used to temporarily store files during an archive conversion process. See the RAFILE REARC function described in the Message Database Administration chapter for information on this feature. RIP Icons ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This is the path where your RIP icons are stored (if you use RA's built-in RIP icon support - menu command 76). Check the documentation supplied with your RIP painting software for information on creating and storing RIP icons. System log ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the full path and name of the system log file. Optionally, you may specify the *N macro which expands into the current node number. For example, if this is specified as C:\RA\RA*N.LOG, node one will write to the C:\RA\RA1.LOG file while node two will write to the C:\RA\RA2.LOG file. By not specifying a path, the log file will be written in the current node directory. Site Info ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Selecting this option presents a pick-list menu which allows you to configure your System and Sysop names as well as the location of your BBS. This information is displayed using various text file control codes or menu items within your BBS and is also used to generate your customer number, which was generated during program installation. Position the cursor-bar on Site Info and press <ENTER>. Enter the appropriate data in each of the three fields. Name ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the name of your BBS. The contents of this field is written to all exit files created when shelling or exiting to run external programs. - 25 - Sysop ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This is the name of the System Operator (Sysop). Any messages addressed to Sysop are automatically addressed to the name entered here. The contents of this field is also written to all exit files created when shelling or exiting to run external programs. Location ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the location of your BBS. For example, this can be your city, state and country. Addresses ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option is used to enter your mail network address, if applicable. Notice that in addition to a Main address, you may specify up to 9 AKA addresses. With RemoteAccess, you can participate in up to a total of 10 mail networks by entering alternate network addresses here. If you will be participating in one or more mail networks, select your Main and AKA network addresses using the format: Zone:Net/Node_number If you won't be participating in a mail network, leave these fields blank. For more information on mail networking, see the Mail Networking chapter later in this manual. Security ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ This option allows you to select a password that would be required in order to load RACONFIG, RAMGR and RANETMGR as well as in order to select any Sysop Function Keys from the local console. {+} Registered only. NOTE: The only way to remove this password is to delete the file CONFIG.RA from the system directory. Therefore, if you decide to implement security at the local console, it may be wise to backup CONFIG.RA prior to implementation. THE OPTIONS MENU The third main option is the Options menu. This menu is used to configure various features related to your overall system. Options available from this menu are grouped by their perspective areas. Each group has its own pick-list menu. Position the cursor-bar on the Options selection. The - 26 - Options pick-list menu will be displayed automatically. The cursor-bar automatically repositions itself over the Messages group selection. Press <ENTER> for the Messages group pick-list menu. Messages ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The Messages group pick-list menu presents a list of features that may be configured which pertain to the overall message system. Check For New Mail During Log-on ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When enabled, this option forces RemoteAccess to scan the message base for new mail addressed to the user. This option has three possible settings; Yes, No or Ask. If set to Yes, RemoteAccess will automatically check for new mail during the log-on process. If set to No, the user's mail-box will not be scanned. If set to Ask, the user will be prompted whether to check for new mail during the log-on process. Full Mail Check ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option has two possible settings; Yes or No. If set to Yes, RemoteAccess will scan the entire message base from beginning to end for mail addressed to the user that is marked as unread. If set to No, the message base is only scanned from the last message that the user has read. While this is much faster there is the possibility that some mail may be skipped if the user elected not to read mail during the previous log-on session. Quote String ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option is used to select the string of characters which RemoteAccess will place before any message text that is quoted in a reply. This is useful for separating quoted message text from reply message text within a message. For example, a message quote string specified as the ">" character might look like this: ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ > I have been using RemoteAccess for two │ │ > months now and love it! │ │ │ │ I have to agree with you there, John. │ └───────────────────────────────────────────────┘ - 27 - In this example, you can see that the message text that is being quoted begins with the defined Quote String. This makes the message easier to understand. Two macro characters are also supported within the quote string. They are: @ This macro character is expanded within message text into the upper-case initials of the person who is being quoted or replied to. # This macro is expanded into the lower-case initials of the person who is being quoted or replied to. For example, if the quote string was specified as "@>", quoted message text might look something like this: ┌───────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ JP> I have been using RemoteAccess for two │ │ JP> months now and love it! │ │ │ │ I have to agree with you there, John. │ └───────────────────────────────────────────────┘ This gives an even better idea of which message text is being quoted. External Editor ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── With this option, you can enable the use of an external, full-screen message editor. The full-screen editor allows messages to be entered in a word processing type of environment rather than a line-by-line text entry environment like the one used with the internal message editor. Full-screen editors usually allow you to move the cursor around the full screen, entering and editing text. One such editor is GEdit. To configure RemoteAccess to use GEdit as the external editor, follow the check-list procedure below: 1) Assuming that your RemoteAccess system directory is defined as \RA, enter the following text in the External Editor field: \RA\GEDIT.EXE As previously mentioned, any of the optional data macros supported in menu function type 7 - "Run an external program in a shell" can be used here. For example, to swap RemoteAccess out of memory before loading GEdit, enter the following text in the External Editor field: - 28 - \RA\GEDIT.EXE *M That's all there is to it. With this field defined, users who have the full-screen editor enabled within their profile will now use GEdit as their message editor. NOTE: Most full-screen editors require at least ANSI emulation on the user's end. RemoteAccess will warn a user of this minimum requirement if the user does not have ANSI emulation enabled. Default Origin ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── An origin line, which is appended to the end of EchoMail messages, is used in mail networks to show users of other systems where a message originated. This option sets the default origin line which is appended to the end of all outgoing EchoMail messages. This will take effect in all EchoMail areas except in areas where you have defined a specific origin line to be used. For example, if the following origin line was specified: RemoteAccess Central When appended to an outgoing EchoMail message, would look something like this: * Origin: RemoteAccess Central (2:270/18) Reply Header ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The reply header is displayed at the top of a message whose sender was not the originator or the receiver of the original message. In other words, if a user replied to a message that was not originally addressed to him or her and the user was not the sender of the message being replied to, the reply header would be inserted at the beginning of the reply to indicate to other readers that the message was being replied to by a third party. The following macro characters may be used within this field: @ Expands into the person's name to which the original message was addressed. # Expands into the person's name who posted the original message (the one being replied to). - 29 - ` Expands into the date that the original message (the one being replied to) was posted. Expands to the time that the original message (the one being replied to) was posted. For example, if the following reply header was specified: In a message originally to @, # said: Would expand in a message to: In a message originally to All, Joe User said: Message Uploads ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Msg uploads option is used to allow users to upload message text. If set to Yes, when a user enters a message, the user will be prompted whether to upload a prepared message. This allows the user to prepare a message off-line using any ASCII text editor, and upload it using any of the available internal file transfer protocols. NOTE: Only internal protocols may be used to upload a message since RemoteAccess does not have enough control over external protocols. The maximum size of a message that may be uploaded is 20 kilobytes. Echo Net Replies ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The "Echo netreplies" option is used to allow or disallow users to reply to EchoMail messages via private NetMail. When replying to an EchoMail message, users will be prompted whether to send the reply via NetMail, when this option is enabled. For example, with this option enabled, and a user selects to reply to an EchoMail message, the following prompt will be given: Reply via personal NetMail (y/N)? _ If the user presses "Y", RemoteAccess will send the saved reply via NetMail. If the user presses "N" or <ENTER>, the saved reply will be posted in the same EchoMail area as the message being replied to. {+} Registered only. NOTE: This option is only available when RemoteAccess can successfully determine where the original message came from. - 30 - Net Kill Sent ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The "Net.killsent" option applies to NetMail sent through a mail network. When a message is entered, and this option is set to Ask, RemoteAccess will ask the user if the message should be deleted after it has been sent from the message database. If this option is set to Yes, NetMail messages will be deleted automatically after being sent from the message database. Confirm Delete ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The "Confirm delete" option has two possible settings; Yes and No. If set to Yes, users who delete a message will be prompted for confirmation prior to deletion. If this field is set to No, RemoteAccess does not prompt for confirmation and the message is deleted as soon as the delete command is executed. Setting this option to Yes prevents users from accidentally deleting messages from the database. Net Crash Option ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The "Net.crash" option is used to specify the minimum security level required for users to be able to send a message as CrashMail. For example, if this field is set to a value of 100, then any user with a security level of 100 or greater will be prompted whether to send a NetMail message with the Crash flag set. NOTE: CrashMail is network mail that is not held for delivery as regular NetMail is. Therefore, making this option available to users in general could potentially lead to excessive long distance charges since CrashMail messages are generally sent at any time of the day. Net Crash Force ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The "Net.crash force" option is used to specify the minimum security level for which NetMail messages will be forced to be sent as CrashMail. With the "Net.crash opt" field, you could specify the minimum security level required for asking the user if a message should be sent as CrashMail. With this field, the setting specifies the security level where CrashMail will be forced. This field might be set to a level higher than that of even the Sysop in order to avoid sending CrashMail during inappropriate times of the day. - 31 - Net Attach ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The "Net.attach" option is used to specify the minimum security level required to attach files to NetMail messages. In most mail networks, this is perfectly acceptable except where NetMail messages are routed through other systems within the network. In such cases, the systems performing the routing of NetMail messages would also be burdened with the time and cost of sending any attached files with the messages. Messages generally take a few seconds to send whereas files can take several minutes to send. Therefore, this option should be used with care and consideration for other mail network Sysops. When specifying a filename to attach to a NetMail message, a full drive:path\filename may be given. Group Mail ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option is used to determine the minimum security level a user must have in order to post mail to users of a specific group. Since group mail messages are actually individual messages addressed to each user of a given group or security level, it has the potential of using up a bit of disk space. This is something that should be considered when setting this option. Group mail is usually a feature that is used by the Sysop or Assistant Sysop only. See menu function type 27 - "Post message" in the Menu Administration chapter for more information on sending group mail. CC Mail ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Use this option to specify the minimum security level required to send carbon copies of messages to other users. If enabled, and a user saves a message, RemoteAccess gives the following prompt: Send carbon copies to other users (y/N)? _ If Yes is entered in response to this prompt, RemoteAccess prompts the user to enter another "To:" name. For each valid name entered, a carbon copy of the original message is sent. Carbon copies contain the original message text, with a line inserted at the top of the message informing the recipient that the message is a copy: * Carbon copy, originally to: Joe User - 32 - Return Receipts ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Use this option to specify the minimum security level required to enable users to request return receipts. Users having access to this feature who send messages to other users on your system may request return receipts which inform them when their messages have been read by the recipient. When this feature is enabled and a message is saved, RemoteAccess displays the following prompt: Would you like a return receipt (y/N)? _ If the user answers Yes, RemoteAccess generates a receipt when the message is read by the recipient. Messages for which a return receipt is requested contain the ReqRec flag in the message header. This is displayed to the recipient of the message informing of the receipt request. Here's an example of a return receipt generated by RemoteAccess: Message #2323 - Message Area Name (Private) (RetRec) Date: 02-15-93 16:55 From: RemoteAccess To: Joe User Subject: Return receipt confirmation Confirmation receipt: To : Jim User Date : 15-Feb-93 16:50 Rcvd : 15-Feb-93 16:55 Subj : Hi Joe Net Receipts ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Like the return receipts which are used locally, you can also specify whether or not your system will allow the use of the NetMail Receipt feature. This option allows you to specify the minimum security level required for access to this feature. When this feature is enabled, the sender of a NetMail message is given the opportunity to request a return receipt. While this might be ideal in certain situations, the majority of Sysops who participate in mail networks frown on return receipt requests since they can cause undue long distance charges in order to return receipts. For this same reason, many Sysops do not honor return receipt - 33 - requests via NetMail. Files ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The next option group in the Options pick-list is the Files option group. This group contains a pick-list of features that pertain to the RemoteAccess file transfer system. Step through each option as you read the descriptions that follow. Upload Credit ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This feature provides a way of rewarding your users for uploading files to you. When this is set to a non-zero value, users are granted the number of seconds entered here for each one minute of time spent uploading. For example, if this field is set to a value of 30 (seconds), and a user spends 10 minutes uploading, the user would be granted an extra 5 minutes for the current log-on session. NOTE: The system timer is always disabled while an upload is in progress. Payback Credit ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This feature allows users to be credited with the number of credits specified here, each time a file which a user has previously uploaded is downloaded by another user. For example, if this field is set to a value of 1 and Joe User uploads the file MYFILE.ARJ, Joe will be given 1 credit each time MYFILE.ARJ is downloaded by another user. NOTE: If this field is set to a value of 255, then the uploader is credited with the cost (in credits) of the file to the downloader. Touch Dates ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When a file is uploaded using a batch protocol such as Zmodem or Ymodem, the original date of the file is normally preserved when the file is saved in the upload area. However, if this option is set to Yes, RemoteAccess will reset the date stamp of the file to the date on which it was uploaded. - 34 - Show Missing ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this option is set to Yes, RemoteAccess will display file database entries even if the actual file is not present within the file area being listed. For example, an entry may exist in the file database even though the actual file may have been deleted or moved. If this is the case, and this option is set to Yes, RemoteAccess will display the entry for which the file is missing using the "Missing format" described later in this section. Upload Space ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── It is possible to disable uploads when the amount of free space on your upload drive falls below a preset level. For example, to disable uploads if there is less than 1 megabyte of free space available, enter 1024 (k) in this field. Logon New Files ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option has three possible settings; Yes, No or Ask and is used to allow or disallow users to check for new files since their last call during the log-on process. The effects of each setting is described in the following table: Setting Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Yes During the log-on process, RemoteAccess will automatically scan the file database for files that are new since the user's last log-on, presenting the list to the user. Ask During the log-on process, the user will be prompted whether to scan the file database for new files. No No new files scan will be performed. New Files Tag ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option is used to enable or disable file tagging during the new files listing process. For example, when this option is enabled, users may tag files for later download while viewing a list of files that are new since the user's last log-on. Each file that is tagged is stored in the user's tag-list which may be viewed, edited, cleared or downloaded during the log- on session. - 35 - Download Start and Download End ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess allows you to define a period of time in which files may be downloaded by your users. For example, you may not want your users to be able to download files between 5:00pm (17:00) and 8:00pm (20:00). In this case, Download Start would be set to 20:00 and Download End would be set to 17:00, which would define the period (or window) of time in which files may be downloaded. Users who attempt to download files outside of the defined download schedule are presented with the DNLDHRS.A?? text file, if it exists. This file is fully described later in the External Support Files chapter. To allow your users to download files at any time, set both of these fields to 00:00. NOTE: Download hours are overridden by the xfer priority flag within a user's account record. Users with this flag set may download at any time regardless of the schedule defined here. Download Speed ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option is used to specify the minimum BPS connect speed that is required by your users in order to download files from your system. For example, if this field is set to a value of 2400, only users having a connect speed of 2400 BPS or greater would be permitted to download files. No Dupe Extension ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess has the capability of checking for duplicate files before allowing an upload to proceed. This eliminates the possibility of users uploading files which already exist within the file database. However, when RemoteAccess checks for a duplicate filename, it may be configured to include or ignore the filename extensions when performing comparisons. This enables comparisons of different file archive types. For example, if the file MYFILE.LZH exists within the file database and a user attempts to upload the file MYFILE.ARJ, RemoteAccess will detect a duplicate filename when this option is set to Yes. - 36 - DL Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field has three possible settings; Yes, No or Ask and is used to allow or disallow your users to include file descriptions when downloading files. Setting Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Yes RemoteAccess automatically includes a file description list with downloaded files. Ask Before a download is started, RemoteAccess asks the user whether to include file descriptions with the file being downloaded. No RemoteAccess does not send file descriptions. List Format ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Using this option, you may configure the format in which file database entries are displayed to your users. This is accomplished using a template for the display line. This method allows you to completely customize the way in which your file lists are presented. The following table lists the macros that are supported within this field as well as within the "Missing format" field described in this section. {+} Registered only. Macro String Data Represented by This Macro ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── @NE Filename, uppercase, with extension. @NN Filename, uppercase, no extension. @SB File size in bytes. @SK File size in kilobytes. @UL Name of the file Uploader. @UD Date on which file was uploaded. @FD Actual file date. @LD Date on which the file was last downloaded. @TD Number of times file has been downloaded. @Kn Keyword [n] for the file (where n = 1 to 5). @CS Cost of the file in credits (deducted from user's credit). @DF Formatted description of the file. @DU Unformatted description of the file (also referred to as user mode). @FR Displays (Free) if the file is free, spaces if it is not. @NA Displays (NotAvail) if the file is marked as not available. @NW Displays an * character if the file is new, space if it is not. - 37 - @PW Displays (Password) if the file is password- protected. Substituting a "%" character for the "@" character forces string type fields to lowercase. Substituting a "^" character for the "@" character forces string type fields to uppercase. There is one additional special macro - "#nn" which is used to set the width for all following fields to "nn" characters. When used, "nn" must be specified as two digits. For example, specifying "#03" will truncate or pad all following fields to 3 characters in length. Use "#00" to reset to default field widths. NOTE: When used, the @DF and @DU macros must appear at the very end of the list format entry. When file lists contain special formatting such as boxed text, you should use the @DU macro to display unformatted file descriptions. This user mode of display maintains any special formatting you may have applied to file descriptions and prevents RemoteAccess from automatically formatting or wrapping lines. In addition to these macros, the ^K[cc text file control code (change color) may also be used within this field. See the External Support Files chapter for more information on this control code. To obtain the hexadecimal color number to be used in conjunction with the ^K control code, press F1 while editing this field. This presents a color chart which can be used as a reference when selecting color numbers. The following example illustrates how a list format line might be defined. This example includes codes which produce a file listing containing: * The filename and extension, in uppercase characters displayed using a light yellow foreground on a black background. * The date on which the file was uploaded, displayed using a light green foreground color on a black background. * The size of the file in bytes displayed using a white foreground color on a black background. * The number of times the file has been downloaded, displayed using a light magenta foreground color on a black background. * An "*" character which is displayed for all new files since the caller's last log-on using a light red foreground color on a black background. - 38 - * The formatted file description displayed using a gray foreground color on a black background. ^K[0E@NE ^K[0A@UD ^K[0F@SB ^K[0D@TD ^K[0C@NW^K[07@DF Missing Format ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Like "List Format", this field allows you to configure the format in which file database entries with missing files are displayed to your users. See the "List Format" field above for information on macros supported within this field. NOTE: This entry is only useful when the Show Missing option is set to Yes. Upload Scan ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess allows uploaded files to be scanned, using external third-party software, to determine if the files have been infected by a computer virus. This enables you to automatically detect files which contain a virus and take the appropriate actions before accepting the file or allowing its distribution. Position the cursor-bar on the Upload scan option and press <ENTER>. A new pick-list menu will be displayed. Press <ENTER> on the Scan Online option to toggle between the available settings. When set to Yes, uploads will be scanned while the user is still on-line. When set to No, uploads are scanned immediately after the user disconnects. When set to Ask, the text file UPLDSCAN.A?? is displayed (if it exists) just before the user is prompted, "Scan your uploads now?" which gives the user the option of waiting while the scan takes place or to scan the files after the user disconnects. NOTES: 1. Users are not credited for uploads until after the uploaded files pass the scan process. 2. To effect upload scanning you must also enable the UL Scan option for each file area in which this option should be active. Position the cursor-bar on the Failed Scan option and press <ENTER>. A new pick-list menu will be displayed. Use this menu to select which actions are to be taken when a file - 39 - fails the virus scan. You may either delete the file or mark it as unlisted or unavailable. You may additionally move the file to another area by specifying the area number in the "Move To" field. Any of these options may be combined with the exception of the Delete option. Position the cursor-bar on the Scan Utility field and press <ENTER>. Enter the command-line to activate the external virus scan utility. RemoteAccess simply executes this command-line for each uploaded file. The full path and filename of each file may be passed by specifying the @ macro character. For example, to execute SCAN.EXE from the C:\UTILITY directory to scan a file just uploaded, this field might look like this: C:\UTILITY\SCAN.EXE @ If the scan utility returns a non-zero errorlevel to RemoteAccess, the file is assumed to be corrupt in some way and thus, fails the scan process. NOTE: You must specify a full drive and path in the Scan Utility field. RAMGR Function Keys ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option allows you to configure up to 5 external program command-lines which may be activated using the ALT-F1 through ALT-F5 keys from within the RAMGR file list screen. Any @ characters within this field will be expanded into the full path and filename of the file that is currently highlighted. The *M macro may be used to swap RAMGR out of memory before shelling to the external program. For example, to run the program FILEVIEW.EXE from the C:\UTILITY directory, passing the path and filename of the currently-highlighted file and swapping RAMGR before the shell: C:\UTILITY\FILEVIEW.EXE @ *M External Archive Viewer ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess has an internal archive viewing utility that may be used to view the formatted contents of many types of file archives. However, if you prefer, you can use an external archive viewing utility by specifying the full drive, path and filename of the viewer to be used, in this - 40 - field. See menu function type 34-"View archive" in the Menu Administration chapter for more information on viewing archives. {+} Registered only. Archivers ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess supports the use of up to 10 archiver utility programs. These are used primarily in converting archives from one format to another. When configuring file areas (later in this chapter) you can specify the archive format to convert all uploaded files to. For example, if you favor the .LZH format, you can specify that all uploads are to be converted to this type. The conversion function is actually performed by the RAFILE utility which is discussed in the File Database Administration chapter. RAFILE uses the information entered here to carry out its REARC function. If you don't want to convert uploaded archives, you don't have to specify anything here. But if you do, you'll probably want to include at least the most popular archiver utilities. These utilities are available on most any BBS that offers shareware software programs for download. Position the cursor-bar on Archivers and press <ENTER>. Next, position the cursor-bar on "Arc 1" and press <ENTER> to edit the archiver command information. It doesn't matter what order in which the archivers are entered. RemoteAccess simply looks at the filename extension and determines which archiver is to be used. The information entered includes the archive filename extension, the command- line used to unpack archives of this type and the command-line used to pack archives of this type. When the @ macro character is used in this field, it is expanded into the full path and filename of the archive filename that functions are being performed on. The first field (Arc 1) is used to enter a 3-character filename extension which corresponds to the archive type being defined. For example, if you're entering archiver information for the ARJ archiver utility, enter ARJ and press <ENTER>. Next, you will be prompted to enter the unpack command- line for this archiver. For example, to enter the unpack command-line for the ARJ archiver (and assuming that, for the sake of this example, it exists in the directory C:\ARJ) you might enter the following command-line: C:\ARJ\ARJ.EXE e @ - 41 - After pressing <ENTER> in this field, you will be prompted to enter the pack command-line. In keeping with our example, you might enter: C:\ARJ\ARJ.EXE a @ After pressing <ENTER> in this field, you will be returned to the Archivers pick-list menu. Continue entering the extension, unpack and pack information for all archiver types you wish to support. When entering the command-lines in the unpack and pack fields, you must specify a drive and path as well as the filename and extension. Logoff Warning ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If enabled, this option will warn a user who is about to logoff that he/she has files tagged. At this point, the user will be given the option of returning to the system. New CD Areas ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── By default, file areas defined as being on a CD-ROM are not included in a scan for new files. It is possible to override this by setting this option to "Yes". Restrictions ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The next option group is the Restrictions group. This group simply offers three restriction settings that can be applied to your system. Position the cursor-bar on the Restrictions option and press <ENTER>. Step through each of the pick-list options as you read the descriptions that follow. Log-on Speed ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option allows you to specify the minimum modem connection speed that is required in order for a user to be able to log-on to your system. For example, if this field has a setting of 2400, users connecting at a BPS rate less than 2400 would not be allowed to log-on. Instead, the text file TOOSLOW.ASC is displayed just before the call is terminated. See the External Support Files chapter for more information on this file. - 42 - ANSI Speed ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option is used to specify the minimum modem connection speed that is required in order for users to enable ANSI emulation. Since ANSI escape codes are used to effect color changes and cursor positioning, they add to the communications overhead and can effectively slow throughput to callers of low BPS connection rates. For example, to restrict the use of ANSI emulation to callers with at least a 2400 BPS connect speed, set this field to 2400. No300 Start and No300 End ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess allows you to configure a period (or window) of time in which 300 BPS callers are not allowed to log-on to your system. Although faster modems have become affordable, we realize that there are still some 300 BPS modem Die-hards out there who refuse to upgrade. If you wish to restrict your system to allow 300 BPS callers only during certain times of the day, set these fields to the starting and ending times of this period. For example, to disallow 300 BPS callers between the hours of 5:00pm (17:00) and 8:00pm (20:00), enter 17:00 in the No300 Start field and 20:00 in the No300 End field. When a 300 BPS caller attempts to log-on during the restricted time frame, RemoteAccess will display the text file NO300.ASC (if it exists) prior to terminating the call. Errorlevels ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The next option group is the Errorlevels group. This group is used to specify the errorlevels that RemoteAccess will return when used in conjunction with a third-party Front End Mailer. Fax/modem support is also offered through the use of one of these options. If you won't be using a Front End Mailer or a fax/modem, skip ahead to the Display options group. If you will be using a Front End Mailer or a fax/modem, or would like to understand how one is used with RemoteAccess, position the cursor-bar on Errorlevels and press <ENTER>. A new pick-list menu will be displayed which contains a selection list of connect speeds and their corresponding errorlevel numbers. - 43 - Front End Mailer software is an application which is generally used to link a BBS to a mail network. Within a mail network, systems exchange mail (NetMail), messages (EchoMail) and files. Many Sysops participate in mail networks in order to provide their users with EchoMail message conferences which are message areas devoted to specific topics of all sorts. This requires systems to adhere to guidelines set forth within individual mail networks. It also requires systems to have the ability to answer an incoming call and determine whether the call is another node within the mail network or a human BBS caller. The system must then act accordingly. If another node is calling, a protocol is used to exchange data between the nodes. If the Front End Mailer detects a human BBS caller, it must be able to load the BBS. Under these conditions, you can probably see why separate Front End Mailer software is required in order to participate in a mail network. Although RemoteAccess does not act as a Front End Mailer to a mail network by itself, it does work in conjunction with most Front End Mailer software. Generally speaking, there are two basic methods of loading RemoteAccess while a Front End Mailer is in use. The first method is to load the mailer directly from a batch file. The front end would then answer incoming calls and if a human BBS caller was detected, it would exit to the calling batch file with an errorlevel which is based on the caller's connection speed. The calling batch file would trap the errorlevel and load RemoteAccess using the appropriate command-line parameters to set the BPS rate and other settings. The drawback to this method is that there may be long delays between the time the Front End Mailer detects the human BBS caller and the time RemoteAccess prompts the user to enter his or her log-on name. The second method greatly reduces this apparent loading time and sounds trickier to implement than it really is. The Shell to Mailer feature permits RemoteAccess itself to be loaded first which, in turn, runs the Front End Mailer software in a DOS shell. When a human BBS caller is detected by the Front End Mailer, it exits with the same DOS errorlevel set as in the first method. But rather than control being passed back to the calling batch file, it is instead passed back to RemoteAccess which called the Front End Mailer software using the DOS shell. The errorlevel that the Front End Mailer software returns to RemoteAccess is checked against the list of errorlevels defined in the Errorlevel pick-list. If a match is found, RemoteAccess uses the connection speed corresponding to the - 44 - matched errorlevel to communicate with the caller. The advantage of using the second method is that since RemoteAccess is already loaded when the DOS shell to load the Front End Mailer was executed, the BBS appears to load much faster and the caller doesn't experience a long delay (even if RemoteAccess is swapped to disk prior to shelling to the Front End Mailer software. NOTE: When an errorlevel is passed which either does not match any of the errorlevels in the pick-list, or matches the errorlevel specified in the Fax field, RemoteAccess immediately exits to the calling batch file, passing the received errorlevel to it. For information on loading RemoteAccess in Shell to Mailer mode, see the RA.EXE Command-Line Parameters, Shell to Mailer and Batch File Examples sections of the Reference Information chapter. Fax ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Fax field is used to specify the errorlevel that RemoteAccess is to exit with when a fax connect response is received from the modem (see Responses in the Modem section below). When RemoteAccess answers an incoming call and the connect response from the modem matches the Fax connect response, it exits to the calling batch file, passing the errorlevel specified here. This enables you to use a fax/modem as your BBS modem and still receive incoming faxes. {+} Registered only. Display ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The Display options group contains a pick-list of options that pertain to your computer's display monitor. Through these options, RemoteAccess supports monochrome (black and white) and color monitors as well as 43 and 50 display line modes. For a list of display options, position the cursor-bar on Display and press <ENTER>. Monochrome ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Setting this option to Yes tells RemoteAccess to use monochrome mode. In this mode, RemoteAccess remaps (changes) all color definitions to black and white. - 45 - Direct Screen Write Mode ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Specifies that fast direct screen writes are to be used. If you are not using RemoteAccess in a multitasking environment, set this option to Yes. This will cause all screen output to be written to video RAM directly instead of using your PCs BIOS functions to perform the task. This results in a significantly increased screen write speed. If you are using multitasking software, set this option to No. Snow Checking ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Some older CGA (Color Graphics Adapter) adapters are prone to snowing while an application program performs display output functions. This occurs when software updates the computer display at high rates. RemoteAccess can counter this effect if the Snow Check option is set to Yes. If you have a CGA adapter, set this option to No. If you discover the snowing effect, change it to Yes. Display Lines (Size) ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Display Lines option allows you to configure the display size (in lines) and has three possible settings: Setting Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 25 Standard 25-line mode. 43/50 EGA 43-line and VGA 50-line mode. AUTO When this setting is specified, RemoteAccess uses the mode which is active at the time it is loaded. Colors ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The Colors option group contains a list of items that allow you to customize some of the more often used colors that the user sees. Select this option to display the pick-list of items that may be edited. After selecting a particular item, a color selection pick-list menu will be displayed. Use the UP, DOWN, LEFT and RIGHT keys to move the color selector within the pick-list. As you move the selector, the hexadecimal color number located along the bottom of the menu changes to reflect the color at the current selector position. Position the color selector on the desired combination and press <ENTER> to save it. The items for which colors can be configured are listed below. - 46 - Text Default color of all text. Statbar Color of the status bar. Highlight Window highlight color. Window Window normal color. Border Window border color. Hiprompt Highlighted text color. CRprompt The Press <ENTER> prompt color. Input User input field color. Tag Tag number (displayed in file lists) color. Paging ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The next option group contains items related to the RemoteAccess Paging functions. The items used to control the paging system's characteristics, as well as a paging schedule are configured here. In addition to the options that follow, RemoteAccess supports text file display and custom page tunes. These are discussed in the chapters on Menu Administration and External Support files. Position the cursor-bar on Paging and press <ENTER>. Duration ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Use this field to set the duration (in seconds) that the paging tune will sound at the local console. If this time expires without any Sysop intervention, the user will be informed that the Sysop is unavailable. The text file PAGED.A?? is displayed, if it exists. Maximum Number ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the maximum number of times a user can page the Sysop unsuccessfully during one session. When this limit has been reached, the user will not be able to page the Sysop any more during the current session. If a page is answered by the Sysop, the number of unsuccessful page attempts is reset to zero. Ask Why ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this field is set to Yes, users are prompted to enter a reason for the requested chat. The response entered is then displayed on the status bar, and may be re-displayed later by pressing F6 on the local console keyboard. {+} Registered only. - 47 - Sysop Messages ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If a page attempt is unsuccessful, the user can be prompted to leave a message addressed to the Sysop. To enable this feature, enter the desired message area number that you would like these messages to be stored in the Sysop Msgs field. Setting this field to zero disables this feature. {+} Registered only. External Chat Utilities ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The External field is used to specify the command-line of an external chat program. If this field is not empty, RemoteAccess executes the specified program instead of using the built-in chat module. All optional data macros supported by menu function type 7-"Run external program in a shell" may also be used within this field. For example, to use an external full-screen chat program called GCHAT.EXE located in the C:\RA directory, and swap RemoteAccess out of memory before loading the program, you might enter: C:\RA\GCHAT.EXE *M Using the optional data parameter macros listed under menu function type 7-"Run an external program in a shell" in the Menu Administration chapter, you can pass any number of parameters that may be required by the external chat program. {+} Registered only. Suspend Time During Chat ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If the Suspend feature is set to Yes, RemoteAccess freezes the system timer while the Sysop is chatting with a user. This means that the user will exit the chat with the same time remaining as when the chat was initiated. Automatic Logging of Chat Sessions ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── During a chat, the Sysop may press CTRL-A to record the conversation in an ASCII text log file. If the Auto Log feature is enabled, the capture log is opened automatically each time a chat is initiated. Whether you open a capture log manually or automatically, a pop-up window appears on your display, prompting for the filename in which the chat session is to be recorded. Once a capture file is opened, it may be closed during the - 48 - chat session by pressing CTRL-A. Paging Availability Schedule ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In each of the Sunday through Saturday fields you may define the start and end times during which users are permitted to page the Sysop on a daily basis. The first field for each day determines the start time, and the second field determines the end time during which users may page the Sysop. To disable paging completely for any given day, set both fields to 00:00. New Users ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The New Users options group contains a pick-list of options which determine how your system will treat new users. Security ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify the security level that will be assigned to a new user who logs-on for the first time. If you run a private system, and do not want to allow new users to log-on, set this field to zero. When configured as a private system, new users are notified that the system is private and are disconnected immediately. See the PRIVATE.ASC text file description in the External Support Files chapter for more information. Flags ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When a new user logs-on to your system, you can assign default settings to the user's access flags. Valid settings are ON or OFF (specified as X and -). You have probably already read sections boasting about the security system used by RemoteAccess. The total flexibility and scope of the security system permits you to allow or deny access to various entities of your system based on security levels, time of day, user credits, file ratios, groups, user age and even user sex. But to make this flexibility complete, RemoteAccess offers what are called access flags, also known as security flags which can be used individually or in combination with other restrictions to allow or deny access to virtually any part of your BBS. Before configuring access flags, it is important that you understand how they can be used. Since the new user flags option brings forth your first encounter with access flags, - 49 - now would be a good time to discover them. Are access flags necessary? As a matter of fact no, they are not. But if you understand how they can be used, you might just find a practical use for them. Access flag settings are stored in each user's account record. Each user's access flags setting can be compared to the flag settings specified for individual menu items, message areas and file areas. Therefore, access to these areas can be completely controlled using access flags. Think of access flags as a series of switches. Each switch may be set to an ON or OFF state. There are four sets of access flags which are lettered A through D. Each set contains eight individual flags numbered 1 through 8. Individual access flags are therefore referenced by the set letter and flag number. For instance, when referring to the first flag in the first set, we are referring to access flag A1. Likewise, when referring to the last flag in the last set, we are referring to access flag D8. This series of switches, as we've called them, can be assigned to any of the items outlined above. The flag settings contained in the user record must identically match the settings assigned to a given item before access is granted to that item. A single access flag may be turned ON in a menu item, for instance. The same flag must also be ON in a user's record before the user can access or even view the menu item. While a single access flag or switch might be sufficient, a series of switches may also be used. The following illustration shows a sample of a user record. Notice the access flag settings for this user. ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Name : Clutch Cargo Flags Handle : Clutch Cargo Uploads : 0 Location : Tuterville, LD Dnloads : 6 Password : Not visible UploadK : 0 Security : 100 Last time : 16:52 DnloadK : 100 Home# : 612-555-1212 Last date : 02-15-93 TodayK : 0 Data# : 612-555-1212 1st date : 02-10-93 Messages posted : 10 A Flags : XX------ Sub date : 02-15-93 High msg read : 623 B Flags : -------- Birthdate : 03-25-60 Number of calls : 7 C Flags : -------X Time used today : 5 Last msg area : 2 D Flags : -------- Screen length : 25 Last file area : 1 Credit : 90 Last pwd change : 7 Last file group : 1 Pending : 20 Last DOB check : 7 Last msg group : 1 Group : 1 Date format : MM-DD-YY Protocol : Sex : Male Language : 0 Fwd : - 50 - Addr1 : 13450 Sparrowsong court #14055 Addr2 : Nowhere, USA Addr3 : 99099-9900 Comnt : This is a test user ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In this record, the access flags A1, A2 and C8 are set to ON. In a user record, any access flag that is set to ON is denoted by the X character. Inverse to this, any flag that is set to OFF is denoted by the - character. Within a user's record, these are the only two possible settings. Now for the sake of example, let's say that one menu item in the menu MAINMENU contained access flag settings as follows: A Flag: -X-----O B Flag: -------- C Flag: -------- D Flag: -------- Notice that the A flag set has two settings. Where did that "O" come from? As mentioned, only the X and - settings are valid within a user's flag settings. But in a menu item, message area or file area, a third setting is allowed. By specifying the O character in one of these areas, we are saying that the flag is required to be OFF (set to a - character) in the user's record. Keep in mind that a user's access flags are considered to be static. That is to say that they may be modified by various functions (such as questionnaires and menu items). On the other hand, access flags in menu items, message areas and file areas specify a specific requirement. For this reason, a menu item, for example, may require a flag to be ON or OFF. Or, it may not care what a particular flag setting is, in which case the neutral setting may be specified using the - character. So in the above example, the menu item is accessible by the user shown in the sample user record. The menu item requires the user's A2 flag to be set to ON, and the A8 flag to be set to OFF. Our sample user record matches this requirement and therefore access to the item is granted. Access flags work the same way in message and file areas. Later in this chapter you will configure message and file areas for your BBS. At that time, you may specify flag settings required to access the areas in different ways. - 51 - Credit ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to set the initial number of credits given to new users. When a user performs a function which has an associated cost in credits, it is deducted from this field. Group ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess allows you to use groups to customize and/or restrict your system to groups of users. For example, one group of users may have access to files and messages of the same group. Use this field to select the default group number assigned to new users. For more information, see Menu function 27-"Post message" in the Menu Administration chapter. ANSI ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This setting is used to determine whether ANSI terminal emulation will be enabled for new users. If set to Ask, new users are prompted whether to use ANSI emulation. AVATAR ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This setting is used to determine whether AVATAR terminal emulation will be enabled for new users. If set to Ask, new users are prompted whether to use AVATAR emulation. ClrScr ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The ClrScr setting is used to determine whether new users will have screen clearing codes sent to their terminals. If set to Yes, the user's screen will be cleared after each menu page. If set to Ask, users are prompted whether screen clearing codes should be sent. More ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The More setting determines whether new users will receive a More(Y/n/=)? prompt after each screen page is displayed. If this option is enabled, RemoteAccess will present this prompt each time the user's defined screen length is reached while information is being displayed. - 52 - Sub Days ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to define an initial free subscription period for new users. Valid entries are from 0 to 255 days. When the user's subscription expires, the questionnaire script file SUBDATE.Q-A is executed automatically. This allows you to take actions such as modifying the user's security level and/or reminding the user to renew the subscription. See the Questionnaires chapter for information on questionnaire script files. Upload Credit (number of files) ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The UL Credit field allows you to define an initial upload credit, by number of files, that will be assigned to new users. This is usually used in conjunction with file ratios. For example, if you require your users to upload 1 file for every 10 files downloaded, but you want your users to be able to download 10 files before being required to upload a file, you would set this field to 1. This would specify that new users are automatically credited with 1 upload. For more information, see Upload Credit (kilobytes) in this chapter. EchoMail Check ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The EchoCheck option is used to determine whether EchoMail message areas will be included during mail-box scans. For example, if set to No, RemoteAccess will not check message areas configured as EchoMail areas while checking a user's mail-box. Sex ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option allows you to query users for their sexual gender during the log-on process. If this option is enabled, RemoteAccess can make use of this data from within the menu system. For example, menu items may be restricted to users of a specific sex. Data Phone ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this option is set to Yes, RemoteAccess prompts new users to enter their business or data telephone number. This information is stored in the user's permanent record and could be helpful if you are using an external call-back verification program which verifies user phone number - 53 - information by calling the user back. Voice Phone ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this option is set to Yes, RemoteAccess prompts new users to enter their voice/home telephone number. This information is stored in the user's permanent record. One Word Names ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this option is set to No, new users will be required to enter their name as two words with a total length of at least three characters. This prevents new users from logging-on using a one-word handle or alias. NOTE: This restriction only applies to new users. A user already in the user database may log-on using a one-word name or handle. Handle ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this option is set to Yes, new users will be prompted to choose an optional, unique handle or alias. This is saved in the user's permanent record and may be used to log-on in subsequent sessions as well as when sending or receiving mail in designated message areas. If a user elects not to enter a handle, RemoteAccess will substitute their real name for the handle entry. RemoteAccess allows you to configure message areas which allow the use of handles. When posting messages in these areas, the user's handle is automatically used. Birth Date ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If the Birthdate option is set to Yes, new users will be prompted to enter their full date of birth. RemoteAccess will attempt to validate the date entered to ensure its legitimacy. Hot-Keys ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option is used to determine how keystrokes received from users are interpreted. If the Hotkeys option is enabled, RemoteAccess will act on the first key pressed without requiring the user to press <ENTER> to send the command. If set to No, RemoteAccess waits for the user to - 54 - press <ENTER> to signify the end of command entry. Setting this option to No also enables the user to enter multiple commands at any prompt. This feature is known as command stacking. You can alternately set this option to Ask which allows your users to make the selection themselves. For example, in command stacking mode, if the main menu command to access the message menu was "M" and the read messages command was "R", a user could stack the commands by entering: "MR <ENTER>" at the main menu prompt. Full-Screen Message Viewer ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The FS Msg View option is used to allow users to read messages using the internal full screen message viewer. The viewer uses a fixed header format, designed for enhanced readability. This means that the message header information section at the top of each message will remain on screen as the user scrolls through a multiple-page message. If this option is disabled, the headers will scroll off the display with the message. This option is only available to users with ANSI or AVATAR terminal emulation enabled. Full-Screen Message Editor ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The FS Msg Edit option is used to determine whether RemoteAccess will ask new users if they would like to use the full-screen editor. If enabled when the user enters a message, the External Editor (such as GEDIT) will be used instead of the internal line editor. IEMSI ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this option is enabled, RemoteAccess allows new users to log-on automatically with the IEMSI protocol. Interactive EMSI (IEMSI) is a protocol which can be used by communications software programs to establish certain parameters for an interactive session, for example, a user logging on to a bulletin board. From within the IEMSI terminal's setup program, the user can define a number of user profiles, each of which includes a user name, handle, password, telephone number, location, etc. When IEMSI is enabled from within the terminal and the user calls a RemoteAccess BBS, the user's information is - 55 - sent to the BBS automatically, enabling the user (the client) to log-on to a BBS (the server) without even touching the keyboard. The IEMSI terminal and RemoteAccess will automatically exchange information such as software name and version number, screen parameters and local time. One particularly useful feature is the ability of the server to temporarily modify the user's display parameters for the current session only. Typically, when a user calls a BBS, the user's screenlength setting is used to determine when page pausing is to occur. However, on one occasion the user may activate the IEMSI terminal in 50 line mode. RemoteAccess will recognize this and set the screen length to 50 lines for the current session only, restoring it to the original setting when the user disconnects. In addition, RemoteAccess will automatically activate whatever terminal emulation that it, as well as the client, supports. Another benefit is the ability to chat to users using a full- screen chat mode. This is accomplished by the IEMSI remote terminal being able to maintain the chat screen locally. To see if a user is connected in IEMSI mode to your system, press F7. If IEMSI is active, RemoteAccess displays the relevant information about the client's system on the status bar. At the right side of the status bar the user's request flags are displayed. A request flag is an option that the user asked for. RemoteAccess currently supports these request flags: Request Flag Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── CHT Full-screen chat mode capability indicator. CLR Screen clear codes. NEWS Display the NEWS.A?? file. MAIL Check for new mail. FILE Check for new files. HOT Use hot-keys. HUSH Activate do not disturb mode. FSED Use the full-screen message editor. Language ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option sets the default language for new users before they select their preferred language. If this option is set to zero, the first defined language in the language manager will be used, and new users will not be asked which language they wish to use. For full details on languages, see the Language Manager section of this chapter. - 56 - Date Format ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Is set to Ask, new users will be able to select the date format they would like to use when entering dates and when dates are displayed. The available date formats are: DD-MM-YY MM-DD-YY YY-MM-DD DD-Mmm-YY The Sysop may choose to force a particular date format by selecting the format in this field. NOTE: Users who have selected the DD-Mmm-YY format will be asked to supply all dates in DD-MM-YY format when prompted for date input. This is normal behavior which minimizes errors in user input. Capitalize Location ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If the Cap Location option is enabled, RemoteAccess will automatically capitalize the first character of each word in the user's location as it is entered. Upload Credit Kilobytes ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The UL CreditK field allows you to define an initial upload credit, specified in kilobytes, that will be assigned to new users. This is usually used in conjunction with file ratios. For example, if you require your users to upload 1 kilobyte for every 10 kilobytes downloaded, but you wanted them to be able to download 10 kilobytes before being required to upload, you would set this field to 1. This would specify that new users are automatically credited with 1 upload kilobyte. For more information, see Upload Credit (number of files) in this chapter. Mailing Address ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If Mail Address is enabled, new users are prompted to enter a mailing address of up to 3 lines in length. This information is then stored as a part of the user's permanent record. - 57 - Telephone Scan ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this field is set to Yes, RemoteAccess scans new user telephone numbers for duplicate entries within the user database. This is usually the norm except in certain cases where the user database is extremely large. In such cases, the scanning process may be avoided by disabling this option. System ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The System options group contains options that pertain to the hardware and software environment in addition to some other global options. Fast Log-Ons ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this option is enabled and RemoteAccess is activated in local mode, it is assumed that the Sysop is the user who is logging on. When this is the case, RemoteAccess prompts only for the log-on password for the Sysop. If another user wishes to log-on at the local console, press <ENTER> at the "Password:" prompt and RemoteAccess will prompt for a full log-on name. NOTE: When logging-on at the local console with this option enabled, the text file LOGO.A?? is not displayed even if it exists. This is normal behavior in Fast log-on mode. Check Multi-Node Access ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When running more than one node you should set the Check Multi option to Yes. This will prevent a user from logging on to more than one line at the same time and effectively using all allotted time and file transfers limits on each line concurrently. Remote Sysop ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If you never call your own BBS remotely, you might wish to set this option to No. This makes it virtually impossible for an unknown hacker to gain access to your system via your own Sysop account. - 58 - Exclude Sysop ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When this option is set to Yes, the Sysop's name is excluded from the "User List", "List of Today's Callers", "Who Else is On-line" and the "Last Caller" functions. Text Shells ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── By inserting a special control code in a text file, it is possible to automatically run an external program in a shell when the text file is displayed. This is more fully explained in the External Support Files chapter. There are important security considerations that must be taken into account if this option is enabled. For example, imagine the damage that could be done if the DOS FORMAT command was somehow embedded within a text file. This type of security risk is usually only present when external programs which create or modify RemoteAccess text files are used. However, keep in mind that any external program written by an under-handed character might have the hidden ability to create a text file designed either to cause damage or obtain restricted data. NOTE: As a security measure, this option should only be enabled if you fully intend to shell to external programs from within text files. See the External Support Files chapter for more information on text file control codes. Log Style ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The logging format which RemoteAccess uses is determined by the style specified with this option. The Expanded format mode contains more information, including the line number in a multi-node environment. The Compact format occupies much less space. Following are samples of the two types of logging formats supported: Expanded 13-Oct 16:34:03 RA03 Ken Jones on-line at 9600 BPS 13-Oct 16:34:07 RA03 Security level 50, 90 minutes remaining 13-Oct 16:35:14 RA03 Browsing file area #12: BBS Software 13-Oct 16:37:09 RA03 Download [Zmodem] W:\BBS\RA200.ARJ 13-Oct 16:45:15 RA03 Efficiency 154% (196464 bytes), 1574 Cps. 13-Oct 16:47:37 RA03 User requested to terminate call 13-Oct 16:47:44 RA03 User off-line - 59 - Compact ------------- Sun 13 Oct 91, RA 2.00+ line #3 > 16:34:03 Ken Jones on-line at 9600 BPS > 16:34:07 Security level 50, 90 minutes remaining > 16:35:14 Browsing file area #12: BBS Software > 16:37:09 Download [Zmodem] W:\BBS\RA200.ARJ > 16:45:15 Efficiency 154% (196464 bytes), 1574 Cps. > 16:47:37 User requested to terminate call > 16:47:44 User off-line Multi-Node ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If you are installing RemoteAccess on a multi-node system (i.e. you are going to be running more than one line), you must set this option to Yes which enables extra file and message checking routines to ensure that a conflict between two nodes accessing the same data does not occur. If you are running a single-node (one line) system, setting this option to No will disable this checking and slightly increase system speed. Environment ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option refers to the type of multitasking system that you will be running RemoteAccess under. If set to Auto-detect, RemoteAccess will attempt to automatically determine the type of multitasking software (if any) that is being used. In some hardware/software configurations RemoteAccess may not be able to detect the proper environment. To overcome this, you can force RemoteAccess to assume that it is running under a specific multitasker. Environments currently supported are; Microsoft Windows 3.x (enhanced mode), DoubleDOS, DESQview, TopView, MultiLink, PC-MOS/386, OS/2 and AT-BIOS. RemoteAccess will time-slice, or give up CPU time, to other tasks when it is waiting for a call or at a prompt. The result is a significant overall system performance improvement. Screen Blanking ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Screen Blank option is used to specify the number of seconds that RemoteAccess will remain idle while waiting for an incoming call before activating the screen blanking function. This avoids screen burn-in damage on display monitors that are susceptible to this. {+} Registered only. - 60 - A blanked screen may be re-displayed by pressing any key on the keyboard. NOTE: This option only takes effect when Front End Mailer software is not used to answer incoming calls. Pausing After System Messages ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── After RemoteAccess displays a system message, the default action is to pause for one second before continuing. You may alter this pause period by setting the After Msgs option to the desired number seconds. Specifying a value of zero causes RemoteAccess to prompt the user to press <ENTER> before continuing. ALT-J Swap (Shelling to DOS) ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If enabled, this option will cause RemoteAccess to swap itself out of memory before a Sysop shell to DOS (when A-J is pressed at the local console keyboard). This enables programs which require a large amount of memory to be run while in the shell. The swapping process may take a few seconds. Use XMS ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If your computer has extended memory, RemoteAccess can use it when swapping out of memory. This reduces the amount of time it takes to execute the swap process. When both XMS and EMS options are enabled, extended (XMS) memory will be used, if available, before expanded (EMS) memory is used. Use EMS ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If your computer has expanded memory, RemoteAccess can use it when swapping out of memory. This reduces the amount of time it takes to execute the swap process. When both XMS and EMS options are enabled, extended (XMS) memory will be used, if available, before expanded (EMS) memory is used. IEMSI ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The IEMSI option simply allows you to enable or disable IEMSI capabilities within RemoteAccess. IEMSI is fully explained in the New Users section earlier in this chapter. - 61 - Password Echo Character ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Pwd Echo option allows you to define the character that is to be echoed back to the user when typing in a password. If this is left blank, no character is echoed back to the user. Automatic ANSI Detection ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When a user logs-on, and Auto ANSI is enabled, RemoteAccess will attempt to determine if the remote user's terminal supports ANSI emulation. If ANSI is detected, the text file LOGO.ANS will be displayed instead of LOGO.ASC. This text file is fully explained in the External Support Files chapter. NOTE: Not all terminal programs that offer ANSI emulation support this operation. Also, even when ANSI emulation is detected, once the caller logs-on the emulation setting within the caller's user record will override this determination, if necessary. Password Tries ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Pwd Tries field is used to set the maximum number of invalid password entries allowed at log-on. After this value is exceeded, the user will be given the option to leave a message to the Sysop prior to being disconnected. Password Change Forcing ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Pwd Change option is used to enhance system security. If set to a non-zero value, all users (excluding the Sysop) will be forced to change their password every Pwd Change number of log-ons. For example, if this field is set to 30, users will be forced to change their log-on passwords every 30 log-ons. Strict Password Checking ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Pwd Strict option is an invaluable security feature which checks passwords that users enter against a Sysop-definable list of undesirable passwords which are held in a control file. It also prevents users from entering their first or last name as a log-on password. NOTE: See the External Support Files chapter for information on the PWDTRASH.CTL control file. - 62 - Minimum Password Length ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Pwd length field is used to specify the minimum required length of passwords for all users. Longer passwords offer increased security. A value of 4 is recommended as an absolute minimum. Log-on Time ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option specifies how much time (in minutes) to grant to a user before the system knows how much time the user is entitled to. You should make this long enough for users to complete the new user procedures and questionnaire, if applicable. For example, when a new user logs on to your system, the new user process might be relatively short or very lengthy, depending on your system configuration. Once this process is completed, RemoteAccess assigns the time limit assigned to the user's security level (you'll set this up later in this chapter). But until this happens, you must assign a temporary time limit to the user. If this field is set to 15, a user will have 15 minutes in which to complete the log-on process, at which point RemoteAccess will assign the time limit assigned to the user's security level. User Inactivity Timeout ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The User Timeout field determines how long to wait during periods of inactivity before disconnecting. The inactivity time period is measured starting from the last character sent to the modem. Users are given a warning message when they are near timer expiration. This feature is automatically disabled when a user is logged-on at the local console, or by setting this field to zero. Watchdog Area ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When a user enters an incorrect log-on password the number of times specified in PwdTries, you may wish to notify the user that an attempt was made to gain access to his or her account. By specifying the message area number in the Watchdog Area field, RemoteAccess can notify a user of the security violation by addressing a message to the user using the date and time of the violation and inserting the ASCII text file WATCHDOG.MSG as the text body of the message. The ASCII text file must exist in the RemoteAccess system directory. - 63 - For example, if this field is set to 1 and the file WATCHDOG.MSG is located in the system directory, when a caller enters a log-on name but fails password entry, the text contained in WATCHDOG.MSG will be inserted into a message addressed to the user for which the violation occurred in message area 1. The WATCHDOG.MSG file might look like this: "This message is to inform you that on the date and time this message was created, an attempt was made to log-on to this system using your user name. However, this attempt failed due to incorrect password entry. If this was you, then disregard this message. If this was not you, then be advised that someone has tried to gain access to your user account." Sysop Area ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When a user enters an incorrect log-on password the number of times specified in PwdTries, you may wish to give the user an opportunity to leave a message addressed to the Sysop prior to disconnecting the call. By specifying the message area number in the Sysop Area field, users who fail to enter a correct log-on password will be prompted to leave a message to the Sysop. This is commonly used as a means of allowing the user to communicate with the Sysop in the event that he or she should forget their log-on password. NOTE: See the External Support Files chapter for information on text files which enhance this feature. Check DOB ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To enhance system security, you can require users to verify their date of birth periodically by specifying the number of log-ons between verifications in this field. For example, to require your users to enter their date of birth for verification every 10 log-ons, set this field to 10. If a user fails to correctly enter their date of birth, RemoteAccess activates a system questionnaire which gives you the opportunity to take actions which you specify. For information on files which support this feature, see the Questionnaires and External Support Files chapters. - 64 - Limit Local ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option disables the use of all sysop keys during all user sessions, including local logons. This effectively means that users who log on locally have no more power than those who log on remotely. Save Password ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Setting this option to "Yes" will cause RemoteAccess to store passwords in the user database as clear text, making them visible to the sysop as well as any person who has access to the user database. Setting the option to "No" forces all passwords to be stored as an encrypted CRC value. This makes it harder to obtain the password, but the passwords are not visible to the sysop, either. Blank Logins ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Setting this option to a non-zero value will cause the system to hang-up if a user presses <ENTER> at the login prompt without entering a user name, after the number of tries defined in this setting. Prompts ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The Prompts option group allows you to define the global system prompts. The prompts contained in this section are common to all languages. You can additionally customize specific language prompts using the Language Manager discussed later in this chapter. Log-on Prompt ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This is the prompt displayed to users during the log-on process which prompts users to enter their log-on name. Left and Right Brackets ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── These two fields are used to define the brackets which RemoteAccess places around "Yes/No" and similar prompts. For example, if the characters defined here are set to "{" and "}", the Yes/No prompt would appear as follows: {Y/n}? - 65 - Language Prompt ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This prompt is displayed when RemoteAccess asks the user to select a language. Language Header ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This prompt is displayed prior to the list of available languages when prompting the user to select a language. Printer ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The Printer options group allows you to define which printer port is to be used with RemoteAccess when the -P command- line parameter is specified or the ALT-P command is issued from the local console keyboard during a session. For information on the -P command-line parameter, see the Reference Information chapter later in this manual. Selecting the Printer Port ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── To select a printer port, position the cursor-bar on the Printer options item and press <ENTER>. A pick-list of valid selections will appear. Move the cursor-bar to the desired printer port and press <ENTER> to select it. {+} Registered only. THE MODEM MENU The fourth main option is the Modem menu. This menu is used to configure various options related to your modem. Options available from this menu are grouped by function. Each group has its own pick-list menu. Some of these options do not apply when Front End Mailer software is being used. However, if you are running in standalone mode (i.e. RemoteAccess answers incoming calls instead of a Front End Mailer), then all of these fields apply. Position the cursor-bar on the Modem selection. The Modem pick-list menu will be displayed automatically. The cursor-bar automatically repositions itself over the Options group selection. Press <ENTER> for the Options group pick-list menu. - 66 - Options ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The Options group pick-list contains items associated with the general configuration information for your modem. Comport ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field should be set to the communications port number to which your modem is connected. Valid entries are 1 to 8 representing COM1 through COM8 respectively. A setting of zero is also valid which forces RemoteAccess into local mode regardless of command-line parameters. Speed ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field refers to the highest modem-to-computer speed that your modem supports. If your communications driver is configured to communicate with your modem at a fixed BPS rate, the fixed rate should be entered here. For example, if your communications driver is locked at a fixed rate of 19200 BPS, set this field to 19200. If your modem does not support fixed rates, enter the highest speed it supports. For more information on installing and configuring the communications driver, see the Communications Driver section of the Reference Information chapter. Lock ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If you are using a high-speed modem and your communications driver is locked at a fixed BPS rate, you should set this field to Yes to ensure maximum throughput. For more information on installing and configuring the communications driver, see the Communications Driver section of the Reference Information chapter. Answer ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Setting this field to Yes instructs RemoteAccess to make the modem answer the phone whenever it receives the RING string defined under Responses (later in this section). This is accomplished by sending the Answer command (see the Commands section below). If this field is set to No, then it is assumed that the modem will answer the call based on its own configuration. The preferred setting for this field is Yes because it - 67 - ensures that your BBS will only answer the phone when it is ready. This feature is not used when Front End Mailer software is used which is usually only the case if you are participating in a mail network. When your modem is on-hook but RemoteAccess is doing other things (i.e. running a system event), you most likely would not want your modem to answer an incoming call. By enabling this option, you are giving control to RemoteAccess to answer an incoming call only when it is ready. The other method of answering the phone is to configure your modem itself to answer incoming calls. On a large majority of modems this is accomplished by setting the S0 register to the number of rings to wait before answering. But remember, if your modem is configured to answer, the possibility exists that a caller will connect with your modem even though RemoteAccess is not prepared to take a call. If some of your users are calling long distance, this method of answering calls will surely attract unwanted attention. Delay ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field refers to the delay, specified in tenths of a second, that RemoteAccess waits between characters sent to the modem in command mode. Usually you will only need to enter a value greater than zero if you are using a modem that cannot process commands at high speeds. A typical example of this is the US Robotics Courier HST modem, which works well with a delay of about 3 (3 tenths of a second). This does not apply to characters sent over the modem while connected with a remote modem. It only applies to modem commands sent while in command mode. Buffer ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to set the size of the internal communications transmit buffer for speeds of up to 2400 BPS. You can change this to fine-tune your system for maximum throughput. If you are using a slower machine (i.e. a 4.77 MHz PC/XT), set this field to zero. This disables the internal buffering system and its associated overhead. On most systems, the default setting of 128 will not need to be changed. However, in a multi- tasking environment you may achieve much better performance by increasing the buffer size. Experimentation has shown values around 80 to 150 to be most effective. This setting does not apply to systems that have a high - 68 - speed modem with a locked BPS rate since the modem and/or communications driver may provide transmit buffering. Break ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Some modems can be configured to clear their internal transmit buffer when the break signal is received from the local console. If the Break option is enabled, RemoteAccess will send a break signal to the modem whenever it purges its own internal transmit buffer. This results in faster hot-key response. NOTE: Most modems cannot handle non-destructive break handling. Check your modem documentation to ensure that the modem will not pass the break signal on to the remote modem. Tries ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify the number of times that RemoteAccess will attempt to initialize the modem before aborting and returning an error condition. When RemoteAccess fails to initialize the modem, an errorlevel of 1 is returned to the calling batch file which in turn, may take appropriate action. Offhook ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this option is enabled, RemoteAccess will take the modem off-hook when RemoteAccess is exited. This is done by sending the modem command defined in the Busy field (explained in the Commands section below). If you prefer your system to appear busy to callers when it is not ready for calls, set this option to Yes. Otherwise, set it to No. NOTE: In some countries, placing the telephone line off-hook is illegal. If you unsure of your countries laws, check with your local telephone company. Commands ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The Commands group pick-list contains items associated with commands which are sent to your modem. If you are using Front End Mailer software to answer incoming calls, then these commands will not be sent to your modem. If this is the case, you may skip this section altogether. - 69 - RemoteAccess recognizes certain characters embedded in the modem command strings outlined in this section. The embedded characters are translated into special functions as a string is sent to the modem. The supported characters are: Character Function Performed ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── ^ Raise data terminal ready (DTR) which enables the modem to answer an incoming call. v Lower DTR. This disconnects a call if a connection is established. This also prevents the modem from answering incoming calls. Pause for 1/4 of a second before continuing. | Send a carriage-return to the modem (same as pressing <ENTER>). Initialization Strings ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Init1 and Init2 options define the strings sent to the modem whenever RemoteAccess is loaded in wait for call mode. These command strings are used to prepare the modem to answer incoming calls. Two initialization command strings may be specified in order to accommodate extremely long strings. When a second initialization string is specified using Init2 RemoteAccess will not wait for a modem response after sending Init1. Instead, Init1 will be sent immediately followed by Init2. RemoteAccess will wait for the proper modem response after Init2 has been sent. Busy ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Busy command string is sent to the modem when: * You log-on locally. * A DOS shell is invoked while in wait for call mode. * When wait for call mode is exited by pressing the <ESCAPE> key. This command string may be used to instruct the modem to be placed off-hook using a command such as ATH1|, or it may be used to simply lower the DTR signal by specifying the "V" embedded character as the string to be sent. NOTE: In some countries, placing the telephone line - 70 - off-hook is illegal. If you are unsure of the laws in your country, check with your local telephone company. Answer ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify the string which is sent to the modem to answer an incoming call. This string is only sent if the Answer option (located in the Options group pick-list) is set to Yes. For example, most modems will answer a call upon receiving an ATA| command from the local console. Responses ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The Responses group contains a pick-list of response messages or codes that your modem sends to RemoteAccess in response to a command or condition. If your modem is configured to return numeric responses to commands, you will need to know the numeric codes which correspond to various conditions. In most cases, your modem should be configured to return word responses which are much more comprehensive than their numeric equivalents. If you are using Front End Mailer software to answer incoming calls, you may skip this section altogether since RemoteAccess will not be used to send commands to the modem. Init ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field should contain the response that your modem will return when a valid initialization string is received from the local console. For example, when word responses are enabled for a modem, the response here is typically defined as OK. When RemoteAccess sends the Init1 and Init2 command strings, the response specified here must be received before the command is considered to have been successful. RemoteAccess will make as many attempts to initialize the modem as is defined in the Tries option in the Options group pick-list before considering the attempt a failure. When an initialization failure occurs, RemoteAccess exits, passing an errorlevel of 1 to the calling batch file. - 71 - Busy ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field should contain the response that your modem will return when the Offhook command string is received from the local console. For example, if the Offhook command is defined as ATM0H1|, the typical response from the modem would be OK. Ring ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field should contain the response that your modem will return when someone calls your system. This indicates that the call should be answered. Most modems return a RING message while others return RINGING. Check your modem documentation and set this accordingly. NOTE: Some modems return a carriage-return after the RING response. In such cases, this response must be specified as RING| before an incoming call is recognized. Secure ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field should contain the response that your modem will return when it establishes an MNP error-free connection. If your modem does not support MNP, you should leave this option setting blank. RemoteAccess uses this response to determine whether file transfer protocols which require an error-free connection will be made available to the caller. Error-free connections are ones which utilize MNP (Microcom Networking Protocol) service levels 1 through 5. MNP is generally supported directly by the modem although some terminal programs have implemented MNP emulation through software. The primary advantage of having MNP implemented within the modem is the increased throughput. Some file transfer protocols rely heavily on MNP connections and won't operate properly (if at all) without it. One example is the YModem-g internal protocol. Without an MNP connection, this protocol should not be made available to a caller. Therefore, it is important to allow RemoteAccess to determine when an MNP connection is present. As an example, the US Robotics Courier HST/V32 modem returns the "ARQ" response when an error-free connection has been established. Therefore, "ARQ" should be entered in this field. Check your modem documentation to determine the correct - 72 - string to specify for your modem. 300 - 38400 ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── These fields must be set to the responses that your modem returns when a connection is established at the respective BPS rate. Most modems return the message CONNECT followed by the speed of the connection or a carriage-return for 300 BPS connections. These responses are used to determine the speed at which RemoteAccess will communicate with the caller's modem. The following illustration shows some of the most popular responses used by today's modems. Notice the Fax connect response message. This response warrants special treatment since it is used to support systems which utilize fax/modems. As explained under Errorlevels in the Options section, RemoteAccess can determine when a fax connection is established and exit with a predefined errorlevel set. When the response message specified in this field is received from the modem, RemoteAccess exits, passing the errorlevel defined under Errorlevels (in the Options group pick- list). This enables the use of a fax/modem for receiving calls for both the BBS as well as for your fax since the fax software can be loaded from within the calling batch file. THE MANAGER MENU This is perhaps the most important and often-used portion of RACONFIG. This menu is used when configuring message and file areas, groups, languages, protocols, menus, system events and more. Each item in this option group is used to manage a different aspect of your overall system. In the pages that follow, feature implementation and descriptions will be covered. Message Areas ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The first option in the group is Message Areas. From here, you may define a virtually unlimited number of JAM format message areas and up to 200 Hudson format areas, each with its own attributes and security requirements. Each of these two types of message database formats is outlined in this section under the Area Type field as well as in the Message Database Administration chapter. It is suggested that you review the details on the two formats to help you in making a somewhat educated decision on which format to use when creating message areas. - 73 - The initial message area pick-list menu lists the first 17 areas with some basic information about each. If more areas exist, you can scroll through the entire list using the UP and DOWN keys. Select an area to edit by positioning the cursor-bar on the desired selection and press <ENTER> to bring up the editing screen. To create a new area, press INSERT and a new area will be added to the end of the list. Moving, Copying and Deleting ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Space - Drop the tagging anchor to select a range of entries (as in RAMGR.Files). INSERT - Insert a new area at the current position. This will cause all entries after the new entry to be moved down by one position. DELETE - Delete the current area/range of areas. All entries after the deleted area(s) will be moved up to close the gap left by the deleted areas. Alt-M - Move the currently selected area(s) to another position. You will be asked to specify the new position at which to insert the areas. Alt-C - Same as Alt-M, but duplicates the areas instead of just moving them. Alt-G - Perform global changes to the currently selected area or range of areas. You will be presented with a blank edit screen which looks exactly like a normal edit screen. (NOTE: The edit screen will automatically 'inherit' the values from the record that was last edited.) Edit the fields which you want to apply to the selected areas. You will notice that after editing a field, it will be flashing. Note that only flashing fields will be applied to the selected areas. To toggle whether a field is flashing, move to it and press the space bar. Press ESCAPE to apply your changes. Press F1 at any area/group edit screen to modify the number of the currently displayed entry. NOTE: By default, RACONFIG will not allow duplicate area or group numbers to be entered. Placing a -N on RACONFIG's command-line will temporarily disable the dupe checking. From the editing screen, you can modify any of the area's individual attributes. - 74 - Name ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── With this field, you can give each individual message area a name. This should be a meaningful description of its content (i.e. Cooking, Desktop Publishing, Private Messages, etc.). The names you enter here will be displayed by various functions within RemoteAccess. Origin ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field allows you to define a separate origin line for this particular message area. This origin is appended to the end of all outgoing EchoMail messages. If this is left blank, RemoteAccess will append the default origin line specified earlier under: Options > Messages > Default Origin Read, Write and Sysop Security ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Access to each individual message area is controlled by Read, Write and Sysop security levels and access flags. This gives you separate control of Read, Write and Sysop functions within each area. For example, this would enable you to allow users to read messages in an area but not write messages, or to give access to special Sysop message functions to advanced users (i.e. Co-Sysops). By setting the minimum security level requirement for any of these fields, it is possible to restrict access to users having an equal or greater level. By setting access flag requirements, you can further restrict access to users whose access flags meet the requirements. For complete information on access flags, see the New Users section earlier in this chapter. Each of the three access levels is described as follows: Read This specifies the minimum security level and access flag combination the user must have before being allowed to read messages in the area. Write This is the minimum security level and access flag combination the user must have before being allowed to write messages in the area. Sysop This is the minimum security level and access flag combination the user must have before access to special administrative functions are available. The Menu Administration chapter later in this manual describes the - 75 - individual administrative functions that are available to users who meet this criteria. In addition, users with this level of access can read and delete any messages (public or private) in the area. Type ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Each area can be one of three types. The type of message area determines how RemoteAccess handles certain functions. The three types are: Local The message area is available only to users on your BBS (it is not related to a mail network). EchoMail The message area is used in conjunction with a mail network EchoMail conference (see the Mail Networking chapter for more information). NetMail The message area is designated for sending and receiving mail network NetMail (see the Mail Networking chapter for more information). Status ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option controls the types of messages that users are allowed to post in the area. Valid selections are are outlined below: Private Only All messages posted in the area are marked as Private and can only be read by the sender, recipient and users with Sysop access to the message area. Public Only All messages posted in this area are marked as Public and can be read by any user with Read access to the message area. Private/Public All messages posted in this area are marked as Public or Private, selected by the user at the time the message is posted. No Reply All messages in this area are marked as Public and No Reply. All users with Read access to the area may read messages but no messages may be replied to. Read Only All messages in this area are marked as Public and may be read by any user with Read access to the area. Messages may only be posted by users with Sysop access - 76 - to the area. Users ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Use this option to allow users to post messages using Real Names Only, Handles Only (from the user's account record), or with an Alias which the user may select at the time the message is posted. RemoteAccess will not allow users to select Sysop (or any other user's name or handle) as an alias. If a message area is configured to use Handles and a user does not have a handle recorded in his or her account record, the user's Real Name will be substituted. Days Old, Days Rcvd and Max Msgs ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── These three fields are used to define message retention thresholds based on these three categories. The message database maintenance utility RAMSG performs maintenance tasks which includes removing messages which meet the criteria defined in these fields. Days Old This is the number of days to keep old messages. For example, to retain messages for 30 days from the message creation date, set this field to 30. Any messages which exceed this threshold will be removed when the RAMSG PACK function is executed. Days Rcvd This is the number of days to keep messages that have been marked as received. For example, to delete messages 30 days after being read by the recipient, set this field to 30. Max Msgs This is the maximum number of messages that are to be retained in the message area. This allows you to limit the number of messages that will be stored in the area. For example, to limit the number of messages in the area to 200, set this field to 200. When the RAMSG PACK operation is executed, the most recent 200 messages would be retained while all others would be removed from the database. NOTE: See the RAMSG section of the Message Database Administration chapter for more information on the RAMSG PACK function. - 77 - Echoinfo ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When a message area is defined as an EchoMail type, RemoteAccess appends the default origin line to the end of outgoing messages. This may be disabled by setting this option to No. Combined ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option determines whether users may select the message area as a part of their combined area. As described later in the Menu Administration chapter, you may allow your users to configure their own combined message area. A combined area acts as a folder containing all the individual message areas a user places into it. When users read from their combined area, messages from each area in the folder are processed. Attaches ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess provides an extremely powerful facility which allows users to attach one or more files to a message. This means that users can send each other files privately. To enable this feature, set this option to Yes. {+} Registered only. When a user uploads files with a message, RemoteAccess stores them in a uniquely-named subdirectory which it creates in the File Attach directory specified earlier in RACONFIG: System > Paths > File Attach After the recipient has received the message and confirmed that all attached files have been received, all of the files (along with the subdirectory) are deleted. If the user selects to attach a file while logged-on to a local node, RemoteAccess will prompt for the DOS path and filename of the file to be attached. SoftCRs ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess uses ASCII character number 8D (hexadecimal - decimal number 141) internally for message formatting. This is usually invisible to the user, however in some countries such as Iceland, this character is part of the character set. If enabled, this option will tell RemoteAccess to treat these special characters as normal characters. - 78 - Deletes ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this option is enabled, users will be allowed to delete messages in this area, provided that they are either the sender or recipient of the message. NOTE: In EchoMail areas, deleting a message is only effective if the above criteria is met and the message has not yet been exported from the message database to the mail network. AKA ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field allows you to select the mail network address that is to be used for the message area. You may select any of the AKA's defined earlier in RACONFIG: System > Addresses If you only have one network address (or none at all) then this option may be ignored. Age ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── You may restrict access to the message area to users who are at least the age specified here. If your system is configured to prompt users for their date of birth during the new user log-on process, then RemoteAccess can calculate individual user ages making restrictions based on age possible. For example, to restrict access to the area to users who are at least 18 years of age, enter a value of 18 in this field. Group ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── As will be described in the next section on Message Groups, each area may belong in a primary group as well as up to three alternate groups, or it may belong to all groups. If you plan to implement message groups, enter the primary group number the message area is to belong to. If you aren't familiar with message groups, it is suggested that you read the Message Groups section in this chapter. Message grouping can be easily changed at any time. - 79 - Area Type ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess directly supports two types of message areas; JAM and Hudson. Your message database may consist solely of one type or it may be a combination of both JAM and Hudson message areas. In order for you to be able to make an educated decision on which format to use, a little history of the two formats is in order. The Hudson format was developed by Adam Hudson and became popular as it was adopted by other BBS programs to maintain compatibility between competing software packages and message processing utility programs. Though it is still supported by many BBS and message processing software programs, it has become somewhat outdated in that more and more systems require message databases that reach beyond the limitations of this format. These limitations must be observed when configuring your message database. Specifically, the Hudson format supports a maximum of up to 200 message areas. This limitation in itself has become the primary reason other formats have been developed. You may select any combination of JAM and Hudson message area formats. However, any areas configured as Hudson areas must be between area numbers 1 and 200 due to the structure of this format. Support for the Hudson message format is included in RemoteAccess in order to maintain compatibility with existing installations which use third-party message database processors which operate specifically with Hudson message databases. If you are not currently using any third-party message or EchoMail processors that are specifically designed to use the Hudson format, it is recommended that you set this field to use the JAM format. The JAM message database format was developed by Joaquim H. Homrighausen, Andrew Milner and Mats Wallin (hence the name). This exciting new format is limited only by the amount of disk space that is available. There are no limitations in terms of the number of message areas you can have. In fact, JAM supports approximately two billion messages per area and as many message areas as your hard disk can accommodate. Each area is a separate database which may reside on any hard drive or network volume. There is no limitation on the length of messages except those imposed by the editors that create them. - 80 - JAMbase ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When configuring a JAM format message area, you must provide the directory and base filename for the area. Each JAM message area can reside in its own directory, or multiple JAM areas can share the same directory. Use the JAMbase field to specify the path and directory where the particular message area database files will reside. In addition to the path and directory, also specify the base filename for the message area. The base filename should be no more than 8 characters in length and should not include a filename extension. For example, to configure a JAM message area called Public Lobby with the message database files stored in the C:\RA\MSGS directory using a base filename of PUBLIC, the proper JAMbase field entry would be: C:\RA\MSGS\PUBLIC When a message is entered into the Public Lobby area, the following JAM database files would be created in the C:\RA\MSGS directory: PUBLIC.JDX PUBLIC.JHR PUBLIC.JDT PUBLIC.JLR This design makes it possible to assign one or more JAM message areas to a single directory. For more information on the JAM message database format, consult the Message Database Administration chapter. AltGroup1, AltGroup2 and AltGroup3 ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In addition to belonging to a primary message group, each message area may belong to 3 alternate groups for a total of 4 individual message groups. For example, if a message area is to be designated as belonging to message groups 1 and 3, the primary group might be set to 1 while AltGroup1 might be set to 3. See the Message Groups section later in this chapter for more information on message groups. Message Groups ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ This option allows you to configure up to 255 message groups for your system. Like the Msg Areas option, a pick-list of groups allows you to select the group to be created, edited or deleted. - 81 - Message groups are used to form groups of message areas. These may pertain to a specific topic. For example, you might have 10 message areas dedicated to the topic of Cooking and another 10 areas dedicated to the topic of Desktop Publishing. In this example, it might be wise to create two message groups; one dedicated to each of the two topics. When defining message groups, a name is given to each group. Like the message areas, the security level and/or access flag requirements are also specified for each group allowing complete flexibility in restricting access to it. Used together with the menu commands outlined in the Menu Administration chapter, users can select a message group and then process only the areas within that group. This feature allows you to partition your system into sections that are manageable and useful to your users. For example, if you participate in multiple mail networks and each network has a large number of associated EchoMail areas, it might be useful to group message areas by network. Name ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify the name of the message group. This name is displayed by various functions in RemoteAccess such as the internal message group selection menu. Security and Access Flags Like individual areas, message groups may be restricted to users whose security level and access flag settings meet the requirements specified in these fields. For a complete description of access flags see the section earlier in RACONFIG: Options > New Users > Access Flags File Areas ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Like the message system, RemoteAccess also uses a database format for its file system. This format provides fast processing time and specialized functionality only found in databased systems. When this option is selected, a pick-list menu of file areas is displayed. To edit an existing area, position the cursor-bar on the desired area and press <ENTER>. To delete an area, position the cursor-bar on the desired area and press DELETE. To add a new area to the end of the list, press INSERT. - 82 - When an area is selected, the area editing screen is displayed. Name ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify the name of the file area. This is the name that is displayed by various internal functions such as hard-coded file lists. You can enter up to 40 characters. Path ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This is the full directory path where the files for this area are located. It may contain a drive letter and full path. Download, List and Upload Security ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Access to each individual file area is controlled by download, list and upload security levels and access flags. This gives you separate control over each of these functions within the area. For example, this would enable you to allow users to list files in an area but not download or upload files. By setting the minimum security level requirement for any of these fields, it is possible to restrict access to users having an equal or greater level. By setting access flag requirements, you can further restrict access to users whose access flags meet the requirements. For complete information on access flags, see the New Users section earlier in this chapter. Each of the three access levels is described as follows: DL Security This specifies the minimum security level and access flag combination the user must have before being allowed to download files from this area. List Security This specifies the minimum security level and access flag combination the user must have before being allowed to list files in this area. UL Security This specifies the minimum security level and access flag combination the user must have before being allowed to upload files to this area. - 83 - NOTE: In cases where you prefer uploaded files to be stored in a different area (perhaps an upload screening area), you can set the alternate upload area to the area number where uploads are to be directed. See the Uploads field later in this section for more information. New ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to determine whether files in this area are to be included when scanning for new files. Press <ENTER> to toggle this setting. Dupes ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to determine whether this file area will be included when checking for duplicate upload names. When a user uploads a file, RemoteAccess compares the filename being uploaded to the filename entries of all areas that have this setting enabled. This is done to avoid uploads of files that already exist in the database. Press <ENTER> to toggle this setting. CD-ROM ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to determine whether the area is on a CD- ROM drive. If the file area being configured is on a CD-ROM device, this should be set to Yes. Press <ENTER> to toggle this setting. Free ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this field is set to Yes, then all files in this area are considered free files. That is, they will not effect the user's file ratio or download limits. However, the user must have sufficient time remaining to download the file. Press <ENTER> to toggle this setting. Files may also be defined as free files on an individual basis. See the RAMGR section of the File Database Administration chapter for more information. LongDesc ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to determine whether users will be allowed to enter multiple-line file descriptions. If set to No, users will be restricted to entering one-line file descriptions. If set to Yes, users will be permitted to - 84 - enter up to 20 lines of text with each line containing up to 70 characters. Press <ENTER> to toggle this setting. DirectDL ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this field is set to Yes, users will be permitted to download files that reside in this area but are not in the file database. This is usually reserved for Sysop and Co-Sysop functions. Pressing <ENTER> toggles this setting. PwdUL ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this field is set to Yes, users will be permitted to password- protect files they upload to this area. When a file is password- protected, other users are required to enter the password in order to download the file. Pressing <ENTER> toggles this setting. UL Scan ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When this field is set to Yes, any uploads to this area are scanned for corruption and viruses using the settings defined earlier in RACONFIG: Options > Files > Upload Scan ArcType ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the archive format that uploads to this area are to be converted to by the RAFILE REARC function. RemoteAccess allows you to easily maintain one type of archive format on your system while still allowing users to upload archives using the format of their choice. Pressing <ENTER> on this field brings up a pick-list of archive format choices which were defined earlier in RACONFIG: Options > Files > Archivers The file maintenance utility RAFILE includes a function which converts all archives found in the directory path for any file area that has an archive format specified in this field. For more information on this function, see the RAFILE section of the File Database Administration chapter. - 85 - DL Days ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── With RemoteAccess, it is possible to automatically move or delete files that are not downloaded within the number of days specified in this field. If a file has not been downloaded for the number of days specified here (between 1 and 99999), it can be moved to another area or deleted from your system entirely. This is accomplished using the CLEAN function of the RAFILE file maintenance utility which is discussed in the File Database Administration chapter. FD Days ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Similar in function to the DL Days field, this field is used to specify the number of days to keep a file based on its DOS file date. This makes it possible to move or delete files that have remained on your system for the number of days specified in this field, starting from the actual file date (regardless of whether the file is actively downloaded). When this defined time period has been exceeded, the file may be moved or deleted by using the CLEAN function of the RAFILE file maintenance utility. For more information, see the RAFILE section of the File Database Administration chapter. MoveArea ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When a file has exceeded the parameters specified in the DL Days or FD Days fields, the file may be moved or deleted by the CLEAN function of the RAFILE file maintenance utility. This field is used to determine whether the file will be moved to another area or deleted from your system entirely. For example, you may want to review files before deletion. If this field is set to zero, any files exceeding the specified DL Days or FD Days parameters will be deleted. Otherwise, they will be moved to the file area number specified here. Min Age ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In addition to other restrictions, RemoteAccess also allows you to restrict each file area to users who are at least a certain age. This field is used to specify the minimum age required for users to be able to download or list files in this area. For example, to prevent users under the age of 18 from listing or downloading files from the area, set this - 86 - field to a value of 18. NOTE: RemoteAccess must know the user's date of birth in order to calculate his or her age. For this reason, if you plan to use this feature, it is imperative that you also configure your system to prompt new users to enter their date of birth during the log-on process. See the following section earlier in RACONFIG: Options > New Users > Birthdate Password ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify a password of up to 15 characters which users must enter before being permitted to download any file from the area. This password applies to every file in the area except files that have an individual password assigned to them which overrides this setting. Group ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the primary file group that this area belongs to. Each file area may belong to: * All file groups * One primary group, or... * One primary group and up to 3 alternate groups For example, you may have two file groups on your system; Cooking and Desktop Publishing. Each group may have 3 specific file areas dedicated to its specific topic. Each of these areas can be assigned or dedicated to that file group. At the same time, 3 other areas may be of interest to users of both groups. These 3 areas can be configured as belonging to all groups or as belonging primarily to one of the two groups and alternately to the other. Def. Cost ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to determine the cost (in credits) of each file in this area. When this is set to a non-zero value, each file is said to have a cost associated with it. In turn, this value is deducted from the user's Credit field when a file is downloaded from this area. If a user attempts to download a file that has an associated cost, but does not have sufficient credits remaining, RemoteAccess will not permit the download except when the user's Post Billing flag is enabled which allows the user to - 87 - accumulate a negative credit balance. Uploads ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field allows you to specify an alternate file area to which uploaded files will be redirected. For example, if you would like your users to be able to upload from any file area but would like all uploaded files to be directed to a single area, specify the area number here. NOTE: When this feature is used, any fields relating to uploaded files are overridden by the same fields in the alternate upload area. For example, if long file descriptions are enabled for file area 1 and uploads to area 1 are redirected to area 10 which has long descriptions disabled, users who upload to area 1 will not be permitted to enter long file descriptions. Alternate File Groups ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── As mentioned in the description of the Group field, when a file area is not defined as belonging to all groups, it can be configured as belonging to one primary and up to three alternate file groups. This means that if a file area is not defined as belonging to all groups, it can belong to up to 4 file groups. Use the AltGroup1, AltGroup2 and AltGroup3 fields to designate up to three alternate file groups the file area should be assigned to. For example, to designate a file area as belonging to file group one, three and five, you could define the primary group as 1 using the Group field and then entering 3 in the AltGroup1 field and 5 in the AltGroup2 field. Device ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used only on systems where a multi-disc CD-ROM player is attached. A conflict may arise when such devices are attached to multi-node systems because of the possibility that two users may request to download files residing on separate discs in the same multi-disc unit at the same time. A scenario which describes this conflict is in order. Let's say you have file areas A and B which reside on separate CDs on the same multi-disc player. Let's say that a user on line one requests to download a file from area A at the same - 88 - time that a user on line two requests a file from area B. RemoteAccess begins copying the file from area A into the CD-ROM temp holding directory. While this is happening, the user on line two selects the download option. RemoteAccess goes to retrieve the file in area B on the other disc, and the CD-ROM device responds by ejecting the CD which holds area A in order to make area B available. An obvious problem. To avoid this type of conflict, assign an arbitrary number from 1 to 255 to each multi-disc CD-ROM unit. Then, when setting up individual file areas, set the device field to this arbitrary number. When multiple requests for the same multi- disc device number are made, RemoteAccess can manage the requests, avoiding the conflict as described in the above scenario. For example, if you have one multi-disc unit containing 6 CD-ROM discs, each holding its own set of file areas, you would assign one arbitrary number to the entire multi-disc unit. This same number would be entered in the device field for each of the file areas on each of the discs within the multi- disc unit. This allows RemoteAccess to know when the multi- disc unit is busy servicing other requests, permitting proper management of multiple requests for the same device number, in order to avoid any possible conflicts. AllGroups ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Use this field to define the file area as belonging to all file groups. When this is set to Yes, the file area being defined can be accessed by users of any file group. File Groups ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ This option allows you to configure up to 255 file groups for your system. Like the File Areas option, a pick-list of groups allows you to select the group to be created, edited or deleted. File groups are configured and used just as message groups are. Individual file areas may belong to one or more (up to four) file groups. Each group may be restricted by security level and access flag setting combinations. For a more detailed explanation, see the Message Groups section earlier in this chapter. - 89 - Protocols ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ This pick-list option allows you to define which internal and external file transfer protocols are to be used by your BBS. Selecting this option from the pick-list menu presents another pick-list menu offering the choice of internal or external protocols. Internal protocols are those that are built into RemoteAccess. Simply enabling or disabling these protocols is all that is required to turn them on or off. External protocols are third-party, external transfer protocols that may be added using the protocol definition screen. Selecting the Internal option from the protocols pick-list menu presents another pick-list menu of individual internal protocols which can be enabled, disabled or made available only on an error-free (i.e. MNP) connection. MNP (Microcom Networking Protocol), also known as ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request), is a method by which modems can detect and correct transmission errors. This type of connection can only be facilitated when two modems supporting this error correction are connected. Since when using MNP, error correction is carried out by the modem hardware, the software does not need to watch the incoming data for errors or wait for the receiving modem to confirm that it has received all the data correctly. Some protocols are written especially for MNP modems and therefore achieve very fast throughput. If you use such a protocol you should set it for error free connect only. An example of such a protocol in the internal protocol list is Ymodem-G. When using an error free protocol, RemoteAccess will establish whether the user is using an MNP modem by looking at the modem connection string to see if it contains an error-free response string. This string is defined in RACONFIG: {+} Registered only. Modem > Responses > Secure To toggle the status of any of the internal protocols, position the cursor-bar over the desired protocol and press <ENTER>. Protocols can be set to Available, Not available or Error free. The internal protocols that are available are described below. Xmodem This protocol transfers data in 128-byte blocks. It is considered to be somewhat reliable but slow, due to the nature of its error-detection design. - 90 - Xmodem/1K This protocol is similar in design to the Xmodem protocol except that it transfers data in 1K blocks. This increases its throughput ability over its predecessor although the error detection method still slows it down. Xmodem/1K-g This protocol is a result of the evolution of the Xmodem protocol. It transfers data in 1K blocks and realizes faster throughput than the Xmodem/1K protocol since it relies on error free modems to perform all error detection and correction. Ymodem The Ymodem protocol is similar in function to the Xmodem/1K protocol in that it transfers data in 1K blocks and requires the receiving system to send an acknowledgment for each correctly received block. Ymodem-g This is the error-free version of Ymodem which is much faster since it relies on the modem hardware to perform all error detection and correction. Zmodem This protocol is extremely efficient by today's standards. It transmits data and does not stop to wait for an acknowledgment for correctly received data. The receiving system detects errors and sends a message to the sending system only when an error is detected. The sending system is then able to begin resending data from the point at which the error occurred. Another factor that makes this protocol so efficient is the fact that it can shift to larger blocks as a transfer progresses. It also offers crash recovery which is a system that allows a transfer to be resumed from the point at which it previously failed. The External option allows you to interface up to fifteen external protocols for use on your system in addition to the internal protocols. These are third-party protocols which - 91 - are usually available from BBSs that offer shareware programs. You should keep in mind that this section details the actual interface which is designed to be flexible in order to support most external protocol programs. When installing an external protocol, it is important that you first understand how the particular protocol works. When you are familiar with what is required, this section will aid you in proper installation. Selecting the External option presents a protocol pick-list menu. Position the cursor-bar on an available entry and press <ENTER> to bring up the protocol definition screen. Name ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is the protocol name as it will be displayed to your users when download or upload commands are used. If you use the text file XFERPROT.A?? to override the hard-coded protocol selection menu, this name will not be displayed. See the External Support Files chapter for more information on the XFERPROT.A?? text file. Key ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The key is the command key that will be used to activate the protocol. This key must be unique. For example, since Zmodem is an internal protocol and the command key used to activate it is "Z", you cannot use the letter "Z" to activate an external protocol. Ext Ctl File ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Before RemoteAccess activates an external protocol, it creates a control file that tells the protocol which files to send or receive. This file consists of some general information and a list of files, one per line. If you select this field, RemoteAccess will include information needed by protocols written to support a standard protocol interface file. These are also sometimes referred to as Opus compatible external protocol files. This information is then written at the top of the control file before the file list. Check the documentation for each protocol you install to determine whether it is Opus compatible. When this option is selected, the following header is written to the control file before the list of files to be transferred: Port <Communications port> - 92 - Baud <Caller's connection speed> Log <RemoteAccess log filename> Time <Caller's time remaining> Batch ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If the protocol has the ability to transfer more than one file at a time, set this field to Yes. This simply determines whether or not users may select this protocol when transferring more than one file at a time. Status ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to determine the status of the protocol which may be set to one of three states: Always available The protocol is enabled and available in both normal and error free connection modes. Not available The protocol is disabled. It may not be used while in this state. Error free The protocol is only available during error-free connection sessions. This option is particularly useful if you use protocols such as Ymodem-G which are specifically designed to work with error correcting modems. Log File ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the full path and filename of the log file that the external protocol writes. This file contains information about what files were actually sent or received. Without this information, RemoteAccess cannot update the user's record. Most protocols have the facility to create a log of the files that were actually transferred. If the protocol you are defining does not support this, it is advisable not to use it. Control File ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the full path and filename of the control file that RemoteAccess creates before activating the protocol. In order to allow the use of as many different - 93 - protocols as possible, you have full control over the format of this file. DL and UL Command Line ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The DL Command Line and UL Command Line fields specify what program name to execute in order to activate the external protocol. It is possible to insert variables into the command line using special control codes. These codes are explained in the Menu Administration chapter under menu function type 7-Run an external program in a shell. For example, the control code *B expands to the current connection speed. Therefore, if a caller was on-line at 2400 BPS, the line: PROTNAME.EXE Send *B Would be expanded to: PROTNAME.EXE Send 2400 In addition to these control codes, the # character can also be used to specify the filename to be transferred on the command-line. This code simply expands into the actual filename being transferred. DL Ctl String ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field represents the download control string that is used to determine the format of each file entry that is written to the control file during a download. Inserting the @ character in this field causes the full path and filename being transferred to be expanded in its place. For example, if the full path and filename of the file being transferred was C:\FILES\FUN\CASINO.ZIP and the Opus compatible protocol being used required the keyword Send followed by the path and filename to be transferred, you would define the string: Send @ When the download control file was created, this string would be expanded to: Send C:\FILES\FUN\CASINO.ZIP If the user selects a batch download using a wildcard as a part of the filename (i.e. RA*.ZIP), the wildcard pattern - 94 - match will be expanded to a list of the full paths and filenames to be downloaded. UL Ctl String ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field represents the upload control string that is used to determine the format of the control file during an upload. This is identical in function to the DL Ctl String field except that for batch uploads, instead of specifying the full filename, the @ character expands only into the upload directory path since the filenames are not known prior to the upload. DL Log Keyword and UL Log Keyword ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When the external protocol has finished and control is returned to RemoteAccess, the log file that was created is scanned to extract information about what files were sent or received. RemoteAccess scans the file for the UL or DL Log Keyword. When it finds that word, it will scan forward x number of words to get the name of the file transferred as well as the description, if available. To illustrate how this works, look at this extract from a BiModem protocol log: = 10 Sep 14:10:10 BMOD DL-B \GRAPH\VGA.ZIP = 10 Sep 14:12:22 BMOD DL-B \GRAPH\MAP.ZIP The DL or UL Log Keyword can be any word in the log file that indicates the transfer of a single file. The keyword in the above example should be set to DL-B indicating that RemoteAccess should scan forward x number of words from the point at which DL-B starts in the current line. Log Name Keyword ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify the number of words that RemoteAccess should scan after locating the DL or UL Log Keyword in the protocol log file. In the example listed in the DL and UL Log Keyword fields, this field would be set to 1 since RemoteAccess must scan ahead 1 word after finding DL-B to obtain the downloaded filename. Log Desc Word ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When a user uploads, RemoteAccess can also obtain a file description from the log file if the protocol used supports description logging. It can then write this description - 95 - directly to the file database description field. To achieve this, you can set this field to the number of words RemoteAccess must scan after it finds the DL or UL Log Keyword in the log file. If the protocol doesn't support description logging or RemoteAccess cannot find a description, the user is prompted for the description by RemoteAccess. Example: Installing Lynx as an external protocol The following example illustrates how the Lynx protocol is defined: Name: : Lynx Key : L Ext ctl file : No Batch : Yes Status : Enabled Log file : C:\RA\DSZLOG.TXT Control file : C:\RA\LYNX.CTL DL command line : Lynx.Exe S /*P /*B /S /H @Lynx.Ctl UL command line : Lynx.Exe R /*P /*B /S /D /H # DL ctl string : @ UL ctl string : DL log keyword : x UL log keyword : X Log name word : 10 Log desc word : 0 Note the case status of the download and upload log keyword entries (one is lowercase and the other is uppercase). The above example assumes that your system directory is C:\RA. To complete the installation of this protocol, you'll need to set the DSZLOG environment variable to the full path and name of the log file that Lynx writes. This is done by entering the DOS command from the local console or from your BBS batch file: SET DSZLOG=C:\RA\DSZLOG.TXT When these settings are required, they are usually explained in the documentation that accompanies the external protocol software. Languages ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ RemoteAccess contains full support for multiple languages. This means that you can have different prompts, text files, questionnaires and menus for up to eight different languages. - 96 - Selecting the Languages option from the Manager pick-list menu displays a selection of currently installed languages. By default, RemoteAccess comes with the English language. You can run the language editor directly without going through RACONFIG menus by using the -L parameter on the RACONFIG command-line. For example: RACONFIG -L Executes RACONFIG and runs the language editor directly. To edit an installed language, position the cursor-bar over the desired language and press <ENTER>. To generate a new language file, position the cursor-bar over a blank entry and press <ENTER>. This pick-list menu represents the configuration of the selected language. As you will see, you can change any of the settings provided. Each field is explained as follows: Name This field holds the name for the language. Since this is the name which will be displayed to users when they are asked to select a language, you should use the country of origin's spelling rather than your own. For example, the name for the German language should be entered as Deutsch. Available If you do not wish to make the language available, toggle this field to No. Security This field is used to specify the minimum security level a user must have in order to select the language. Setting this field to zero causes the language to be made available to users of any security level. Flags These fields are used to specify the flag settings a user must have in order to select the language. For example, setting the first flag in set A to ON (setting it to an X) would specify that users must have their A1 flag set to ON in order to select this language. Language Text Selecting this field enters the language text editor which allows you to alter every one of the almost 700 different prompts. Using the editor is easy. Position the cursor-bar over the text prompt you wish to change and press <ENTER>. - 97 - At the top of the editor screen, the default English text appears for the currently-selected prompt. Any valid text file control characters may be inserted into the prompt text for automatic translation while the user in on-line. See the Control Codes Listing section of the External Support Files chapter for a list of control codes that may be used. While in the prompt text editor, the following keys may be used: ALT-C Changes the default color for the selected prompt. Selecting this command brings up a color chart pick- list menu. Position the block cursor on the desired color setting and press <ENTER> to assign it to the selected prompt. ALT-D Each language has default text associated with each prompt. When positioning the cursor-bar on a prompt, you will notice the default prompt text displayed on the top of your display. This is useful for identifying the original prompt text. Using this command copies the default prompt text into the selected prompt. ALT-S Use this command to search for any text strings. This search looks for any occurrences of the string you enter here and positions the cursor-bar on the next match. Though editing prompt text is a simple process, there are a few things you should keep in mind. * You will notice that some prompts ask for keys before you can edit the actual text. These are the keys that the user presses to activate an associated option. For example, the key for the Yes prompt is "Y". If you change the prompt to Ja you should be sure to change the activation key to "J". * For prompts which are of a "Yes/No" type, you are able to define the default action, or in other words, whether a "Yes" or "No" response is selected if the user just presses <ENTER>. * Some prompts are the headers for listing functions, such as Today's Callers, Who's On-line, etc. You will see that these have obvious spacing built-in which must be maintained if you change any part of the prompt text. * If you're translating the text into another language, there are two rules of thumb: - 98 - 1. Translate all text as literally as possible. 2. Try to use generic words and phrases. For example, RemoteAccess uses the same prompt for the "Access denied!" message when a user enters an incorrect password during log-on as it does when a user tries to access a passworded menu and fails. Therefore, you wouldn't want to change the text to "Access denied, logging you off!". Menu Path Each language can have its own set of menus. In this field you can define the paths to menus for each specific language. If one or more menus in the language-specific directory are missing, RemoteAccess will substitute the menu of the same name from the directory path specified earlier in RACONFIG: System > Paths Text Path Each language can also have its own set of text files. The same rules for missing menu substitution apply to text files. Ques Path In this field you may enter the path to the directory where the questionnaire files are stored for the selected language. NOTE: Questionnaire answer files (*.ASW files) are always written to the RemoteAccess system directory. See the Questionnaires chapter for more information on answer files. Filename This field is used to define the filename for the selected language. It is not necessary to enter an extension to the filename as the extension .RAL will be added automatically. NOTE: Text editing is disabled until a filename is entered in this field. Alt-Function Keys ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ RemoteAccess can be configured to take three types of actions when one of the ten function keys on your keyboard is pressed in conjunction with the ALT key. These ALT key definitions are configured using this option. Pressing <ENTER> on the AltFn Keys option from the Manager pick-list displays a new pick-list of ALT-F1 through ALT-F10 function key definitions. Position the cursor-bar on the key to be edited and press <ENTER>. - 99 - One of three actions may assigned to ALT-function keys: * Execute a DOS command-line. To assign a DOS command to one of the keys, simply enter the DOS command-line that is to be executed. * Display a specified text file from the text files directory. To display a specific text file from the text files directory, enter the # character followed by the name of the text file. For example, to display the text file GOODBYE.A??, the key would be defined as: #GOODBYE * Exit to DOS with an errorlevel set. To exit to DOS with a specific errorlevel set, enter the ? character followed by the errorlevel number you wish to pass back to DOS. For example, to exit with errorlevel 100 set, the key would be defined as: ?100 Suppose three entries looked like the following example: 5: ?110 6: C:\COMMAND.COM 7: #WELCOME Pressing ALT-F5 would cause RemoteAccess to exit to DOS, passing an errorlevel of 110. Pressing ALT-F6 would execute COMMAND.COM in a shell, and ALT-F7 would display the WELCOME.A?? file to the user currently on-line. Events ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The next item in the Manager pick-list menu is Events. RemoteAccess allows you to set pre-defined times during the week in which to perform certain functions, such as system maintenance. For example, let's say that every night at midnight RemoteAccess should exit with an errorlevel of 100 set. The BBS batch file can trap this errorlevel and jump to a segment of the batch file that runs maintenance routines such as message database packing using RAMSG. Up to 20 events may be defined for any day. Each event may be setup to run at a predetermined time and may also be configured to run on any number of days. - 100 - What happens when a user logs-on prior to an upcoming system event? If the user's time remaining is greater than the number of minutes until the upcoming event, the user's time remaining will be trimmed down to ensure the event is not missed. If the same user logs-on after the event has taken place, the time that was trimmed earlier will be restored. See the Forced field below for more details. System events are also commonly used when operating in conjunction with a mail network. In such cases, the events configured here are usually used to ensure that a user is not logged-on at a time when a Front End Mailer event is to run. Selecting the Events option from the pick-list menu presents you with the Event Editor display. Position the cursor-bar on an event to be created or edited and press <ENTER>. Start ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to define the time at which an event is to start. This time is specified in 24-hour format. For example, to define a start time of midnight, enter 00:00. Status ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to enable or disable a system event. When an event is disabled, RemoteAccess ignores it. Errorlevel ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify the errorlevel that RemoteAccess should return to the calling batch file. Your batch file should then trap this errorlevel and take the appropriate action. NOTE: Take care when selecting errorlevels to ensure that there are no conflicts with errorlevels used by RemoteAccess. A list of the errorlevels used is outlined in the Batch Files chapter of this manual. Forced ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If a user's file transfer overruns a system event which is Forced, the transfer will be aborted and the user disconnected to ensure that the event runs at the proper time. It is possible for events which are not forced to be missed if a file transfer takes longer than expected to - 101 - complete. RemoteAccess calculates file download times based on the size of the files to be transferred and the caller's connection speed. However if errors or other anomalies occur which cause the transfer to take longer, only forcing the event will ensure that the event is not missed. Also it is not possible for RemoteAccess to determine how long a batch transfer will take during an upload. To toggle this setting, position the cursor-bar on the Forced option and press <ENTER>. Days ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Selecting this field presents a pick-list menu containing the seven days of the week. To select the days to run the event, position the cursor-bar on the day of the week to be changed and press <ENTER>. Days marked with the "X" character are considered selected while days marked with the "-" character are not selected. When you are satisfied with the settings, press <ESCAPE> to return to the event editor. Menus ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The next item in the Manager pick-list menu is the Menus option. RemoteAccess features a powerful, state-of-the-art menu system. The menu system and the menu editor accessed with this option are fully explained in the Menu Administration chapter. It may seem confusing to simply make a reference to another chapter but when you realize the power and potential of the menu system, you'll understand why a full chapter has been devoted to the subject. Control Files ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The next item in the Manager pick-list menu is Ctl Files. This option allows you to edit all of the system control files. Control files reside in the RemoteAccess system directory and are identified by the filename extension of .CTL. Control files are one group of external support files used by RemoteAccess. External support files enhance RemoteAccess through their flexibility and functionality. It would be unfair to briefly discuss control files in this section. Therefore, a full chapter has been dedicated to - 102 - give you complete explanations and instructions. Refer to the Control Files section of the External Support Files chapter later in this manual for complete information on this option. Combined ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The next item in the Manager pick-list menu is the Combined option. Selecting this option presents a pick-list menu of configured message areas. One of the features of the message database system is the ability for users to select individual message areas to be included in their combined message area. This combined area acts as a file folder which holds all messages contained in the areas included in the user's combined area. This allows your users to select and process only those message areas that he or she is interested in. When a new user logs-on to your system, it is possible to define a default set of message areas to be included in the user's combined message area. These default settings can later be changed by the user. To select or deselect the default combined message areas, position the cursor-bar on the desired areas and press <ENTER>. When an area is selected for inclusion, a small block character will be displayed to the left of the message area number. When you are satisfied with the settings, press <ESCAPE> and answer y to the Save changes? prompt. NOTE: The Combined function is also discussed in the Menu Administration chapter under menu function 28-"Select combined areas", as well as earlier in this chapter under the Message areas option of the Manager pick-list menu. Limits ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The next item in the Manager pick-list menu is the Limits option. Pressing <ENTER> on this option presents a security level pick-list menu which is used to define time and file transfer limits and file ratios for individual security levels used by your BBS. Some planning may be required if you intend to use several security levels on your BBS. Each security level you plan to use should have an entry in this pick-list in order for RemoteAccess to know what time and file transfer limits are to be placed on users with these security levels. To add a new security level to the pick-list, press INSERT. - 103 - You will notice a new entry in the pick-list that contains zeros in all of its fields. The next step is to edit the entry just created. To edit an existing entry or an entry just created, position the cursor-bar on the desired entry and press <ENTER>. An Edit pick-list menu is displayed which contains the security level field and other fields for which restrictions can be applied. Move through the pick-list selecting each item, entering the desired values. Security ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to define the security level to which the limits will be applied. Valid security level entries are 1 to 65535. Time ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field specifies the time (in minutes) that users of the defined security level are given per day. For example, to give users of the defined security level one hour of access time per day, enter a value of 60 here. Download Limits for Individual Baud Rates ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The fields 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400, 16800, 19200 to 38400 are used to define the daily download kilobyte limits that are to be applied to users of the defined security level at different connection speeds. This allows you to effectively increase or decrease the amount of files (in kilobytes) that may be downloaded daily, by users of varying connection speeds. For example, if the 1200 field is set to 1024 and the 9600 field is set to 2048, then users of the defined security level who are connected at 1200 BPS may download up to 1024 kilobytes of files while users connected at 9600 BPS may download up to 2048 kilobytes. If a user logs-on at a connection speed which has a setting of zero here, RemoteAccess will use the next highest speed setting until it finds one that has a non-zero value. For example, if the 300 field is set to 1024 and all higher speed settings are set to zero, users of all connection speeds will be limited to 1024 kilobytes. - 104 - Local ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Local field is used to define the amount of files per day (in kilobytes) that may be downloaded locally. Local downloads are possible with RemoteAccess and allow a file transfer from the selected file area to a DOS drive and directory. For example, this allows you to transfer files from your BBS to a floppy diskette while maintaining transfer limits and ratios imposed. Local downloads are discussed further under menu function 32-"Download a file from area" and menu function 33-"Upload a file" in the Menu Administration chapter. RatioNum ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to define the upload to download ratio, by number of files, that the user must maintain in order to download. Usually used to encourage user uploading, this allows you to specify the number of files a user may download before being required to upload 1 file. For example, to require your users to upload 1 file for every 20 files they download, set this field to 20. It is also possible to give new users an initial upload credit. Refer to earlier sections of this chapter: Options > New Users > UL Credit RatioK ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to define the upload to download ratio, by number of kilobytes, that the user must maintain in order to download. This allows you to specify the number of files (in kilobytes) a user may download before being required to upload 1 kilobyte. For example, to require your users to upload 1 kilobyte for every 20 kilobytes they download, set this field to 20. It is also possible to give new users an initial upload kilobyte credit. Refer to earlier sections of this chapter: Options > New Users > UL CreditK - 105 - PerMin ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to define the per-minute cost (in credits) that is to be deducted from the Credit field in the users account record. This is used in some subscription systems and allows you to effectively charge a specific rate for each minute of usage. When a user's credit balance reaches zero, the questionnaire file NOCREDIT.Q-A is initiated unless the Post Bill flag is set to Yes in the user's account record, in which case a negative balance is allowed to accumulate. In order to handle decimal numbers allowed in this field, RemoteAccess stores the credit field internally as a real number. However, the credit field is always rounded and stored as a whole number when a user logs-off. This causes a minimal amount of accuracy to be lost, but allows third-party program developers to easily access the credit field in the user database. FlexTime ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If set to a non-zero value, then the user will be permitted to stay online after his/her daily time limit has been exceeded, however the amount specified will be deducted from the users credit balance every minute. The user will be disconnected when his/her credit balance reaches zero, unless post-billing has been enabled in the users record. Session ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Sets the maximum amount of time a user may stay online per session (as opposed to per day). Reset ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Enables the sysop to automatically deduct or add credits to the users account via RAUSER at regular intervals. Options are Never, Weekly, Monthly or Yearly. ResetOfs ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Determines on which day of the period specified in the Reset option that credits will be deducted or added to the users account. (Eg. 1 = First day of the Week/Month/Year). - 106 - ResetAmt ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The amount to apply to the users account if the Reset option is activated. A positive amount will add to the users credit balance, a negative amount will subtract. - 107 - Chapter 3 Menu Administration * * * * One of the most powerful features you will find in RemoteAccess is its menu system. From giving your BBS its own unique look and feel to creating menus for specialized services, this system is top notch! You'll have complete control over each individual menu item which can be restricted according to criteria such as security level, group number, flag settings, age, sex, time of day and much more. - 108 - ABOUT MENUS This is possibly the most important aspect of configuring your BBS. The menu system that you create will give your system its own unique look and feel. It gives you complete control not only cosmetically, but also in allowing and disallowing access to certain functions and parts of your BBS. Menus are line-oriented. Using the menu manager in RACONFIG, you enter the lines one at a time. Each line contains text that is displayed to the user, a menu function type, a field for optional data parameters, a hot-key assignment, minimum and maximum security levels, flag settings required to access the particular menu item and a host of other optional settings that make each individual menu item completely configurable. There are over seventy menu function types that may be activated at the press of a key or even automatically. This flexibility allows you to design your BBS in any number of ways. Practically anything your imagination can dream up can be implemented using the menu system incorporated in RemoteAccess. Therefore, understanding this system is a paramount factor in customizing your BBS. Each menu function type offered will be outlined in detail in this chapter. But first, we'll explain the concept of menus, other menu features and how to create menus. NOTE: RemoteAccess supports a maximum of 100 line items per menu. MENU LAYOUT The key to a good menu system is planning. And the best way to plan a menu system is to sketch it out on paper. Menus are easier to design on paper and menus designed on paper are easier to implement. Now there's a subtle hint! If you put your layout to paper, you won't regret the extra effort, especially if you've never used this powerful menu system before. A menu system is typically divided into sections; messages are accessed from a message menu, files are accessed from a file menu, games from a game menu, and so on. This sectioning, if done logically, creates a topology that is generally easy to comprehend and makes a system easier to navigate. Of course, this doesn't mean you have to have a typical menu system but for the purposes of demonstration this section refers to typical menu systems. - 109 - Two widely-used menu topologies will be outlined in detail in this section. These are the functional topology (the more popular of the two) and the subjective topology. Each has its merits and should be considered when designing the structure of your menu system. Whatever topology you decide to use, RemoteAccess provides the flexibility to compliment, enhance and blend topologies. Consider a functional topology; one where menus are organized according to their function. Examine the following functional topology. ┌───────────┐ │ Main Menu │ └─────┬─────┘ ┌─────────────┴─────────────┐ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ │ Message Menu │ │ File Menu │ └─────────┬─────────┘ └─────────┬─────────┘ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ │ Public Messages │ │ General Files │ └─────────┬─────────┘ └─────────┬─────────┘ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ │ Private E-Mail │ │ DOS Utility Files │ └───────────────────┘ └───────────────────┘ This simple system is grouped by function (hence the name). In this example, there are a total of 3 main sections; the Main Menu, Message Menu and File Menu. This topology is very simple to design and implement and makes it easy to add other main sections. For example, a Statistics Menu could be easily added off the Main Menu. From there, menu items could be added which display system usage graphs, user statistics and the like. ┌───────────┐ │ Main Menu │ └─────┬─────┘ ┌───────────────────┼────────────────────┐ ┌───────┴────────┐ ┌────────┴─────────┐ ┌────────┴───────┐ │ Message Menu │ │ File Menu │ │ Statistics Menu│ └───────┬────────┘ └────────┬─────────┘ └────────┬───────┘ ┌───────┴────────┐ ┌────────┴─────────┐ ┌────────┴───────┐ │ Public Messages│ │ General Files │ │ System Graph │ └───────┬────────┘ └────────┬─────────┘ └────────┬───────┘ ┌───────┴────────┐ ┌────────┴─────────┐ ┌────────┴───────┐ │ Private E-Mail │ │ DOS Utility Files│ │ User Statistics│ └────────────────┘ └──────────────────┘ └────────────────┘ This type of functional topology is virtually endless. This is why it is important to plan your menu system beforehand. But don't get out a pencil and paper just yet. It is - 110 - recommended that you read this entire chapter first, so that you realize the full potential of the menu system. Because there are tools that will help you minimize the number of menus you will need to meet your requirements. Tools such as templates (explained later in this chapter) are valuable time-savers that will add even more power to your menus while keeping them streamlined and easy to maintain. When you are satisfied with your overall functional topology plan, it may be wise to detail each of the main and/or sub-sections. Not only does this ease the menu implementation process, it also serves as a guide when configuring other aspects such as the message and file areas. ┌─────────────────────────┐ │ Messages Menu │ │ │ │ Security Level: 0 (all) │ │ Menu Name: MSGMAIN │ └────────────┬────────────┘ ┌────────────┴────────────┐ │ Area: Public Messages │ │ Area Number: 1 │ │ Group Number: 1 │ │ Read Security: 0 (all) │ │ Write Security: 50 │ │ Sysop Security: 100 (me)│ └────────────┬────────────┘ ┌────────────┴────────────┐ │ Area: Private E-Mail │ │ Area Number: 2 │ │ Group Number: 1 │ │ Read Security: 0 (all) │ │ Write Security: 50 │ │ Sysop Security: 100 (me)│ └─────────────────────────┘ As you can see, a flowchart such as the one shown above would be helpful not only in building menus but in configuring message areas as well. The included information might save you from jumping around from place to place within RACONFIG. The same sort of aid can be used to document the File Menu sections shown earlier. Examine the following flow chart of a sample four-area file system. You'll notice that it gives you a clear indication of the menu structure as well as a detailed chart of how each file area is to be set up. ┌─────────────────────────┐ │ Files Menu │ - 111 - │ │ │ Security Level: 0 (all) │ │ Menu Name: FILEMAIN │ └────────────┬────────────┘ ┌───────────────┴───────────────┐ ┌────────────┴────────────┐ ┌────────────┴────────────┐ │ Area: General Files │ │ Area: BBS Files │ │ Group Number: 1 │ │ Group Number: 1 │ │ Area Number: 1 │ │ Area Number: 3 │ │ Download Security: 50 │ │ Download Security: 50 │ │ List Security: 0 (all) │ │ List Security: 0 (all) │ │ Upload Security: 100 │ │ Upload Security: 100 │ │ Upload Area: 4 │ │ Upload Area: 4 │ └────────────┬────────────┘ └────────────┬────────────┘ ┌────────────┴────────────┐ ┌────────────┴────────────┐ │ Area: DOS Utility Files│ │ Area: Uploads │ │ Group Number: 1 │ │ Group Number: 1 │ │ Area Number: 2 │ │ Area Number: 4 │ │ Download Security: 50 │ │ Download Security: 100 │ │ List Security: 0 (all) │ │ List Security: 100 │ │ Upload Security: 100 │ │ Upload Security 50 │ │ Upload Area: 4 │ │ All Groups: Yes │ └─────────────────────────┘ └─────────────────────────┘ Even more information could be added about each individual area. Information such as inclusion in new files searches, upload duplicate checking, allowing long file descriptions and a wealth of other options may be indicated here if you configure these differently for each area. So much for functional topologies. You can see how dynamic they are and hopefully, the logical grouping of the various sections makes sense to you. Now it's time to discuss another topology -- the subjective topology. In the functional topology sections were grouped according to their function. A subjective topology is one in which menus are grouped by subject. For example, if a BBS was to primarily serve two subjects - let's say Cooking and Desktop Publishing (also known as DTP), the menus could be grouped according to subject. Each subject could have its own related message and file areas. ┌───────────┐ │ Main Menu │ └─────┬─────┘ ┌─────────────┴─────────────┐ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ │ Cooking Menu │ │ DTP Menu │ └─────────┬─────────┘ └─────────┬─────────┘ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ │ Cooking Messages │ │ DTP Messages │ - 112 - └─────────┬─────────┘ └─────────┬─────────┘ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ ┌─────────┴─────────┐ │ Cooking Files │ │ DTP Files │ └───────────────────┘ └───────────────────┘ In the above example, two sub-sections are defined off the Main Menu. Each is dedicated to its own subject. Users interested in the DTP subject need only enter the DTP sub- section from the Main Menu. There they will have access to both the DTP message and file areas. The same goes for the Cooking sub-section. While this type of topology is easy to use, it requires a little extra effort in the maintenance department if there are many subjects to support. Whether you decide to use a functional or subjective menu topology, or even a completely different approach, you can see the importance of planning your menu system. The fact that you can implement just about any menu design, indicates the power and potential that RemoteAccess has to offer. The sections that follow will detail the menu tools available which will help you to design and implement a powerful menu system. AUTOMATIC COMMANDS A menu function is usually executed when a user presses the hot-key assigned to that particular menu item. But menu functions can also be executed automatically. Each menu item contains an AutoExec field. By default, this field is set to No, but by toggling it to Yes, the menu item can be made to execute when it is played back (displayed) by RemoteAccess. As you read through the menu function types outlined in this chapter, you may come to realize that this is a very powerful feature. For example, when used with the menu function that displays a text file, you can design very elaborate, graphical text file menus that you wouldn't normally be able to display in a line-by-line menu. With RemoteAccess, you can determine whether or not users can turn off hot-keys on a system-wide or per-user basis. When hot-keys are not active, the user is said to have command stacking enabled. How this feature interacts with a user whose hot-keys are not activated is a bit tricky and should be noted. With hot-keys active, the user selects menu commands simply by pressing the hot-key assigned to a given menu item. When this is done, any text that is being displayed is interrupted and the command associated with the hot-key is - 113 - executed immediately. With hot-keys disabled (command stacking mode), the user is required to press the hot-key followed by pressing <ENTER>. Additionally, when a user is in command stacking mode, several commands may be entered at once followed by pressing the <ENTER> key. This allows a user to pass through menus to get right to a specific command. This requires the user to be familiar with the menu structure of the system which usually doesn't take the user long to do. When a user passes through a menu by using stacked menu commands, you can still control how your menu system will react. In some cases you may want an automatic command to execute, for example to redirect the user to another menu. On the other hand, if the command is only for cosmetic purposes (perhaps a text file to display some user statistics), it would be better to skip the command and continue straight to the next menu. The rule is that when command stacking is used to pass through a menu, the automatic menu command will only be executed; a) if it is the first item in the menu and; b) it is not a display text file type function. So if you use automatic execution and allow users to disable hot-key functionality, you'll want to keep this rule in mind. Automatic execution can be used in many other instances as well. Just to give you some ideas, it might be used to display a text file to users who have a security level equal to or greater than a certain level. Or, it might be used to execute an external program for users who have certain access flags turned on. Yet another use is to execute multiple function menus which are used to execute several functions when a single command key is entered. For example, let's suppose you run a voting booth as an external program and that you want to perform 3 separate functions each time the voting booth is selected from your menu. You could create a new multiple function menu which contains 3 automatic menu commands: * Create a log entry indicating that the user entered the voting booth. * Run the external voting booth program. * Return to MAINMENU. When a user selects the voting booth option from the MAINMENU, the multiple function menu is called (perhaps as a Gosub) which writes a log entry, runs the voting booth and returns to MAINMENU. - 114 - TEMPLATES Another one of the advantages of RemoteAccess is that it gives the Sysop the flexibility of designing menus with the least amount of maintenance required. Not long ago, it was necessary to have a separate menu for each message and file area. In the past, this has led to Sysop tedium because Sysops were required to add a separate menu, for example, to add a message or file area. The menu templating system alleviates this problem by allowing you to set up one menu that will act as a skeleton for all your message and file areas. Four template variables are available for your use. They are the /M, /MG, /F and /FG variables. The /M variable represents the currently-selected message area. The /MG variable represents the currently-selected message group. The /F variable represents the currently-selected file area. And finally, /FG represents the currently-selected file group. When referenced, these variables return a numeric value. Likewise, when these variables are modified, a numeric value must be assigned to them. Template variables are used in conjunction with several message and file menu functions to indicate on which groups or areas the function is to be performed. Variables are simply labels which hold values assigned to them. They can be referenced as well as modified. They can also be used to change the way that certain menu functions operate. Complete details are given in the appropriate menu function types listed later in this chapter. For now, we will touch briefly on value assignments using the /M and /F variables. To install a value into one of these two template variables, simply specify /M=<area number> or /F=<area number> in the optional data field of a type 1, 2 or 4 menu command. For example, let's say you set up a message area template menu called MSGMENU, and in this menu you had a number of menu items, each with its own functions relating to the message database. An example is laid out in the following table: Key Menu Function Optional Data Menu Type ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── R Read messages /M 23 S Scan messages /M 24 Q QuickScan messages /M 25 P Post message /M 27 In this example, you'll notice a few things. First, each - 115 - function is specific to the message database and requires the message area to act upon in the optional data field. We simply used /M in the optional data field to tell RemoteAccess to use the template variable which refers to the user's currently- selected message area. When the menu MSGMENU is called with /M in the optional data field, RemoteAccess knows which message area in which to perform these menu functions. So to continue our example, let's say that you are calling MSGMENU from MAINMENU menu. It might look something like this: Key Menu Function Optional Data Menu Type ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── L Goto Logoff Menu LOGOFF 1 M Goto Message Menu MSGMENU /M=1 1 By looking at this example, you can see that when a user presses the M key, the menu MSGMENU will be displayed and that all message database menu functions that refer to /M will perform their function on message area one. Now for a new twist! You aren't required to set the value of the /M variable using the method in the previous table. When you omit the <area number> assignment from the /M parameter, RemoteAccess uses the user's last-selected message area number. If the user has never logged on before, this value will default to 1, or to the lowest message area number that the user has access to. If the user has called before, RemoteAccess will remember the last-selected message area for that particular user and the value of /M will be set to that area number. You are probably beginning to see why menu templates are so valuable. Without the /M variable, you would need to specify a message area number in the optional data field of each of the message-base menu functions. This would require a separate menu for each message area. What a chore this would be! By using the variable that stores the message area number, this requirement is obliterated and one message menu can be used for all message areas. This also applies to file areas as well. The example just outlined applies directly to the manner in which file areas are handled. But what about groups? Now there is a completely different concept! Continue reading the next section. - 116 - MESSAGE AND FILE GROUPS The Configuration chapter outlined specific details on message and file group administration. If for some reason you skippped that chapter, it is recommended that you read it after finishing this section if you plan to implement message or file groups. While this section does not attempt to fully explain how to implement groups, it does attempt to explain the concept of groups and how they might apply to your BBS. The menu function types listing later in this chapter explains technically how menu functions which apply to groups are implemented. Message and file areas can belong to specific groups. Users might have access to all message and file areas in one group but not another. This allows logical partitioning of your BBS by group, or topic. For example, let's say that your BBS will cater to two audiences; 1) professional programmers and; 2) computer game enthusiasts. You might have three message and file areas dedicated to programming topics, and three message and file areas dedicated to computer gaming topics. You might not want computer gaming enthusiasts to have access to the areas dedicated to professional programmers and vise versa. In such a case, the message and file areas dedicated to each topic may be placed in their own group. Each group may be configured separately to allow or disallow access to users of a given security level, or to users who meet specific access flag setting requirements. Additionally, an individual message or file area can belong to all groups, one specific group, or to one specific group and up to three alternate groups. For instance, while a message area called Gaming appropriately belongs to the group dedicated to computer gaming enthusiasts, a message area called User to User E-Mail is an appropriate area for users in both groups. Therefore, the E-Mail message area may be configured as belonging to all groups, or it may be configured to belong primarily to group one and alternately to group two. Each of these two types of configuration achieves the intended goal of allowing access to the message area to users in both groups. You should also keep in mind that if you decide not to implement groups during your initial setup, they can be added quite easily later on. Your system's design can still be quite diverse without the use of groups. - 117 - THE TOP MENU RemoteAccess uses one hard-coded menu called TOP.MNU. Each time a user completes the log-on process, the TOP menu is presented to the user. If this menu does not exist, RemoteAccess cannot continue operation and will display an error message just before terminating the session. The TOP menu can be the main menu, or as some Sysops prefer, it can be used simply as a means to call the first, or main menu. When installing RemoteAccess for the first time, the TOP menu that is created is a simple one-line menu. The menu item it contains is an AutoExec entry which calls menu function type 1 - Goto another menu which executes a menu called MAINMENU. The reason that the TOP menu is installed in this manner is to allow advanced behind the scenes functions to be processed in the TOP menu each time a user logs-on but before the main menu is displayed. For example, one Sysop runs an external program from the TOP menu each time a user logs-on. This program reads the RemoteAccess exit files and performs functions such as verifying the user's phone number and address information. Then, when the program terminates, the TOP menu continues and executes a type 1 - Goto another menu which brings the user to the actual main menu. To summarize, the TOP menu must exist and can be used as the main system menu if that's what you prefer. It can be used to execute behind the scenes functions, or just to call the main menu, or as the first menu a user sees. SPECIAL SWITCHES As you'll learn in the sections that follow, each menu item contains an optional data field used to manipulate the way in which certain menu functions are executed. You should know going in, that there are two special switches which may be placed at the end of the optional data field for any menu function. They are: /NS This switch suppresses the usual clear screen code that is sent when a new menu is displayed. This is usually only useful when used with a menu navigation (GOTO, GOSUB, etc.) command. This switch is known to have been used on systems where ANSI graphic pull down menus were implemented and screen clearing needed to be suppressed regardless of the caller's screen clearing setting. It is also useful where menu prompts follow one another in succession without clearing the screen. - 118 - /K=xxx This switch places the specified text <xxx> into the user's input buffer to be processed exactly as if it had been entered by the user as a stacked command. This is an extremely powerful facility which can be used to link a number of menu commands together and customize a large number of hard-coded selection menus. {+} Registered only. GLOBAL MENU It is likely that there are some commands that you will want to have available from every menu that your users see. Rather than duplicating these menu functions in every menu, you can simply place them by themselves in a menu called GLOBALRA. RemoteAccess searches for this special menu, and if it exists, automatically appends it to the end of every menu. RemoteAccess appends the global menu in its entirety. In other words, it appends not only the commands but any visible text as well. Additionally, the global menu will always inherit the highlight colors of the current menu that it is appended to. For example, if you wanted to offer the user a log-off command from every menu, you could simply place this command in the global menu, including the text displayed to the user. {+} Registered only. CREATING MENUS Earlier in this chapter, we summarized menu layouts and how important it is to plan your menu system. You learned about various features such as templates, special switches and the global menu. Now it's time to put what you've learned to use in creating your own menus. When you installed RemoteAccess, a set of initial, default menus were placed onto your system. If you decide to use these menus, then perhaps all you need to do is edit them to suit your tastes and needs. If you would rather start your menu system from scratch, you will probably want to delete the default menus from your system. To do this, follow the check-list procedure below: 1) Change to the menu directory (usually \RA\MENUS). CD \RA\MENUS <ENTER> 2) Delete all menu files in this directory. DEL *.MNU <ENTER> - 119 - 3) Change to the RemoteAccess system directory. CD \RA <ENTER> 4) Fire up RACONFIG. RACONFIG <ENTER> 5) Once in RACONFIG, select: Manager > Menus This will take you into the RemoteAccess menu editing portion of RACONFIG. The first screen displayed is the language pick-list menu. In most cases, you will only have one language to select from. Use the UPand DOWN keys to move the cursor-bar to the language selection of your choice and then press <ENTER>. NOTE: In most cases, you need only press <ENTER> to select the default language provided during your initial installation. The next screen that you will see is the menu pick-list. This is a pick list of all existing menus. To edit an existing menu, you would simply position the cursor-bar on the desired menu name and press <ENTER>. To create a new menu, press the INSERT key. Next, you will see the menu editing screen on your display. As you will see, the menu is blank. The name NONAME.MNU has been temporarily assigned as the menu name and is displayed in the upper-right corner. You can give the menu a more meaningful name when you save it later. For now, we will work with this default menu name. You will also notice a series of commands at the bottom of the display. These commands are available while you're in this screen. They are described in the following table: ENTER Edit the currently selected menu item. INSERT Insert a new menu item immediately before the currently selected item. DELETE Delete the currently selected menu item. - 120 - ESCAPE Exit the menu editor. ALT-L Discard the current menu and load another from disk. ALT-S Save the current menu to disk. ALT-P View or modify the menu prompt, its display and highlight colors as well as whether or not to suppress all carriage-return, line-feed, color change sequences, and the global menu. This option allows you to define five settings that are specific to this menu. They are: * The prompt that is to be displayed after this menu. Text file control codes as well as control codes outlined later in this chapter under the User Display field may be used here. * The prompt display color to be used. * The prompt highlight color to be used. * Whether or not carriage-return, line-feed and color change sequences will be disabled. This option supports non-native emulations which do not support ANSI or AVATAR fallback, such as NAPLPS and RIP. * Whether or not to append to global menu (GLOBALRA.MNU) to the end of this menu. ALT-D Simulate what the menu would look like to a user. This handy option lets you take a peek at how your menu will look. Press INSERT to create the first item in your new menu. When you do this, you will notice a change in the first line of your menu. It has actually become a completely blank menu item. Now edit the new item you've created. Notice that the cursor-bar is already positioned on the new item. (Press <ENTER> for the Edit Menu Item screen.) This is the editor used to edit all menu items. As you can see, there are several fields that need explanation. But first, take a look at the Edit Menu Item screen layout. The top portion of the display shows the user display text - 121 - as well as the optional data fields. A ruler is also displayed just above the user display text to aid you in formatting the text that is displayed to your users. The lower portion of the display shows a list of fields that may be edited along with data pertaining to each field. Use the UP, DOWN and <ENTER> keys to select the fields you wish to edit. Edit the fields in sequence and discover the purpose of each one. Action ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The Action field determines what menu function will be performed by this particular menu item. Move the cursor-bar to the Action field and press <ENTER>. Upon doing so, the Menu Action Groups pick-list menu is displayed to make easy work of selecting a menu function. The default menu action group that is initially presented is the Menu Functions group since it is usually the group most commonly used. Press <ESCAPE> to move to the Menu Action Groups pick-list. Notice there are eight groups to choose from. These are: Display only (no command) Selecting this function simply indicates that no actual function is to be performed and that the menu item is used solely for display purposes. Menu Functions This group contains a list of menu functions related to other menus. Display Text Files This group contains functions related to text file display. General System Options This group contains a pick-list of functions related to the overall system. Message-base Commands This group contains a pick-list of functions relating to the message system. File-area Commands - 122 - This group contains a list of function selections that pertain to the files system. External - Door, Exits This group contains a pick-list of functions relating to running external programs. Change User Options This group contains a pick-list of functions pertaining to user configuration. Using the UP, DOWN, <ENTER> and <ESCAPE> keys, you can navigate through the menu pick-lists. Pressing <ESCAPE> returns you to the previous pick-list menu. Since the purpose of the TOP menu that you are creating is to simply call MAINMENU, you'll need to use menu function type 1 - Goto another menu. The cursor-bar should already be positioned on this selection by default. Therefore, just press <ENTER> to select this function. You'll notice the Action field will now contain the menu function type that you just selected. User Display ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field allows you to define what will be displayed to the user when this item is processed. With the cursor-bar positioned on the Display field, press <ENTER>. You may enter text along with any valid text file control codes. Text file control codes act as macros within display text and can be used to automatically display user and system data by embedding them in the text entered in this field. Text file control codes are explained in detail in the External Support Files chapter. Text file control codes are preceded with a control character. Whether the text file control code is a single or multiple-character code, the first code entered is always a control character. Throughout this manual as well as in most computer-related documentation, control characters are illustrated in text as a capital letter preceded by the caret "^" character. For example, a CTRL-A character is illustrated as ^A. The following two-step checklist explains how to enter a control code in the user display text: 1) While pressing the "Ctrl" key, press "P". This prepares - 123 - RACONFIG for the next, literal character. After pressing this key combination, you will notice the cursor change in appearance from a line cursor to a block cursor. 2) While pressing the "Ctrl" key, press the control character you wish to enter. For example, to enter ^A as the control code (which prompts the user to press <ENTER>), you would press CTRL-A. In the user display text, you will notice that the letter "A" has been highlighted, indicating that it is actually a ^A character. You'll learn more about specific text file control codes that can be used in this field in the chapter on External Support Files in this manual. Special User Display Characters In addition to the text file control codes that you can embed directly into user display text, a special set of control characters is also supported. These characters are used to alter the way in which user display text is presented to the user. They are also used to display specific system data. Take a look at each of the special characters and what data that each represents. Semicolon ";" After displaying the contents of the user display field, RemoteAccess normally moves the cursor down one line to prepare for the next menu item. This is known as a carriage- return and line-feed sequence. However, if you place the semicolon character at the end of the user display line, the user display text from the next menu item will be appended to the same line. In other words, using the semicolon causes the carriage-return/line-feed sequence to be suppressed. Caret "^" The caret character switches between the normal line colors and the defined menu highlight color. For example, to display the letter "G" using the highlight color specified for the current menu, you would enter ^G^ in the user display text. Tilde "~" The tilde character causes the user's time remaining today (in minutes) to be displayed at the current cursor location. This is handy when used within the menu prompt text. For example, if the menu prompt contents were: - 124 - Your Time: ^~ mins^ Command: The corresponding prompt that would be displayed would look something like this: Your Time: 55 mins Command: _ Each (at) "@" The each character (also known as the at character) expands to display the name of the currently-selected file template area as defined in RACONFIG. Accent "`" The accent character expands to display the name of the currently-selected message template area as defined in RACONFIG. NOTE: This is not the apostrophe character. It is usually located on the same key as the tilde character. Remember that in our example the TOP menu will be created, and that its sole purpose is to call a menu called MAINMENU. Now that you've experimented with the various user display characters, delete all text in the user display field and simply enter a semicolon. Having done this, your TOP menu will display nothing to the user (not even a carriage- return line-feed sequence). Optional Data ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Position the cursor-bar and select the optional data field. You'll notice the cursor is repositioned in the upper portion of the screen. This is where optional data is entered. For our example menu item, the optional data required is the menu name to Goto. For the sake of the example, type MAINMENU and press <ENTER>. Different menu function types require different optional data. Consult the menu types listing in this chapter for optional data field information. It is possible to use Textfile Control Codes in this field in the same way as they are used in the User Display field. If one of these codes is present, it will be automatically replaced with its value when the menu commend is executed. Hot-Key ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify the key that is to activate this - 125 - menu item. For example, if you wanted this menu item to be executed when the user pressed A, simply enter A into this field. ┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Here's a Tip! │ │ │ │ It's possible to link a command to the <ENTER> key to │ │ create a "default" action for a menu. This is done using│ │ the ^M text file control code. Enter CTRL-P followed by │ │ CTRL-M in the Hot-Key field to use <ENTER> as a command │ │ hot-key. │ └──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ Since our example item does not require the press of a key, leave this field blank. If you've already entered a character, it can be removed by pressing the DELETE key. AutoExec ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to indicate whether this particular menu item is to be executed automatically or if the user will be required to press the associated hot-key to select it. This field has two possible settings; Yes or No. To change the current setting, position the cursor-bar on AutoExec and press <ENTER>. Toggle this field to Yes since our example calls for this menu item to be executed automatically. Color ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field allows you to define the foreground and background colors of the text that is displayed to the user. Selecting this field presents a color chart pick-list menu. The initial color of a new menu item is black on black. Use the cursor keys to move the selector around the chart. When you find a color combination that suits you, press <ENTER> to select it. You probably noticed the small indicator at the bottom of the color chart. This indicator displays the background and foreground color numbers of the current selector position in hexadecimal format. After selecting the color combination, the Edit Menu Item screen displays an example of your selection so that you can see how the displayed text will appear to your users. - 126 - For the sake of our example, it doesn't matter which colors you use since this menu item will not display any text to the user. MinSec ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to define the minimum security level required for the user to see and select this menu item. For example, if you wanted this item to be available only to users with a security level of 100 or more, you would set this field to a value of 100. In our example, you'll want all users to be able to get to the main menu. Therefore, set a security level of zero here (which is the default value). MaxSec ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to define the maximum security level required to see and select this menu item. When used together with MinSec you can effectively create menu items that can only be seen and accessed by users of a given security level range. Imagine the possibilities that this presents in terms of customization. If you're following along with our example, leave this field set to zero since you won't need to restrict it in any way. Flags ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The access flags in a menu item function just as they do in other areas of RemoteAccess (i.e. message and file area access). You can restrict menu items not only to users who have a security level that falls in the range defined by MinSec and MaxSec, but also to users who have specific access flag settings. For example, if you wanted a menu item to be available only to users with access flag A1 set to ON, position the cursor-bar on A Flags and press <ENTER>. From the pick-list of access flags, select the flag you wish to change (the A Flag in this case) and press <ENTER>. You'll notice that the flag toggles to one of three possible states; "X" (ON), "O" (OFF), or "-" (ON or OFF). Press <ESCAPE> when you are satisfied with the flag settings. When a flag is set to X or O, users must have the same flag setting stored in their user account record in order to view or select the menu item. - 127 - If you skipped the section on Access Flags in the Configuration chapter, it is recommended that you read it to gain at least a basic understanding of how flags are used. Many Sysops never have a need to use access flags and you may never need them either. But if you understand how they function, it might help you to better plan your system. For the sake of our example, move the cursor-bar past the four flag fields since none of these needs to be set. TimeUsed ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to define the number of minutes that a user must be logged-on before the menu item can be selected. In cases where external programs such as time banks are used, this setting can be used to discourage users from logging-on solely for the purposes of storing their daily time and/or download limits. For example, if this field was set to a value of 5, a user would be required to be logged-on for at least 5 minutes before being able to select this menu item. If you're following along with our example, leave this field set to zero since you won't need to restrict it in any way. TimeLeft ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field allows you to define the minimum amount of time (in minutes) that a user is required to have remaining in order to select this menu item. A practical application for this field may be when the menu item is used to load an external program such as an on-line game where there would not be enough time left for the user to effectively play the game. For example, if this field was set to a value of 5, a user would be required to have at least 5 minutes remaining in order to access this menu item. If you're following along with our example, leave this field set to zero since you won't need to restrict it in any way. Age ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field allows you to restrict a menu item to users of at least a certain age. If you have your system configured to prompt users for their date of birth, it is possible for RemoteAccess to calculate the user's age and compare it to the value of this field. - 128 - For example, if this field is set to a value of 18, then no user whose date of birth calculates to less than 18 years of age will be able to access this menu item. If you're following along with our example, leave this field set to zero since you won't need to restrict it in any way. NOTE: In order for RemoteAccess to calculate a user's age, it must know the user's date of birth. To require your users to enter their date of birth, activate the option in RACONFIG: Options > New Users > Birthdate MinSpeed ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to restrict menu items to calls that are established at a minimum BPS rate. This is great for restricting only certain functions (such as file downloading) to users who are connected at faster speeds. For example, to restrict a menu item to users connected at a minimum of 2400 BPS, set this field to a value of 2400. If you're following along with our example, leave this field set to zero since you won't need to restrict it in any way. MaxSpeed ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The opposite of MinSpeed, this field is used to restrict access to a menu item to callers of up to a given BPS rate. For example, if this field was set to a value of 2400, any user connected at a BPS rate of greater than 2400 would not be allowed access to this menu item. If you're following along with our example, leave this field set to zero since you won't need to restrict it in any way. Credit ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to restrict access to users who have a minimum amount of credit on account. The value specified here is not deducted from the user's current credit amount. It is used simply to restrict access based on the user's existing credit amount. For example, if a menu item had a cost of 10 credits associated with it and a user had 8 credits remaining on account, you might want to restrict access to that menu item to prevent the user from using more credits than what is on - 129 - account. When post billing is used, it is generally acceptable for users to accrue negative credit amounts. However in cases where post billing is not used, this option should be considered. If you're following along with our example, leave this field set to zero since you won't need to restrict it in any way. FlatCost ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify the amount of credits, if any, that should be deducted from the user's account each time this menu item is selected. If the user has less than the specified amount of credits remaining, the user will accrue a negative credit amount. If you're following along with our example, leave this field set to zero since you won't need to restrict it in any way. TimeCost ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This field is used to specify the amount of credits, if any, that should be deducted for each minute that the caller uses this menu item. RemoteAccess begins timing when the menu item is selected and stops timing when the menu is redisplayed. For example, to deduct 1 credit for each minute that a menu item is used, set this field to a value of 1. If you're following along with our example, leave this field set to zero since you won't need to restrict it in any way. Terminal ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Use this field to restrict access to a menu item to callers who have a specific emulation enabled. For example, if you were running an external program that did not detect a user's emulation and a minimum emulation of ANSI was required, you could set this option to ANS to restrict its use to callers with ANSI emulation enabled. This would effectively prevent callers with no terminal emulation above ASCII text to select the menu item. By de-selecting both .ANS and .AVT in the pick-list menu, callers of any terminal emulation type will be allowed to select the menu item. On the other hand, selecting both - 130 - .ANS and .AVT allows users of either emulation type to select the menu item. Similarly to make a menu option only available to users with RIP capability, set this option to RIP only. If you're following along with our example, leave this field set to its default, unrestricted setting. Nodes ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option lets you restrict a menu item to callers who are on a specific node or nodes. RemoteAccess supports up to 255 nodes. Pressing <ENTER> on this field will present you with a large pick list of all node numbers. To select or deselect a node, move the cursor-bar to the node number and press <SPACEBAR> to toggle it. Selected nodes are indicated by a block character and all nodes are selected by default. Additionally, you may also select (tag) or de-select (un-tag) all nodes by pressing ALT-T or ALT-U. Pressing <ESCAPE> or <ENTER> saves the current selection. If you're following our example, leave all nodes selected since you won't need to restrict this menu item in any way. Groups ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option allows you to restrict a menu item to users of specified groups. RemoteAccess supports up to 255 groups, all of which are selected by default. The groups can be selected and de-selected in the same manner as explained under the Nodes option above. If you're following our example, leave all groups selected since you won't need to restrict this menu item in any way. DayTimes ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This option is used to restrict a menu item so that it can only be selected during certain times of the day. Pressing <ENTER> at this option will present you with a scheduler pick-list. You can even restrict a menu item to certain times for each day of the week. By default, a menu item is not restricted by time of day. If you're following our example, leave the day times set to their default values since you won't need to restrict this menu item in any way. - 131 - If you've followed along with our example, you've probably learned a great deal about the power and flexibility that RemoteAccess lends to your menu system. Your menu item didn't utilize many of the options available but you should have valid data in the following fields: * Action (type 1 - Goto another menu) * Display (a semicolon character) * OptData (the menu name MAINMENU) * AutoExec (should be set to Yes) Press <ESCAPE> to exit the Edit Menu Item screen and return to the main menu editor screen. Press <ESCAPE> or A-S and when prompted for the filename to save, type TOP <ENTER>. You've now created a menu. Granted, it was a lengthy process this time, however next time you'll be able to go through the steps much more quickly. You are now ready to create your first actionable menu. Remember to call it MAINMENU and have fun! MENU TYPES LISTING This section describes each individual menu function type that is available. Each menu type listed includes explanations of usage syntax and function description. In many cases, a usage example is also provided. Certain symbols are used to describe variables and parameters throughout this section. Take a moment to review these now so that you will better comprehend the material that follows. <variable> Where the chevrons < > are used, you can expect to find a required variable parameter. Variables can be filenames, strings of characters, or integer (numeric) values. Substitute the variable between the chevrons with a valid value. Where chevrons are used, the data is not optional. It must be supplied. Example: Optional data: <menu name> Substitute a valid menu name in place of <menu name>. [parameter] Where brackets [ ] are used, you can expect to to find an optional parameter. Optional parameters are not required input. Example: Optional data: <menu name> [password] - 132 - Substitute a valid menu name in place of <menu name> (required input) and optionally substitute a password to this menu in place of [password]. Type: 1 Goto another menu ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <menu name> [password] [/M=<message area|+|-|>|<] [/F=<file area|+|-|>|<] [*U<activity>] Description: This function causes RemoteAccess to jump to menu <menu name>. If a [password] is specified, the user will be prompted to enter a non-case-sensitive password before being allowed access to the menu. The <message area> and <file area> variables are used when assigning a value to the message and file area template variables (/M and /F). Optionally, the + - > or < parameters can be specified instead of the <message area> or <file area> numbers. These have the following effects: + Sets the currently selected message or file area to the next available area. - Sets the currently selected message or file area to the previous area. > Sets the currently selected message or file area to the next available area within the current group. < Sets the currently selected message or file area to the previous area within the current group. Each of these options assigns the new area number to the /M or /F template variables. The optional *U parameter is used to place a sysop-defined entry in the "Who's online" list. For full details on this parameter, see Menu Type 7. Examples: To jump to a menu called FILES: Optional data: FILES - 133 - To jump to a menu called MESSAGE and set the currently selected message area to 1: Optional data: MESSAGE /M=1 To jump to a menu called SYSOP and require a non-case- sensitive password of SECRET: Optional data: SYSOP SECRET To jump to a menu called FILES, set the currently selected file area to 10, set the currently selected message area to 10 and require a password of UNCLE: Optional data: FILES UNCLE /M=10 /F=10 To jump to a menu called MESSAGE and set the currently selected message area to the next available message area: Optional data: MESSAGE /M=+ To jump to a menu called FILES and set the currently selected file area to the previous area within the same file group: Optional data: FILES /F=< Type: 2 Gosub another menu ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <menu name> [password] [/M=<message area|+|-|>|<] [/F=<file area|+|-|>|<] [*U<activity>] Description: This is identical in function to the type 1 with the exception that RemoteAccess saves the calling menu name on a stack, making it possible to return to the calling menu using a type 3 function. All optional data parameters are the same as those used with menu function type 1. Example: This is a popular menu function which performs well when used consistently. Whenever you use this function, the current menu location is saved on a stack. Then, when a type 3 function is executed (return from Gosub), RemoteAccess returns to the last menu that was put on the stack. You can - 134 - look at a stack just as you would a stack of paper. The last one placed onto the stack is on top and is therefore the first one pulled off the stack. This stacking allows you to nest menus. It also allows you to easily return from menus without having to specify the <menu name> to return to. NOTE: Menus called in this manner can be nested to a maximum of 50 levels. Type: 3 Return from Gosub ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [*U<activity>] Description: This function is used to return to the last menu from which a Gosub (type 2) was used. Keep in mind; this will return to the last menu that was saved on the stack by a Gosub function. Example: A user enters a menu called FILES from the MAINMENU menu via a type 2 Gosub function and then enters a menu called IBM, again using the type 2 Gosub function. Once in the IBM menu, if the user executes a type 3 Return from Gosub function, the menu that the user will be returned to is the FILES menu. If the user executes another type 3 Return from Gosub function, he will be returned to the TOP menu. In this example, two menus were placed onto the stack. Both menus were returned to using the type 3 function thereby clearing stack. Type: 4 Goto menu after clearing menu stack ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <menu name> [password] [/M=<message area|+|-|>|<] [/F=<file area|+|-|>|<] [*U<activity>] Description: - 135 - This is identical in function to type 1, with the exception that before the specified menu is called, the menu stack is cleared. For this reason, you cannot use a type 3 function immediately after using this. All optional data parameters are the same as those used with the menu function type 1. Type: 5 Display a .A?? text file ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <1-8 character filename> [/BINARY] Description: This menu type will display a file from your text file directory (as defined in RACONFIG) to the user on-line. RemoteAccess will display the file specified in the optional data field using one of three filename extensions. If the user has AVATAR codes enabled, RemoteAccess will display the file <filename.AVT> to the user. However, if <filename.AVT> is missing or the user does not have AVATAR enabled but does have ANSI enabled, the file <filename.ANS> will be displayed. Likewise, if the user has only ASCII enabled or both <filename.AVT> and <filename.ANS> are missing, the file <filename.ASC will be displayed. These files may contain any text or graphical information within the limitations of the text format. For example, you cannot display ANSI color in an ASCII text file. Along with text and graphics, it is also possible to display comprehensive system and user details by inserting special control codes in these files. These codes are listed in the External Support Files chapter of this manual. If the optional /BINARY parameter is specified, the file will be transmitted with no translation at all. For example, embedded control codes will not be interpreted when this parameter is specified. If you use this paramter, it must be the last parameter in the optional data field. Type: 6 Bulletin Menu ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <[path\] 1-7 character filename> - 136 - Description: Displays the file <filename.A??> from the text file directory. If an optional path is specified, RemoteAccess will search for all associated bulletin files in this path instead of the standard text file directory. Once <filename> is displayed, the user is prompted for a file suffix of (8 - length of <filename>) (thus the restriction of a 7- character filename in the optional data field). The suffix is appended to the original filename specified and the .A?? file is then displayed as it would be using menu function type 45. This function is used to display a master bulletin file to the user. It usually contains text and graphical information that depicts a list of bulletin choices that are available for selection. In other words, this can be used as a main bulletin menu if you have more than one bulletin that you would like to make available to your users. Example: Optional data: BULLETT As you can see, the 1-7 character filename specified in this example is BULLETT which is a 7-character filename. Since the maximum length of a filename (not including the filename extension) is eight characters, the user will be required to enter a 1-character suffix. If the filename specified in the optional data field was 5 characters in length, the user would be prompted to enter a 3-character suffix, and the <ENTER> key. Let's say, for the sake of example, that you'll offer two bulletin choices off your main bulletin menu BULLETT: ┌───────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Select The Bulletin To View │ │ │ │ 1) Latest System News │ │ 2) DTP News │ │ │ │ Bulletin to view (Enter = quit): │ └───────────────────────────────────────┘ If the user presses 1, the filename BULLETT1.A?? is displayed. If the user presses 2, the file BULLETT2.A?? is displayed. If the user presses <ENTER> the BULLETT menu is exited. NOTE: If an invalid selection is made, the user will be - 137 - prompted Press <ENTER> to continue: and the BULLETT file will be redisplayed. Type: 7 Run an external program in a shell (Doors) ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <command line> [control codes] Description: This function will run an external program, or door in a shell while the user is on-line. Examples range from on-line games to external file transfer programs and the like. (Refer also to menu function type 15-"Exit to DOS with errorlevel" for an alternative method of running external programs without shelling). The full name of the program must be specified if it is a .EXE or .COM file. To run one of these two types of programs, simply put the name of the program in the optional data field. If you wish to call a batch file, this must be done via COMMAND.COM, the DOS memory-resident command line processor (an example is given below). Many programs require extra information to be passed on the command line. Therefore, the following control codes may be used. In each case, the code is replaced by the value it represents. See the examples listed below for usage syntax. Parameters: *A Write the user's handle (if any) in the DORINFO1.DEF exit file rather than the user's real name. *B User's BPS connection speed, or 0 if logged- on locally. *C Full path and name to COMMAND.COM. *D Forces RemoteAccess to generate the old-style DORINFO1.DEF exit file. This format does not include the -R parameter in the baudrate field which is normally used to indicate an error-free connection. *F User's first name. - 138 - *G The user's current ANSI graphics setting; 0=Off / 1=On. *H Normally, the communications driver is de- initialized before running an external program in order to avoid possible conflicts between the driver and the external program. Specifying this parameter leaves the driver hot, or active. *L User's last name. *M Activate the MemorySwap feature. RemoteAccess attempts to swap itself and all the memory it occupies to XMS and EMS memory (if available) or to disk, leaving only 3KB resident. This is ideal when running memory-hungry programs but takes a few seconds longer in order to perform the swap. If the swap cannot be accomplished, RemoteAccess will attempt to load the program in a normal shell. NOTE: Some programs cause memory fragmentation to occur and will not work with MemorySwap. Some programs compiled in QuickBASIC, in particular have exhibited this problem. *N The current node number, as specified by the -N command line parameter when RemoteAccess was loaded. *Oxxx Override the BPS rate value passed on to the called program with xxx (for example, a locked BPS rate). *P Communications port being used (1 - 8). *R User's record number in the user file. *S<filename> Generates a custom exit file using the template filename <filename>.RAT which must be located in the system directory. This file contains any valid text file control codes (macros) as outlined in the External Support Files chapter of this manual. The file <filename> is the base filename. That is to say that when RemoteAccess reads the template file it looks for <base filename>.RAT. When it writes the custom exit file created by this template, it writes the base filename - 139 - without a filename extension. It places the newly-created exit file in the directory where the EXITINFO.BBS exit file is stored. For example, if you specify a base filename of MYEXIT, RemoteAccess looks for the file MYEXIT.RAT in the system directory. When the custom exit file is written, RemoteAccess writes MYEXIT in the same directory where the EXITINFO.BBS file is stored. *T Time remaining (in minutes) for the current call. *U<activity> When menu function type 52-"Who's On-line" list is executed, RemoteAccess reports the status of each user that is logged on. If the user is running a program that was executed using types 7 or 15, the activity reported in the Status field is simply Door. This parameter allows you to define the activity that is to be displayed in the Status field. The text specified as <activity> must be 1 to 10 characters in length. {+} Registered only. *! Freeze the system timer for the duration of the shell. Useful for running external utilities like full-screen chat programs, or other programs where you do not want the user's time to decrement while in the shell. *# Turn off the Wants Chat indicator on return from the shell. This is to facilitate proper installation of external chat programs. *0 (zero) The full path to the currently selected file template area. *1 The number of the currently selected template message area. In addition to the command-line information that can be passed, RemoteAccess also creates three data files before the shell. These data files are called exit files which are sometimes referred to as drop files. DORINFO1.DEF, which is a RBBS-compatible file, DOOR.SYS (52-line format) and EXITINFO.BBS, which contains an extremely comprehensive amount of system and user information, are created whenever a menu function type 7 or 15 is executed. It should also be noted that all system files are written to and closed off before the shell is activated. They are then reopened and scanned upon return from the shell. This means that programs that modify system files (eg: USERS.BBS) can be run - 140 - safely in a type 7 shell. RemoteAccess also supports Doorway's DOOR.SYS parameter file directly. Note that the external program must do its own time limit and carrier detect monitoring in the event that the user does not exit from the program correctly. Examples: C:\RA\MAILSCAN.EXE *R *P *T Executes the external program MAILSCAN.EXE located in the C:\RA directory, and passes the user's record number (*R), communications port (*P) and time remaining for the current call (*T) on the command line. *C /C C:\RA\DOORS\TW2.BAT *N *M Executes the batch file (/C) TW2.BAT using the DOS memory resident command processor (*C), with the node number (*N) being passed to the batch file, and RemoteAccess swapping itself out of memory (*M). C:\RA\READ.EXE *R *UMsg_Read Executes the external program READ.EXE located in the C:\RA directory. Passes the user's record number (*R) on the command line. Also, when menu function type 52 is executed, RemoteAccess will display Msg_Read in the Status field. Example of *S (create exit file): By using the *S parameter, it is possible to generate a custom exit file, which in turn makes it possible for RemoteAccess to run almost any door program written for another BBS software package. The custom exit file may contain any valid text file control codes. An example of one such exit file might be: ^FA ^F3 ^FB ^FX ^KO ^KW This example would create an exit file with the following information: Full user name Handle Location - 141 - ANSI graphics setting Minutes remaining today Line number NOTE: Remember, the caret character "^" indicates that the CTRL key should be held down while the next key is pressed. For instance, to enter ^FA you should press the CTRL and "F" keys together and then the "A" key by itself. Exit File Formats The exit files created by menu function types 7 and 15 are described as follows: Filename: DORINFO1.DEF Description: A standard exit file created in the current (node) directory. This is a standard ASCII text file and has the following format: Line 1: System name Line 2: Sysop first name Line 3: Sysop last name Line 4: Communications port in use (COM0 if local) Line 5: Communications port settings: BPS rate,parity,data bits,stop bits The BPS rate is specified as 0 during local sessions and is followed by the word BAUD. During error- free connects, the word BAUD is followed by -R. The parity setting is always set to N for no parity. The data bits are always set to 8 and the stop bits are always set to 1. Line 6: Reserved (always zero) Line 7: User first name Line 8: User last name Line 9: User location Line 10: User emulation (0=ASCII, 1=ANSI, 2=AVATAR) Line 11: User security level Line 12: User time remaining (in minutes) Example DORINFO1.DEF: REMOTE ACCESS CENTRAL ANDREW MILNER COM1 19200 BAUD-R,N,8,1 0 JOHN PARLIN BROOKLYN CENTER, MN, USA 1 - 142 - 100 60 Filename: DOOR.SYS Description: A standard exit file created in the current (node) directory. This is a standard ASCII text file used by many external programs. Although this exit file is extremely detailed and includes information that cannot be generated by every BBS type, efforts were made to include as much information as possible. The format RemoteAccess uses for this file is as follows: Line 1: Communications port (COM0: if local) Line 2: BPS rate Line 3: Data bits Line 4: Node number Line 5: DTE rate (locked rate) Line 6: Screen display (snoop) (Y=On N=Off) Line 7: Printer toggle (Y=On N=Off) Line 8: Page bell (Y=On N=Off) Line 9: Caller alarm (Y=On N=Off) Line 10: User full name Line 11: User location Line 12: Home/voice telephone number Line 13: Work/data telephone number Line 14: Password (not displayed) Line 15: Security level Line 16: User's total number of calls to the system Line 17: User's last call date Line 18: Seconds remaining this call Line 19: Minutes remaining this call Line 20: Graphics mode (GR=ANSI, NG=ASCII) Line 21: Screen length Line 22: User mode (always set to N) Line 23: Always blank Line 24: Always blank Line 25: Subscription exiration date Line 26: User's record number Line 27: Default protocol Line 28: User's total number of uploads Line 29: User's total number of downloads Line 30: User's daily download kilobytes total Line 31: Daily download kilobyte limit Line 32: User's date of birth Line 33: Path to the user database files Line 34: Path to the message database files Line 35: Sysop full name Line 36: User's handle (alias) Line 37: Next event starting time Line 38: Error-free connection (Y=Yes N=No) - 143 - Line 39: Always set to N Line 40: Always set to Y Line 41: Text color as defined in RACONFIG Line 42: Always set to 0 Line 43: Last new files scan date Line 44: Time of this call Line 45: Time of last call Line 46: Always set to 32768 Line 47: Number of files downloaded today Line 48: Total kilobytes uploaded Line 49: Total kilobytes downloaded Line 50: Comment stored in user record Line 51: Always set to 0 Line 52: Total number of messages posted Example DOOR.SYS: COM1: 9600 8 1 19200 Y N N Y John Parlin Brooklyn Center, MN, USA 012-345-6789 012-345-9876 100 379 04-19-93 18780 313 GR 24 N 12-31-93 0 Z 3 7 0 8192 03-25-60 \RA\MSGBASE\ \RA\MSGBASE\ Andrew Milner Andrew Milner 01:55 Y - 144 - N Y 7 0 04-19-93 14:37 07:30 32768 0 396 580 Regular user 0 296 Type: 8 Product information ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function displays the RemoteAccess product information including the version number, copyright information and licensing information. If a user is on-line remotely, the name and version of the communications driver in use is also displayed. Type: 9 Terminate the session ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function displays the GOODBYE.?? text file from the text file directory and hangs up on the user by dropping the DTR signal to the modem. To this end, make sure your modem's DTR line is not forced high continuously. Type: 10 System usage graph ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: - 145 - None Description: This displays a nicely-formatted, full- screen, auto-scaling graph that depicts system usage in terms of percentage of use per hour. Each node keeps a separate system usage graph so you can see how busy each individual node is. To reset this graph, delete the file TIMELOG.BBS from your system directory or, if you are running multi-node, from each node directory. Type: 11 Page System Operator for chat ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/P=alt page name] [paging string] Description: This function displays the text specified as [paging string] (i.e. Paging the Sysop. Please wait...) to the user and pages the Sysop for a chat by playing a paging tune on the local console. If [paging string] is left blank, no message is displayed to the user prior to the page. A user-definable prompt may be displayed, prompting the user to enter a reason for requesting the chat if the Ask why option has been enabled in RACONFIG: Options > Paging > Ask why After the user has entered a reason for requesting the chat, RemoteAccess checks the paging schedule to see if paging is allowed at the current time. While the paging tune is being played, a small menu will be presented to the Sysop on the local console. From this menu, the Sysop may select "C" to chat with the user, or "A" to abort the page. The Sysop may break in for a chat with a user at any other time by pressing ALT-C. During a chat, the system timer is frozen, if specified in RACONFIG: Options > Paging > Suspend The timer is re-started when the chat is terminated. This prevents the user's time remaining from decrementing while chatting with the Sysop. The Sysop may terminate chat mode - 146 - at any time by pressing the <ESCAPE> key. While in chat mode, the Sysop may open a capture file to record all that is typed during the chat session, by pressing CTRL-A. Pressing CTRL-A a second time closes the capture file. A capture file can be opened automatically each time chat mode is entered if the Auto log option is enabled in RACONFIG: Options > Paging > Auto Log The times at which a user is allowed to page the Sysop for a chat as well as the number of times a user may page the Sysop during one session are controlled in RACONFIG: Options > Paging ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Here's a Tip! │ │ │ │ You can disable any sounds produced by RemoteAccess when│ │ a user pages you. Simply activate the SCROLL LOCK key │ │ to disable paging sounds. Paging functions operate │ │ normally, except that no sounds are produced while │ │ SCROLL LOCK is activated. │ └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ You can override the times at which users can page by pressing A-O while a user is on-line. When a page goes unanswered, users are prompted whether to leave a message to the Sysop. If the user elects to do so, the reason for chat entered prior to the page is automatically inserted into the subject field of the message. The default paging tune is a constant beep- beep tone that lasts for the defined duration of the page. You may define your own page tune by creating a text file called PAGE.RA in the system directory. The following keywords are valid within the PAGE.RA text file: TONE [hz] [1/100's second] WAIT [1/100's second] Additionally, you can use an alternate page file instead of PAGE.RA by specifying the [/P=page file] parameter. This makes it possible to allow users with different security levels to have different sounding page tunes. The following table lists six musical octaves. The correct frequency value associated with each note in an octave is - 147 - also shown. O C T A V E Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 C 45 134 268 536 1071 2145 C# 71 142 284 568 1136 2273 F D 75 150 301 602 1204 2408 R D# 80 159 319 638 1275 2551 E E 84 169 338 676 1351 2703 Q F 90 179 358 716 1432 2864 U F# 95 190 379 758 1517 3034 E G 100 201 402 804 1607 3215 N G# 106 213 426 851 1703 3406 C A 113 225 451 902 1804 3608 Y A# 119 239 478 956 1991 3823 B 127 253 506 1012 2035 4050 The RemoteAccess distribution package includes a sample PAGE.RA. So if you're musically inclined, feel free to edit the sample file or, delete it if you'd prefer the default beep-beep tune. Examples: Menu Type: 11 Optional Data: Paging... Please wait... In this example, the text Paging... Please wait... is displayed to the user. The default PAGE.RA file will be played, if it exists. If it does not exist, a default beep-beep tune will be played. Menu Type: 11 Optional Data: /P=MYPAGE Paging Sysop In this example, the text Paging Sysop is displayed to the user. Also, the page file MYPAGE.RA will be played instead of PAGE.RA. NOTE: It is important to note that if an alternate page tune file is specified, it should be the first parameter specified in the optional data field. Type: 12 Questionnaire ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <1-8 character filename> [/N] Description: - 148 - This function executes a questionnaire script file. The file <filename> is the base filename of the questionnaire file. That is to say that the filename extension should not be specified in the optional data field. The actual DOS filename of a questionnaire must have an extension of .Q-A and must reside in the directory specified in RACONFIG: Manager > Languages > Ques path Any information that is written to disk from within the questionnaire is stored in an answer file which is given the name <filename>.ASW. Unlike the questionnaire file, answer files are stored in the RemoteAccess system directory. There is a full chapter dedicated to questionnaires later in this manual which includes: * Complete script language definitions. * Details on questionnaire (.Q-A) and answer (.ASW) files. * Information on automatic questionnaires. * Sample questionnaire scripts. Normally, the execution of a questionnaire is recorded in the system log. However, placing the /N parameter after the questionnaire filename in the optional data field will suppress this log entry. Type: 13 User listing ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/G[=group]] [/H] Description: Displays a list of users in the user file. It lists the user's name, location, file ratio, and the last time the user logged-on to the system. This function has some basic pattern matching capabilities on the name field. By default, all users are listed. However, if /G is specified in the optional data field, the user will only see users who are in the same group. Note that this restriction does not apply to the Sysop who is always shown a complete user listing. Additionally, if the /G parameter includes a group assignment (/G=group) the user will only see users who are in the group number specified. - 149 - If /H is specified in the optional data field, user handles will be displayed in place of user names. If the user handle field is blank, the real name is displayed. The /G and /H options may be used at the same time to produce a group user listing by handle. Example: Optional data: /G /H Lists users in the same group as the current user and displays user handles instead of user names. Optional data: /G=1 Lists users in group one. Optional data: None Lists all users in the user database. Type: 14 Time ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function displays the current date and time, along with the user's daily time limit, time used and time remaining for the day. Type: 15 Exit to DOS with errorlevel ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <errorlevel> [*A] [*D] Description: This function causes RemoteAccess to exit to DOS completely, returning an errorlevel to your BBS batch file. The optional data field should contain the errorlevel that you wish to pass to the batch file. The batch file should trap the errorlevel and act accordingly. - 150 - If you use this exit while the user is still on- line, the user may be logged back into RemoteAccess using the command line parameter -R. This forces RemoteAccess to read the EXITINFO.BBS file that was written at the time of the exit so that it can restore system and user information, presenting the user with the TOP menu. NOTE: Errorlevels 0 through 5 are reserved for internal use by RemoteAccess. For a complete description of these internal errorlevels and how they are used, see the Errorlevels section of the Reference chapter. There are two optional control code parameters that may be specified in the optional data field: *A Write the user's handle (alias) in the DORINFO1.DEF exit file, instead of the user's real name. *D Forces RemoteAccess to generate the old-style DORINFO1.DEF exit file. This format does not include the -R parameter in the baudrate field which is normally used to indicate an error-free connection. Type: 16 Alter location ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function allows users to change the location field in their user account record. Type: 17 Alter password ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: Allows users to change their log-on password. Before users may change their passwords, they are first prompted to re- enter their current password for verficiation. Frequent password changes should be encouraged to ensure system - 151 - security. In fact, there is an option to force users to change their passwords every certain number of log-ons, in RACONFIG: Options > System > Pwd Change Type: 18 Alter screen length ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: Allows users to alter the length of their screen display. This affects the page pausing prompt (i.e. Continue?) in that this prompt will appear every <screen length> number of lines during textual displays. Type: 19 Toggle screen clearing ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: Allows users to specify whether screen clearing codes should be sent. Type: 20 Toggle page pausing ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: Allows users to enable or disable the page pausing prompt (i.e. Continue?) at the end of each screen page (as defined by the their screen length setting). Type: 21 Toggle ANSI graphics ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── - 152 - Optional data: None Description: Allows users to enable or disable ANSI graphics emulation. NOTE: If a user disables ANSI graphics and has the full-screen editor enabled, RemoteAccess will display a message stating that ANSI graphics are required by the full-screen editor. The user will then be asked whether to continue to use the full-screen editor. Although the full-screen message reader also uses ANSI and AVATAR control codes, it must be disabled manually if it is enabled when ANSI graphics are disabled. Type: 22 Check mailbox for unread mail ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function checks to see if there is any unread mail addressed to the user. This can be done automatically during the logon process when defined in RACONFIG: Options > Messages > Logon Newmail Refer to the Configuration chapter for details on the two types of mail-checks that are available. All new messages are marked for later retrieval using the Read Marked option (see menu function type 23). NOTE: The user will only be notified of unread mail in areas to which the user has read access, as defined in RACONFIG: Manager > Msg areas Although the system only prompts the user to Read mail now [Yes/no], (this can be changed using the language editor which is explained in the Configuration chapter), several commands can actually be used: Read - 153 - Read the unread mail that has been found during the mail-check. Scan Scan the unread mail displaying a header description which includes Date, To, From and Subject fields. QuickScan Scan the unread mail displaying a brief listing of information including the From and Subject fields of each message. Kill Delete all unread mail without reading it. Received Mark all unread mail as received, without reading it. Type: 23 Read messages ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <message area # or /M> Description: This command initiates the message reading routines. Before a user can read any message, RemoteAccess checks that the user has read access to the selected area. The <message area #> variable defines which message area number will be read. If a value of zero (0) is passed as <message area #> RemoteAccess will use the user's Combined settings to read messages in all areas that the user has configured. This mode enables users to read messages by order of message area until the messages in the user's combined settings are exhausted. For more information, see menu function type 28-Select combined areas and the Configuration chapter and RACONFIG: Manager > Combined If a /M is placed in the optional data field in place of the message area number, RemoteAccess will substitute it with the currently selected template message area (see the Templates section earlier in this chapter for details). - 154 - After selecting this function, the user may select from eight different reading modes: Forward Read forward from the selected message number to the last message in the area. Reverse Read reverse from the selected message number to the first message in the area. Individual Read an individual message. The user is prompted for the message number to read. Help Displays the text file MAILHELP.A?? to the user, if it exists (see the External Support Files chapter for details on this text file). New msgs Read new mail since the last time the user called. Selected Read messages by selected search criteria on the To, From or Subject fields. This selection also allows you to read messages which contain a specific keyword within the message text. Quit Abort the message reading menu. The menu bar displayed at the end of each message also provides several options. Each of these options are explained below: - Read previous reply. RemoteAccess keeps track of reply chains which are strings of messages that pertain to the same subject. These messages are invisibly linked so that the user may read only those messages pertaining to a specific subject, quickly and easily. The - and + keys are used in conjunction with this feature. + Read next reply. Used in conjunction with the - key, this command allows the user to read the next message in - 155 - this reply chain. See the explanation of the - key for complete details. A Redisplays the last message. This option is typically used in cases where the user may be experiencing telephone line noise. N Reads the next message in progression. When the end of progression is reached, the message End of messages is displayed to the user. L Reads the previous message read. This option is only available when there is a message available for reading in reverse order. R Post a reply to the message just read. This option is identical to menu function type 27 -"Post message" with two exceptions; the "To" field of the new message is automatically filled with the name contained in the "From" field of the message being replied to and; the "Subject" field of the new message takes on the same value as that of the message being replied to. The user is given the opportunity to change the "Subject" field during message entry. Upon saving the reply, the message is linked to the message thread pertaining to the thread subject. If the + command was not previously available to the user, it is after this option is used. E Enter a new message in the current area. Like the <ENTER> command, this option is identical to menu fuction 27 except that the To and Subject fields are not automatically provided. F Download files that are attached to the message. If files have been attached to the message by the sender, this command will be seen by the reciever of the message. The user will also be notified of the attached files after the message header is displayed. D Delete the displayed message. Like menu function type 26-"Delete message", this option allows the user to delete the message just read if certain criteria are met. Be sure to see the description of menu function type 26, where this powerful option is discussed in detail. S Stop reading messages. The user is returned to the point where the read function was initiated. In addition to those just outlined, the following options are available only to users who have Sysop access to the - 156 - message area being processed: ! Display ^A kludge lines which are normally hidden. These lines contain message control information. This is advanced information which is used by developers of message processing utilities. * Edit the attributes of the current message. This option allows you to change a number of attributes related to the message that has just been read: Area no Message area number. Use this option to move the message to another message area. From Change the From field of the message. To Change the To field of the message. Subject Change the Subject field of the message. Attributes Allows you to toggle certain attributes, or flags related to the message such as Deleted, NetMail, Private, Received and Local Flags. Exported If the message is an EchoMail message, this determines if the message has been exported. This is handy if you need messages to be exported a second time (i.e. a problem with a mail processor occurs). X Export the message to a file or to the printer. This option allows you to capture a message to a DOS filename or to a connected printer. If printer is selected, the message is output to the DOS standard device PRN. / Forward the message to another user in any area. When this command is executed, you will be prompted for the message area to forward the message in as well as other address information. If forwarding to a NetMail area, RemoteAccess prompts for a destination network address in addition to other header information. = Mark the message as unreceived and go on to the next message in progression. This is a great option for Sysops who wish to save a message for later reading. The message is marked as unreceived and will again be presented as a new message the next time a mail-check is done. - 157 - U Modify the security level of the user who posted the currently displayed message, provided the user is listed in the user file. This is another handy feature designed to make the Sysop's life easier and is great for on the fly user verification. When selected, this command searches the user file for the name of the sender of the message. If the name is found, the Sysop is prompted for the new security level to assign to the sender. {+} Registered only. NOTE: The user's security level being upgraded cannot be set to a level greater than that of the user doing the upgrading. Type: 24 Scan messages ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <message area # or /M> Description: This function accepts the same parameter variables as menu function type 23 just explained, except that only the message header of each message is displayed. The user has the option of marking messages for later retrieval. Messages are retrieved simply by using the read message menu function type 23 and then selecting Marked messages. Type: 25 QuickScan messages ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <message area # or /M> Description: This function accepts the same parameter variables as menu function type 23 - Read messages, except that each message is listed as a single-line entry containing message number, sender of the message, who it is addressed to, and the subject field. Type: 26 Delete message ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: - 158 - </M or message area #> Description: Allows a user to delete a message in the currently selected message area (when /M is specified) or in <message area#>, when the following criteria are met: * The user has Sysop access to the area the message is in, or... * The message is in a Local or NetMail area and the user is the sender or recipient of the message and the message area is configured to allow users to delete messages, or... * The message is in an EchoMail message area and the user is the sender of the message and the message area is configured to allow users to delete messages and the message has not yet been exported from the message-base. Type: 27 Post message ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <area number or /M> [/T=<user_name>] [/U] [/H] [/L] [/N=zone:net/node.point] Description: This function posts a message in message area number <area number> (or the currently selected template message area if /M is specified). The user must have either write or Sysop access to the message area as defined in RACONFIG. Specifying a message area number of zero forces RemoteAccess to display all message areas that the user has write access to and will prompt the user for the message area to post the message in. Normally, users are not permitted to post messages to non-existent users in a local message area. However if the /U parameter is specified, this restriction can be overridden, giving the user the opportunity to browse the user list. To force the display handles only option while displaying the user list in conjunction with the /U parameter, simply include the /H parameter in the optional data field. - 159 - The optional /L parameter will log the user off immediately after the message is saved (useful for menu options such as Leave message to Sysop before disconnecting?). The /T= parameter will force the message to be addressed to a <user_name>. Simply place the user's name in the optional data field after the /T= parameter to select this option. You should note that any spaces in <user_name> must be replaced with the underscore character. The optional /N parameter will force the message to be directed to the network address specified as <zone:net/node.point> if the message is posted in a NetMail message area. {+} Registered only. Users having access to the Group Mail feature may use any of the following macros in the To: field of a message: To Field Action Description -------- ------------------ @group Post message to all users in group <group> @ALL Post message to all users =security Post message to all users with security level equal to <security> >security Post message to all users with security level greater than <security> <security Post message to all users with security level less than <security> A separately addressed message is generated for each qualifying user. Therefore, large group mailings can take a while to process and can occupy a large amount of disk space. Example: A log-off menu may have the following entry: Menu Type: 27 Optional data: 60 /L /T=Andrew_Milner In this example, you can see: * The menu function used was specified as a type 27. * The message will be posted in message area number 60. * The user will be logged-off as soon as the message is saved. - 160 - * The message will be posted to Andrew Milner. Notice that there is no space between Andrew and Milner. Instead, there is an underscore _ character. The underscore character must be specified instead of a space. When processed, the underscore character will be translated back into a space character. NOTE: Any messages addressed to Sysop are redirected automatically to the Sysop name as defined in RACONFIG: System > Site info > Name Type: 28 Select combined areas ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/MG or /MG=#####] [/1] Description: Your users may select specific message areas to add to one combined message area. When this function is selected, a list of message areas to which the user has access is displayed. From this list, the user may toggle any of the message areas ON or OFF. Message areas that are toggled ON are added to the user's combined message area. These areas are then saved as a part of the user's permanent record and are available during each log-on session. To allow your users to process combined message areas, use the same menu function types you would on any other message area (read, scan, etc.) but when specifying the message area number in the optional data field, use a zero (0). This will cause RemoteAccess to process the user's combined message area. The optional data parameters accepted by this function are as follows: /1 Displays a singular column list of available areas instead of the default two column list. /MG Displays only message areas in the user's currently selected message group. If the currently selected group is set to zero (in cases where groups have just been implemented), the - 161 - user will first be prompted to select a message group. /MG=0 Displays a list of all groups to which the user has access. The user is then prompted to select areas in the current message group. /MG=<group number> Displays a list of all message areas in group <group number> to which the user has access. The user is then prompted to select an area from this group. NOTE: It is possible to define a default selection of combined message areas for new users in RACONFIG: Manager > Combined Type: 29 Move a file ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: </F or file area#> Description: Primarily designed as a Sysop or Assistant Sysop function, this allows the user to perform a variety of functions on any given file. The file area number must be specified in the optional data field as either <file area#> or /F (to use the currently selected template file area. When this function is executed, RemoteAccess prompts for the filename to move/copy. Wildcard and search pattern matching characters (* and ?) are valid. After a valid filename is entered (one that exists both in the directory for the specified file area as well in the file database), the user is presented with the following six options: Move When this option is selected, the user is presented with a list of file areas (to which the user has access) to move the file to. After selecting an area, the file (along with its description) is moved to the directory for the target file area and the file database is updated accordingly. - 162 - Copy When this option is selected, the user is presented with a list of file areas (to which the user has access) to copy the file to. After selecting an area, the file (along with its description) is copied to the directory of the target file area. The file database information is updated accordingly, saving the file information in both the source and target file areas. Delete When this option is selected, the file is deleted from both the directory of the specified file area as well as the file database. Edit Description When this option is specified the user is prompted to enter a new file description. The file database is updated accordingly. Skip When this option is selected, the file is skipped (not processed) and RemoteAccess continues searching for files that match the input search pattern. Quit When this option is selected, this function is aborted returning the user to the calling menu. Example: Optional data: /F File to move/copy (wildcards valid): TEST.TXT TEST.TXT (M)ove, (C)opy, (D)elete, (E)dit desc, (S)kip, (Q)uit: _ Type: 30 Directory ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: </F or file area#> Description: - 163 - Displays an MS-DOS style directory listing of the directory path for the currently selected template file area (if /F is specified), or file area <file area#>. This listing includes filename, length and date of each entry. The user will be prompted for optional search pattern matching. Wildcard characters * ? are accepted within the search pattern. Example: To list the directory using a search pattern match of *.BBS: File name pattern match (Enter=all files): *BBS File Name Size Date ------------------- -------------------- ----------------- FILES.BBS 3599 01-06-93 ------------------- -------------------- ----------------- 1 files 3599 bytes Type: 31 List files ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: </F or file area#> [/T] [/A=<format>] Description: This option displays a list of files available for download from the currently selected file area (if /F is specified) or from file area <file area#>. If the /T parameter is specified, users are permitted to tag files for download during the listing process. The format in which files are listed may be altered using RACONFIG: Options > Files > List Format Refer to the Configuration chapter for full details on the List Format option. The optional /A parameter can be used to override the List Format setting. Example: /F /T /A=@NE@DF This would list files in the current area with tagging enabled, and using the file list - 164 - format shown. Type: 32 Download a file from area ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: </F or file area#> [password] Description: Enables the user to download any file that is contained in the currently selected template file area (when /F is specified) or in file area <file area#>. If files have been tagged for download, the tag list is presented to the user. The user is given the opportunity to add to the list of tagged files, delete files from the tag list, clear all tag list entries, or continue with the download. The file must exist in the file area download directory and must also be listed in the file database. If [password] is specified, the user will be prompted to enter a non-case-sensitive password before being allowed to proceed with the download. RemoteAccess supports local downloading. This enables the Sysop or another local user to download or copy files from the current file area to another system directory. For example, this can be used to copy files to a diskette or a network directory. When this option is used, the Downloads and DownloadK fields in the on-line user's profile are updated accordingly. In other words, it counts as an actual download. See menu function type 59-"Global download" for a more powerful variation of this function. Type: 33 Upload a file ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: </F | file area# | /FG> Description: This function enables the user to upload (send) a file to - 165 - your system. The upload is initially directed to the currently selected tempate file area (if /F is specified) or to file area <file area#>. However, the file may be redirected further based on the settings specified in the file area configuration. For example, all file areas may be configured to redirect uploads to a specific file area. If the /FG parameter is specified, duplicate file checking will be limited to the currently selected file group. This parameter can be used together with either the /F or <file area#> parameters. Upon successful completion of an upload, the user is prompted to enter a description of the uploaded file. Long descriptions may be allowed in each individual file area configuration. Additionally, new uploads may be scanned for integrity or the presence of a computer virus using an external program as configured in RACONFIG: Options > Files > Upload scan For complete details on file area configuration, see the Configuration chapter. RemoteAccess supports local uploading which enables the Sysop or another local user to upload files from a diskette or other directory directly to the BBS as if the file had been sent from a remote location. When this option is used, the Uploads and UploadK fields in the user's profile are updated accordingly. In other words, it counts as an actual upload. Type: 34 View archive ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: </F or file area#> Description: Allows users to view the contents of an archived file in the currently selected file area (when /F is specified) or in <file area#>. The following archive types are supported: .ARC / .PAC / .PKA .ZIP .LZH / .LZS .DWC .MD - 166 - .LBR .ARJ .HYP .GIF {+} Registered only. If the file being viewed is a .GIF file, RemoteAccess displays the graphics and color resolution of the file. Type: 35 File search by keyword ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/F or area1 area2 area3... or /FG] [/T] [/Q] Description: This function searches the specified file areas for an embedded keyword that is supplied by the user. Search pattern matching is performed on both the filenames and descriptions. If more than one search keyword is supplied, both must be present for a match to be found. The default is to scan all areas to which the user has access. However, you may specify that only certain areas will be searched by either including one or more file area numbers in the optional data field, or by specifying the /F parameter which limits the search to the currently selected file area. You may also limit the search to file areas within the currently selected file group by specifying the /FG parameter. If the /T parameter is specified, file tagging is offered during the search process. If the /Q parameter is specified, it must be the last parameter in the optional data field. This option causes the search to use the 5 keywords in the file header record rather than the description text. This type of search is much faster than the description search (which is the default), but has two drawbacks; 1) you must maintain the keywords for each file separately and; 2) only exact (not partial) keyword matches will be found. Type: 36 File search by filename ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/F or area1 area2 area3... or /FG] [/T] - 167 - Description: Like menu function type 35, except that this function searches for a filename match rather than an embedded keyword. Wilcard and pattern matching characters (* and ?) are also valid. The default is to scan all areas to which the user has access. However, you may specify that only certain areas will be searched by either specifying one or more file area numbers in the optional data field or by specifying the /F parameter which limits the search to the currently selected file area. You may also limit the search to file areas within the currently selected file group by specifying the /FG parameter. If the /T parameter is specified, file tagging is offered during the search process. Type: 37 Show new files ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/F or area1 area2 area3... or /FG] [/T] Description: If no optional data is specified, this function scans all file areas to which the user has access for files that have an upload date more recent than the date specified by the user. By default, this search includes files that are new since the user's last log-on. Although the default is to scan all areas to which the user has access, you may limit the areas to be scanned by either specifying one or more file area numbers in the optional data field or by specifying the /F parameter which limits the search to the currently selected file area. You may also limit the search to file areas within the currently selected file group by specifying the /FG parameter. If the /T parameter is specified, the user may use file tagging from within the new files listing. Example: Optional data: 1 2 3 /T Searches for new files in file areas 1, 2 and 3 and also offers file tagging during the process. - 168 - Optional data: /FG /T Searches for new files in all file areas within the currently selected file group to which the user has access. File tagging is offered during the listing process. Optional data: /F Searches for new files in only the currently selected file area. Type: 38 Type (view) a text file ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: </F or file area#> Description: Allows the user to display the contents of a plain ASCII / ANSI / AVATAR text file. RemoteAccess searches for the file in either the currently selected template file area (when /F is specified) or in the area specified as <file area#>. Type: 39 Display a fully named text file ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <filename [/A=area#]> Description: This function displays a direct text file using one of the two following methods: Method One: By specifying full path and filenames of the text files to be displayed. Method Two: By specifying filenames followed by the /A=area# parameter. Using this method, the file is displayed from the directory path configured for file area area#. NOTES: 1. No security checking is done on the file area before the file is displayed. - 169 - 2. Text file control codes (outlined in the chapter on External Support Files) are valid within a direct text file. Type: 40 Display .A?? file with hot-keys ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <1-8 character filename> [/BINARY] Description: This menu type will display a text file from your text file directory (as defined in RACONFIG) to the user, leaving hot-keys active while the file is being displayed. Any command hot-key defined in the calling menu that the user has access to will be considered a valid hot-key. If a valid hot- key is pressed, the associated menu function will be executed immediately. This allows the use of elaborate, graphic menus that would be impossible to create with the line editor. See the section on Automatic Commands earlier in this chapter for more information on this type of menu use. RemoteAccess will display the file specified in the optional data field using one of three filename extensions. If the user has AVATAR codes enabled, RemoteAccess will display the file <filename.AVT> to the user. However, if <filename.AVT> is missing, or the user does not have AVATAR enabled but does have ANSI enabled, the file <filename.ANS> will be displayed. Likewise, if the user has only ASCII emulation enabled or both the files <filename.AVT> and <filename.ANS> are missing, the file <filename.ASC will be displayed. These files may contain any text or graphical information within the limitations of the text format. For example, you cannot display ANSI color in an ASCII text file. Along with text and graphics it is also possible to display comprehensive system and user details by inserting special control codes in these files. These codes are listed in the External Support Files chapter of this manual. If the optional /BINARY parameter is specified, the file will be transmitted with no translation at all. For example, embedded control codes will not be interpreted when this parameter is specified. If you use this paramter, it - 170 - must be the last parameter in the optional data field. Type: 41 Toggle full-screen editor ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None This function toggles the state of the user's full-screen editor setting between ON and OFF. Use of the editor should only be permitted if the user has ANSI graphics emulation capability, but RemoteAccess gives the user the opportunity to disable ANSI graphics while leaving the full-screen editor enabled. This may help users who disable ANSI to increase throughput speed but still prefer to use the full-screen editor. Type: 42 Toggle hot-keys ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: Allows users to choose between hot-keys or command stacking. In hot-key mode, users need only press a command key associated with a menu item; no <ENTER> key is required. In command stacking mode, several commands, or key-presses, can be entered on one command-line, followed by pressing the <ENTER> key. Type: 43 NewMail {+} Registered only. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/MG or /MG=#####] [/1] Description: This function displays a list of all message areas to which the user has access. Those areas that contain new unread messages are highlighted with an asterisk * character. The optional parameters accepted by this function are as follows: - 171 - /1 Displays a singular column list of available areas instead of the default two column list. /MG Displays only message areas in the user's currently selected message group. If the currently selected group is set to zero (in cases where groups have just been implemented), the user will first be prompted to select a message group. /MG=0 Displays a list of all groups to which the user has access. The user is then prompted to select a message group to list areas for. /MG=<group number> Displays a list of all message areas in group <group number> to which the user has access. The user is then prompted to select an area from this group. Type: 44 Reset combined areas setting ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function allows the user to include or exclude all message areas from his or her combined message area folder. Sometimes, especially on systems with numerous message areas, it may be easier for a user to select combined message areas if they are all turned ON or OFF to begin with. Example: If a user wanted to have all but two areas included in the combined message area folder, it might be easier to select all areas and then use menu function type 28 to deselect the two areas desired. Type: 45 Display text file and wait ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── - 172 - Optional data: <1-8 character filename> Description: This is identical to menu function type 5 except that the user is prompted to press <ENTER> before continuing. This is useful for displaying text files that are generated automatically by utilities that don't append a ^A (wait for <ENTER> control code) at the end of the file. See menu function type 5 for more information. Type: 46 Display direct text file with CR ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <filename [/A=area#]> Description: This function is identical to menu function type 39 except that the user is prompted to press <ENTER> before continuing. This displays a direct text file using one of the two following methods: Method One: By specifying a full path and filename of the text file to be displayed. Method Two: By specifying a filename followed by the /A=area# parameter. Using this method, the file is displayed from the directory path configured for file area area#. NOTES: 1. No security checking is done on the file area before the file is displayed. 2. Text file control codes (outlined in the chapter on External Support Files) are valid within a direct text file. Type: 47 Create a log entry ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: - 173 - <log entry> Description: When this function is executed, it simply takes the text specified in the optional data field and writes it to the system log as if it were a normal hard-coded log entry. Macro characters that are valid within <log entry> are: @ Insert the name of the current template file area ` Insert the name of the current template message area. Remember, this is the accent character, not the apostrophe character. In addition to these two macros, all text file control codes are also supported within <log entry>. Example: If Joe User just logged on using a handle of Joe Doe and the optional data field was defined as follows: Optional data: ^FA logged-on as ^F3 The resulting log entry would be: > 21:30:00 Joe User logged on as Joe Doe Type: 48 Download a specific file ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <FILE1.EXT FILE2.EXT FILE3.EXT...> [/FREE] or... <FILE1.EXT FILE2.EXT [/A=area#]> [/FREE] Description: This function enables the user to download a file or set of files that you have pre- defined, using a protocol of the user's choice. This is done using one of the two following methods: Method One: Specify one or more files including the full path and filenames of each. Wildcard and pattern matching characters * ? are valid. - 174 - Method Two: Specify one or more files followed by the optional /A=area# parameter. When using this method, the filenames do not require a full path and filename to be specified since the files are downloaded from the directory for the file area specified by the /A parameter. This latter method must be used if you want the file download counter and last date downloaded fields to be updated when this function is executed. NOTE: When specifying wildcard and pattern match characters in the filename, the user will be forced to use a batch transfer protocol. Examples: The two examples that follow demonstrate each of the methods just described: Optional data: \DLOAD\ALLFILES.ARJ \RA\MYNODE.TXT Would send the file ALLFILES.ARJ from the \DLOAD directory and the MYNODE.TXT file from the \RA directory (method one). Optional data: RA*.ARJ /A=10 Would send all files in the directory for file area 10 that match the search pattern RA*.ARJ using a batch transfer protocol (method two). Type: 49 Select message area ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/MG or /MG=#####] [/1] Description: This function allows users to select a new message area. If no optional parameters are specified, a list of message areas to which the user has access is displayed. The optional parameters that may be specified are as follows: - 175 - /1 Displays a singular column list of available areas instead of the default two column list. /MG Displays only message areas in the user's currently selected message group. If the currently selected group is set to zero (in cases where groups have just been implemented), the user will first be prompted to select a message group. /MG=0 Displays a list of all groups to which the user has access. The user is then prompted to select a message area from the currently selected message group. /MG=<group number> Displays a list of all message areas in group <group number> to which the user has access. The user is then prompted to select an area from this group. The currently selected template message area is set to the area number that the user selects. If applicable, the user's currently selected message group number is set to the group number selected. This allows the Sysop to run a very low maintenance system, since all that is required to add or delete a message area is to modify the message area configuration using RACONFIG. Example: Suppose the user selects this function and has read access to the following message areas: Message Areas: ---------- 1 Messages to the Operator 2 General Messages 3 Private Messages (E-Mail) 4 DeskTop Publishing Select area: _ If the user selected message area 1, the currently selected template message area would be set to 1. Then, any menu function that refers to the /M template variable will take on a value of 1. This eliminates ever having to set the value of the /M template variable manually from within a menu. - 176 - Type: 50 Select file area ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/FG or /FG=#####] [/1] Description: Similar to the type 49 function for message areas, this function allows the user to select a new file area. If no optional parameters are specified, a list of file areas to which the user has access is displayed. The optional parameters that may be specified are as follows: /1 Displays a singular column list of available areas instead of the default two column list. /FG Displays only file areas in the user's currently selected file group. If the user's currently selected group is set to zero (in cases where groups have just been implemented), the user will first be prompted to select a file group. /FG=0 Displays a list of all file groups to which the user has access. After selecting a group, the user is prompted to select a file area from the currently selected file group. /FG=<group number> Displays a list of all file areas in group <group number> to which the user has access. The user is then prompted to select an area from this group. The currently selected template file area is set to the area number that the user selects. If applicable, the user's currently selected file group number is set to the group number selected. Type: 51 List today's callers ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: - 177 - [/H] Description: This function displays a list of all users who have logged-on to your system since midnight, showing log-on/log-off times, connection speed, what node (line) the user was logged-on to, number of calls placed and the location of the user. If the optional /H parameter is specified, user handles are displayed in place of real names. Type: 52 Show all users on-line ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/H] Description: This function lists all users who are currently on-line. This would only be useful in a multi-node installation. If the optional /H parameter is specified, user handles are displayed in place of real names. Type: 53 Toggle "Do not disturb" ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function is intended for use on multi- node installations where the Sysop has provided access to menu function type 54 - Send an on-line message. It allows the user to toggle the ability to receive on-line messages from other users. Example: Let's say that the user on node 1 selects to send an on-line message to the user on node 2 (i.e. "Joe, I see you're logged on line 2. Let's chat!"). If the user on node 1 has his Do not disturb flag set to OFF, he would receive the message: ***MESSAGE*** from John Doe on node 1: - 178 - "Joe, I see you're logged on line 2. Let's chat" If the user on node 2 had his Do not disturb setting turned ON, the user on node 1 would not have been allowed to enter the on-line message. NOTE: The Sysop has the ability to override Do not disturb settings and may send on-line messages to any user currently on-line. Type: 54 Send an on-line message ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function is intended for use in a multi- node environment and allows users to send one-line messages to other users who are currenty logged-on to other nodes, provided that the receiving user has the Do not disturb flag set to OFF. When executed, this function first displays a list of users who are currently on-line (see menu function type 52-"Show all users on-line") and then prompts the user to enter the line (node) number of the user to send the message to. The sender is allowed to enter a brief (one-line) message. If the sender presses <ENTER> without entering a message, the operation is aborted. Type: 55 Download any file ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This is an extremely powerful function which was designed for use by the Sysop when logging-on remotely. It allows the user to download any file from any valid DOS drive and directory using any of the available file transfer protocols. Having said this, you might see why, if this function is used, it would be better restricted to Sysop use only. - 179 - NOTE: This is the only download function that takes no account of download limits, file ratios or transfer time, and does not update the user record to reflect the download. However, if you would like to make files available to your users without regard to download statistics, this can be accomplished by declaring specific files as Free Files. See the File Database Administration chapter for more information. Type: 56 Browse the nodelist {+} Registered only. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: If you are a member of a mail network, you might find this function useful. It allows users to browse the current nodelist created by RANODE (see the chapter on Mail Networking for more information) and includes functions to list all zones, all nets and regions in a zone, and all nodes in a net or region. Example: When selected, this function displays a summarized list of possible commands, and prompts the user for input: * NODELIST BROWSING * (blank line quits): ? to list all zones z:? to list nets in zone z n/? to list nodes in net n : For each option, RemoteAccess displays a formatted list to the user. NOTE: This function is also built-in to menu function type 27-"Post message" and is available when performing operations on a NetMail message area. Specifically, this function is available when entering a network address. Type: 57 Change home/voice number ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None - 180 - Description: This function allows users to modify their voice telephone number and records the modification in the user's permanent record. Type: 58 Change business/data number ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function allows users to modify their business/data telephone number and records the modification in the user's permanent record. Type: 59 Global download {+} Registered only. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/FG] Description: Allows users to download files in the same manner as menu function type 32-"Download a file from area", except that the user is not confined to one area. This function searches all areas that the user has access to for the requested file(s). All normal time and security restrictions apply. You can use menu function type 59- "Global download" to download files from any area. Normally, users may download only from the currently selected file area. If the /FG parameter is specified, this function will download a file from any area within the user's currently selected file group. NOTE: You might prefer this function over the type 32 download function since it does not require the user to be in the same file area as the files that are to be downloaded. Type: 60 Change handle - 181 - ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: Allows users to select a new handle, or alias. Users are not allowed to choose a name which is in use by another user. This function will also not allow the use of SYSOP or any handle listed in the HANDLES.CTL control file (see the chapter on External Support Files for more information on this control file). Type: 61 Toggle AVATAR ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function toggles the use of AVATAR codes in RemoteAccess and related text files. See the External Support Files chapter for more information on AVATAR text files. Type: 62 Toggle full-screen message viewer ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: Allows users to select between using the full-screen message viewer or the line-by-line message viewer. When set to ON with this function, the full-screen message viewer displays all messages with a fixed header in the upper portion of the display while displaying message text in a page window below the header. The full-screen message viewer utilizies ANSI and AVATAR codes for special screen manipulation. Type: 63 Select a new language ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: - 182 - None Description: This function allows users to change the current language setting. This option is useful if you have more than one language available to your callers. For more information, see the Configuration chapter and RACONFIG: Language > Manager Type: 64 Select a new date format ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function gives the user the ability to change the current date format that RemoteAccess will use each time the user logs-on. The user has a choice of the following date formats (the date used in the examples below is February 12, 1993): Format Example ─────────────────────── DD-MM-YY 12-02-93 MM-DD-YY 02-12-93 YY-MM-DD 93-02-12 DD-Mmm-YY 12-Feb-93 Type: 65 Change user flags {+} Registered only. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <flagset><flagnum><action> Description: This function adds even more power and flexibility to RemoteAccess as it allows you to toggle any of the user's access flags settings. The action determines how the flag is to be set. Valid actions are: - Turn the specified flag OFF + Turn the specified flag ON * Toggle the specified flag from its current state to - 183 - the opposite state (i.e. if the flag is ON, toggle it OFF). Example: Optional data: A1+ A2- D8* In the above example, A1 would be set to ON, A2 would be set to OFF and D8 would be toggled. Notice the spaces between each flag specified. Optional data: A1+ In the above example, A1 would be set to OFF. Optional data: B1* In the above example, the user's B1 flag would be toggled to its opposite state. Type: 66 Toggle shells ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: <ON or OFF> Description: Determines the availability of the Shell from text file feature for the current session only. This option overrides the setting in RACONFIG: Options > System > Text Shells See the chapter on External Support Files for more information on the Shell from text file feature. Type: 67 Toggle auto message forwarding ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/U] Description: If a user is not able to log-on for an extended period of time, all messages entered that are addressed to the user may be redirected (forwarded) to another user. When this - 184 - function is selected, the user is prompted for the name of another user to forward mail to. This name must be a valid user name contained in the system user list. If the named entered cannot be located in the user list, and the /U parameter is specified in the optional data field, the user will be given the opportunity to view/search the user database and then reselect the user to forward mail to. Example: John Doe is going to be out of town on business for one month. While he is gone, he would like his mail redirected to Suzie Queue. John would simply select this function, entering Suzie's full user name when prompted. Then, all messages created on the system that are addressed to John Doe will be automatically redirected to Suzie Queue. When John returns from his trip, he may cancel the redirection by reselecting this function. A truly handy feature indeed! Type: 68 Create RTC ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: Create a new Real-Time-Conference (RTC). As detailed in the section on RTCs in the chapter on Multi-Node Operation, up to 125 RTCs can be created. Type: 69 Join RTC ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function allows the user to join (enter) an existing Real-Time-Conference (RTC). See the section on RTCs in the Multi-Node Operation chapter later in this manual. Type: 70 Delete RTC ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── - 185 - Optional data: None Description: This function allows the user to delete an existing Real-Time-Conference (RTC). See the section on RTCs in the Multi-Node Operation chapter later in this manual. Type: 71 Edit tag list ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function allows users to edit the current list of files that are tagged for download. When selected, the user is given the choice of deleting files from the tag list or clearing the entire list of tagged files. This function is also offered automatically during the file tagging process. Type: 72 Select default protocol ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function allows the user to select a default file transfer protocol. When this function is executed, a list of supported transfer protocols is displayed and the user is prompted to select a protocol. The protocol selected will become the default If the file XFERPROT.A?? exists, it will be displayed instead of the internal, hard- coded listing. Type: 73 Toggle EchoMail in mail-box scan ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: - 186 - None Description: This function is used to include or exclude EchoMail message areas during a mail-box check. When enabled, EchoMail areas are included during a mail-box check. This is useful to users who do not participate in EchoMail conferences. Type: 74 Change mailing address ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: None Description: This function allows users to change their mailing address that is stored as a part of the user's permanent account record. Up to 3 lines may be entered. Type: 76 Display RIP Icon ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optional data: [/FILE=<filename>] [LABEL=<text>] [/LABELCOL=<cc>] [/HOTKEY=<x>] </X=<x>> </Y=<x>> Description: Display a RIP icon. This can be used to display a RIP icon to the user. There are several parameters that may be used on the optional data field: /FILE=<filename> - Filename of the icon to display. If omitted, a plain button will be drawn. NOTE: Specify the filename only; the RIP path (see above) is automatically added. /LABEL=<Text> Line of text to display with the button. If the button is an icon, the text will be displayed below the image, otherwise the text will be displayed in the centre of the button. UNDERSCORES WILL BE REPLACED WITH SPACES. /LABELCOL=<cc> Colour in which to display the - 187 - button's label. /HOTKEY=<x> Hotkey to simulate when the button is clicked by the user. If no hotkey is specified, the button will not be clickable. /X=<x> X-coordinate at which to display the button. REQUIRED PARAMETER. /Y=<x> Y-coordinate at which to display the button. REQUIRED PARAMETER. Example: Menu type 76 Opt data: /FILE=EMAIL.ICN /X=100 /Y=100 /HOTKEY=M /LABEL=Msg_Menu This would display the icon EMAIL.ICN on the users terminal at coordinates (100,100), with the text "Msg Menu" below it. When clicked, the BBS would act as if the user had pressed the 'M' key. If the button is an icon, this command will automatically check to see if the user already has the icon file, and if necessary, send it automatically. - 188 - Chapter 4 External Support Files * * * * Used to enhance and manipulate system presentation, External Support Files add to the list of available building blocks which aid you in creating a completely unique system. Customize your system's presentation using the tools outlined in this chapter. - 189 - OVERVIEW There is very little that is hard-coded into RemoteAccess in terms of what is displayed to your users. You've learned that with the aid of the language manager in RACONFIG, you can change just about every prompt or message that is displayed to your users. You've also learned that through the use of the menu manager, you can create your own custom menu system. Now we'll explain how to take advantage of yet another powerful tool - External Support Files. When we refer to text files or control files, we're really referring to the same family of tools. We've referred to both types of external support files throughout this manual and you've probably wondered why this chapter wasn't covered earlier. The reason is that we just didn't see any reason to overwhelm you with tools. We thought it best to let you familiarize yourself with the essential tools first. And since external support files compliment your overall BBS, it makes sense to discuss them after your message, file and menu systems are in place. In this chapter, we'll take a look at each individual type of external support file. We'll explain what they are, how they are used and how to create them. We'll also explain control codes and how they are implemented from within a text file. TEXT FILES EXPLAINED In the Configuration chapter, you stepped through the entire configuration. Remember the text file directory path that you setup in RACONFIG: System > Paths The directory you specified here tells RemoteAccess where to look for your text files. So keep in mind that this directory is where you'll want to be sure to place any text files that you create. Text files allow you to customize and enhance system presentation. What if you'd like your users to see a graphic display wishing them a happy birthday (and only on their birthday, noless)? Or, what if you'd like a file explaining system policies and procedures presented to your users at the press of a menu key? It's all possible through the use of text files that you place into your text file directory. When editing text files, you may include certain special - 190 - characters called control codes. These were mentioned in earlier chapters, but will be covered in detail in this chapter. There are three filename extensions that a text file can have. These extensions indicate the type or variety of the text file: .ASC Text files with this extension should be straight ASCII text files. That is to say that they should not contain ANSI or AVATAR codes. These files are displayed to users who do not have either ANSI or AVATAR emulation enabled. .ANS This filename extension indicates that the text file contains ANSI escape codes and is displayed to callers who have ANSI emulation enabled. .AVT Text files with this extension indicate that they contain AVATAR codes sequences. These files are displayed to users who have AVATAR emulation enabled. .RIP This extension indicates that the file contains RIP (Remote Imaging Protocol) sequences. These files are displayed only to users who have a RIP compatible terminal. .RI2 A more recent version of RIP. For example, if you make all three emulations available to your users, you could have three varieties of one text file in your text file directory. Let's say that you have the file BIRTHDAY.A?? displayed to users on their birthdays: BIRTHDAY.ASC Displays the ASCII variation of the file to users who do not have AVATAR or ANSI enabled. BIRTHDAY.ANS Displays the ANSI variation of the file to users who have ANSI enabled. BIRTHDAY.AVT Displays the AVATAR variation of the file to users who have AVATAR enabled. Again, this is not a requirement; it's an option. If you choose to have only one variety of the BIRTHDAY file, that's fine. But it should be the ASCII variety since it can be displayed to users of any terminal emulation type. As always, when RemoteAccess cannot locate an AVATAR or ANSI variation of a text file, it regresses until it finds a compatible file or the ASCII variation of the file. If no variation of the file exists, a short error message is displayed to the user. Now that we've explained the three varieties of text files, - 191 - we should mention that there are generally two types of text files; ones that RemoteAccess searches for and displays automatically (if found and certain conditions are met), and; ones that you specify which are displayed when you instruct RemoteAccess to do so. The text files that are displayed automatically are described in the Text Files Listing section later in this chapter. Some of these files are required by RemoteAccess (under certain conditions), while others are not. For example, if you configure your system to only allow downloads during specific hours, the file DNLDHRS.A?? becomes a required file which is displayed to users who attempt to download outside of the predefined schedule. But that doesn't mean that it absolutely has to exist in order for your BBS to continue to operate properly. If a text file does not exist, one of two actions will be taken; 1) a brief default message is displayed to the user or; 2) nothing is displayed. Text files for which a default message is displayed when the file is missing, are indicated in the Text Files Listing by an asterisk * character. CONTROL CODES Control codes are powerful macros that allow you to perform certain system functions and display system and user data from within your text files. If you've never used macros before, you'll want to give this section some close study. In the Menu Administration chapter, you learned how to embed control codes within the optional data field in certain menu items. The key sequence will be explained again here so you don't have to hunt for it. The first thing you should know is that you're going to need a text editor that allows you to enter control characters. Since there are a wealth of text editors on the market, the examples given here are geared towards editors that allow control character entry the same way that RACONFIG does. In fact, if you have a mind to, the control file editor in RACONFIG can be used to edit text files and allows you to enter control codes in the manner about to be described. To use the control file editor in RACONFIG, follow these simple steps: 1) Fire up RACONFIG RACONFIG <ENTER> 2) From the list of main selections, select: - 192 - Manager > Ctl files 3) When the pick-list of control files is displayed, position the cursor-bar on Other and press <ENTER>. You will be prompted to enter a filename to edit. Since the editor is geared towards editing files that exist in the RemoteAccess system directory, you'll need to specify a path as a part of the filename to edit. For example, if your text file directory is set to \RA\TXTFILES and you want to edit a text file called BIRTHDAY.ASC, you would enter: TXTFILES\BIRTHDAY.ASC 4) Press <ENTER> to begin editing the text file. If the file exists, its contents will be displayed on your screen. If the file does not exist, it will be created and an empty display will be shown. Control codes can be single control characters, a single control character followed by another character, or even a multiple-character parameter (in the case of color control codes and language prompt numbers). All of these are outlined in the tables contained in this chapter. For example, the control code that causes RemoteAccess to pause until the user presses the <ENTER> key is the single character ^A code. Use the following steps to enter this code: 5) To instruct the editor that you are about to enter a control character, press and hold down the CTRL key while pressing the "P" key. This informs the editor that the next key pressed is to be considered a literal control character. 6) Press and hold down the CTRL key while pressing the "A" key. Depending on the editor you're using, you may see a small smiling face symbol or, if you're using the control file editor in RACONFIG, you'll see a highlighted "A" character. This is how the ^A character appears in the text editor. Now press the BACKSPACE key, deleting the control code you've just entered. Control codes can also be multiple- character codes. These codes consist of a control character followed by a regular, non-control character and possibly an additional parameter. For example, the control code which displays the user's full name is ^FA which consists of a ^F character immediately followed by the A character. Enter this two-character code: 7) To instruct the editor that you are about to enter a - 193 - control character, press and hold down the CTRL key while pressing the "P" key. This informs the editor that the next key pressed is to be considered a literal character. 8) Press and hold down the CTRL key while pressing the "F" key. Depending on the editor you're using, you may see a small spade character or, if you're using the control file editor in RACONFIG, you'll see a highlighted "F" character. This is how the ^F character appears in the text editor. 9) Now simply press the "A" character. If you're using the control file editor, the two-character code appears as a highlighted "F" character followed by the "A" character (^FA). If you're using another text file editor, you may see a spade character followed by the "A" character. This is how the complete two-character code appears in the text editor you're using. Now press the BACKSPACE key, until the control code that you've just entered is deleted. Since you're working with the text file BIRTHDAY.ASC, continue on to enter a simple happy birthday message which will be displayed to your users on their birthday. 10) Enter the following text, pressing <ENTER> at the end of each line: ┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Happy Birthday to ^FA from the Sysop and all the │ │ users of this BBS! │ │ │ │ Press (Enter) to continue^A │ └──────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ 11) If you're using the control file editor, press the <ESCAPE> key and save the changes that have been made to BIRTHDAY.ASC. If you're using another editor, execute the appropriate save command. You've just created your first text file with embedded control codes! When the BIRTHDAY.ASC file is presented to your users, it will display the message you've just entered, substituting the user's full name in place of the ^FA code. When the ^A control code is encounted, RemoteAccess will pause until the user presses <ENTER>. But what about variations of the text file for users with ANSI or AVATAR emulations enabled? Shareware software programs are readily available and can usually be obtained - 194 - by calling a BBS in your area. One recommendation would be to obtain an ANSI drawing program that suits your needs and then use the conversion program AVTCONV.EXE to create AVATAR variations of the ANSI files you create. The AVTCONV.EXE program is fully described in the Reference Information chapter. Now that you know how to enter control codes within your text files, take a look at the tables in the following section which outline the control codes available. CONTROL CODES LISTING There are a four categories of control codes. They are; system function, system data, user data and color control codes. You'll find that system function control codes are single-character control codes while the others are multiple-character codes. This section outlines each category in the order just listed. System Function Codes ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── System function codes are single-character control codes that are used to perform certain system functions such as turning page pausing on or off, or waiting for the user to press <ENTER>. ASCII Character Control Number Code Function Performed ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 01 ^A Wait until the <ENTER> key is pressed. 02 ^B Disable aborting with the S key. 03 ^C Enable aborting with the S key. 04 ^D Enable the Continue? prompt (turns on page pausing). 05 ^E Disable the Continue? prompt (turns off page pausing). 06 ^F Insert a user parameter (see user data codes). 07 ^G Produce a beep on the caller's console. 08 ^H Backspace. Backs the cursor up one character, deleting the character to the left. 09 ^I Tab (moves the cursor forward 8 characters). 10 ^J Linefeed. 11 ^K Insert a system parameter (see system data codes). 12 ^L Clear the screen. - 195 - 13 ^M Carriage return. 17 ^Q Reserved for XON/XOFF handshaking. 19 ^S Reserved for XON/XOFF handshaking. 22 ^V Reserved for AVATAR. 23 ^W Pause for one second. 24 ^X Execute a program in a DOS shell (see description immediately following this table). 26 ^Z END OF FILE marker. Do not use this! The ^X control code is used to execute a program in a DOS shell. This gives you the ability to run an external program whenever RemoteAccess encounters a ^X embedded in a text file. The ^X code is followed by the command line you want to execute, and is terminated by the pipe symbol | character. NOTE: RemoteAccess will only shell to DOS from within text files when enabled in RACONFIG: Options > System > Text shells For example, to run an external program called MAILCHEK.EXE from within a text file you could embed the following into a text file: ^X\RA\MAILCHEK.EXE *B *F *L | When this code is encountered, RemoteAccess would run the MAILCHEK.EXE program located in the \RA directory, passing the caller's baudrate, first name and last name as parameters on the command line. This would have the same effect as typing the DOS command: \RA\MAILCHEK.EXE 2400 FirstName LastName The command must be terminated with the pipe symbol | character. All special DOS shell control codes may be used here just as they are used in menu function type 7-"Run an external program in a shell". See the Menu Administration chapter for complete information on these control code parameters. NOTE: Use this feature with caution! Imagine the damage that the following embedded command could do: COPY \RA\USERS.BBS \DLOAD\GENFILES If there is any possibility of a user being able to modify any of the text files that your system displays, then disable Text shells in RACONFIG. - 196 - System Data Codes ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── System data codes are used to display data about the overall system. These codes are multiple-character codes and always begin with the ^K character. ASCII Character Control Number Code Information Displayed ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 33 ^K! Display another text file. This code should be followed by a 1-8 character filename (no extension) and must be terminated by the pipe symbol "|" character. (i.e. ^K!BBSRULES| would display the BBSRULES.A?? text file). This control code may be nested by displaying a text file from another text file to the limit of available memory. {+} Registered only. 36 ^K$ Number of callers today. 37 ^K% Handle of last caller. 38 ^K& Number of files currently tagged. 39 ^K' Total kilobytes of tagged files. 40 ^K( Name of currently selected language. 48 ^K0 Number of messages in selected area. 49 ^K1 Number of the current template message area. 50 ^K2 Number of current template file area. 65 ^KA Total system calls. 66 ^KB Name of last caller (any node). 68 ^KD Starting message number of currently selected area. 69 ^KE Ending message number of currently selected area. 70 ^KF Number of times user has paged the Sysop during this session. 71 ^KG Day of the week (full form). 72 ^KH Number of users in the user file. 73 ^KI Time in 24-hour format. 74 ^KJ Today's date. 75 ^KK Minutes connected this call. 76 ^KL Seconds connected (always returns zero). 77 ^KM Minutes used today. 78 ^KN Seconds used today (always returns zero). 79 ^KO Minutes remaining today. 80 ^KP Seconds remaining today (always returns zero). 81 ^KQ Daily time limit. - 197 - 82 ^KR Connect speed. 83 ^KS Day of the week (abbreviated form). 84 ^KT Daily download limit (in Kb). 85 ^KU Minutes until next system event. 86 ^KV 24 hour format time of the next event. 87 ^KW Node number (as set on command line). 88 ^KX Terminates the current call. 89 ^KY Name of current template message area. 90 ^KZ Name of current template file area. 91 ^K[cc Change foreground and background color to cc. See the Color Codes table in this chapter for details. 92 ^K/ Clear to end of the current line. 93 ^K]nnn Displays the language prompt number nnn from the currently selected language. Since this code is nearly identical to the change color code, nnn must be a three-digit number. User Data Codes ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── User data codes are used to display information about the user who is currently logged-on. In the following table, settings that return the state of a toggle, are indicated. For example, ^F0 will display the word ON or OFF depending on the status of the current user's full-screen editor toggle. ASCII Character Control Number Code Information Displayed ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 33 ^F! User's default protocol setting. 34 ^F" User's exclude echomail areas from mail scans setting. If echomail areas are excluded from the user's mail-box scan, this returns ON, otherwise returns OFF. 35 ^F# User's current file group. 36 ^F$ User's address line 1. 37 ^F% User's address line 2. 38 ^F& User's address line 3. 39 ^F' User's sex (Male/Female). 40 ^F( User's Post Billing flag setting (ON/OFF). 41 ^F) User's current message group. 42 ^F* Current file group number. 43 ^F+ Current message group number. 48 ^F0 User's current full-screen editor setting (ON/OFF). 49 ^F1 Current do not disturb setting (ON/OFF). - 198 - 50 ^F2 Current Hot-Key setting (ON/OFF). 51 ^F3 User's handle. 52 ^F4 Date of user's first call to the system. 53 ^F5 User's date of birth. 54 ^F6 Subscription expiration date. 55 ^F7 Days until subscription expiration. 56 ^F8 Current AVATAR setting (ON/OFF). 57 ^F9 File ratio (number of files). 58 ^F: File ratio (kilobytes). 59 ^F; Current full-screen message viewer setting (ON/OFF). 60 ^F< Selected date format. 61 ^F= Current auto-message-forwarding setting (ON/OFF). 62 ^F> Name (if any) of message forwardee. 65 ^FA User's full name. 66 ^FB User's location. 68 ^FD Business/Data telephone number. 69 ^FE Voice/Home telephone number. 70 ^FF Date of last call. 71 ^FG Time of last call. 72 ^FH A Flags setting. 73 ^FI B Flags setting. 74 ^FJ C Flags setting. 75 ^FK D Flags setting. 76 ^FL Credits remaining (cents). The value displayed by this code uses the formula: (Credit - NetPending - SessionCost) Therefore, if a user has 25 credits and has 15 pending credits and the current session cost in credits is 5, the value displayed with this macro would be 5. 77 ^FM Total messages posted. 78 ^FN Last message read. 79 ^FO Security level. 80 ^FP Total calls to the BBS. 81 ^FQ Number of files uploaded. 82 ^FR Kilobytes uploaded. 83 ^FS Number of files downloaded. 84 ^FT Kilobytes downloaded. 85 ^FU Minutes used today. 86 ^FV Current screen length setting. 87 ^FW User's first name only. 88 ^FX ANSI setting (ON/OFF). 89 ^FY Continue? prompt setting (ON/OFF). 90 ^FZ Screen clearing setting (ON/OFF). 91 ^F[ Daily kilobytes remaining. 93 ^F] User's comment field. 94 ^F^ Current session time limit. 95 ^F_ Time remaining this session. - 199 - Padding Control Codes ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── It is possible to pre-define the width of any textfile control code. Simply place one '.' character between the ^K/^F and the second part of the code for every additional space you would like the field padded with. Example: ^FA Displays the users name. ^F....................A Displays the users name padded with 20 spaces. If the field is longer than the defined number of spaces, it will be truncated. Text fields are always justified to the left, and numerical fields are always justified to the right. Color Control Codes ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Color code numbers are used throughout RemoteAccess. They can be put to work in the file list template defined in RACONFIG: Options > Files > List Format Color codes can also be used to define colors used in menu displays, language prompts, text files and even questionnaires. Color codes are entered using the ^K[ control code followed by a two-digit code which represents the background and foreground colors to be used. These are specified as hexadecimal values. If you aren't familiar with hexadecimal representation, a table has been provided in this section which contains a cross-reference. Something worth noting at this point is the fact that you can specify a color number that would cause the foreground color to be flashing. This is actually accomplished by adding 8 to the value of the background color number. For example, to make the specified foreground color flash on a black background (color number 0), you would specify a background color of 8 (0 + 8 = 8). The following tables list the hexadecimal color numbers for the background and foreground colors. The background color numbers specified indicate which numbers should be used to achieve the specified color with and without a flashing foreground. - 200 - Color number if no Color number if a Background flashing foreground is flashing foreground is Color desired desired ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Black 0 8 Blue 1 9 Green 2 A Cyan 3 B Red 4 C Magenta 5 D Brown 6 E Gray 7 F Foreground Color Color Number ───────────────────────── Black 0 Blue 1 Green 2 Cyan 3 Red 4 Magenta 5 Brown 6 Gray 7 Dark Gray 8 Light Blue 9 Light Green A Light Cyan B Light Red C Light Magenta D Yellow E White F To familiarize yourself with this scheme, examine the color number examples shown below. Cross reference each example with the color number tables so you understand the color numbering scheme: 34 Red foreground on a cyan background. 01 Blue foreground on a black background. BF Flashing white foreground on a cyan background. BA Flashing light green foreground on a cyan background. TEXT FILES LISTING All text files that RemoteAccess automatically looks for are listed below. The conditions that must be met in order for the text file to be displayed are listed for each text file. As mentioned earlier, each file for which RemoteAccess will supply a brief default message, is marked with the * - 201 - character. NOTE: In most cases, it is recommended that your text file contain a prompt for the user to press <ENTER> at the end of the file. This not only gives your users ample time to read the text file but also provides a pause between screen clearing codes, in some instances, where the text file might normally be cleared from the display before the user has had a chance to view the file. See the Control Codes section later in this chapter for details on the ^A control code. 1ATATIME.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if a user tries to log-on to more than one node (line) at the same time provided that the multi-line check option has been enabled in RACONFIG: Options > System > Check multi ALTNEWS.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed only if the NEWS.A?? file was not displayed to the user because the user requested to skip it during an IEMSI session. If you want all users to see your system news file regardless, simply copy NEWS.A?? to ALTNEWS.A??. BADFILES.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if the user attempts to upload a file that is listed in the BADFILES.CTL control file. BADPWD.ASC * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed when a user enters an incorrect password and elects to leave a message to the Sysop. For example, if a user enters an incorrect password more than the maximum allowable password tries defined in RACONFIG, RemoteAccess will offer an opportunity to leave a message to the Sysop. If the user elects to leave a message, this file is displayed prior to loading the message editor. The maximum number of password tries can be defined in RACONFIG: Options > System > Pwd tries - 202 - BIRTHDAY.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed during the log-on process if the current date is the same as the user's date of birth. NOTE: RemoteAccess prompts for and records user birth dates during the new user log-on process provided that the Birthdate option is enabled in RACONFIG: Options > New users > Birthdate If RemoteAccess does not know the user's birthdate, this file cannot be displayed. DATEFMT.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This text file is displayed just before a user is prompted to enter a date format. This ocurrs when; a) menu function type 64-"Select a new date format" is executed, and; b) when a user logs-on for the first time and your system is configured to allow users to select their individual date formats. To allow users to select a date format, set the Date format to Ask in RACONFIG: Options > New users > Date format DOBCHECK.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This text file is displayed to a user prior to prompting for a correct date of birth. This occurs during the new user log-on process (if enabled) as well as when prompting a user to enter a date of birth for verification purposes. See RACONFIG: Options > New users > Birthdate Options > System > Check DOB DNLDHRS.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if a user attempts to download at a time that is outside of the scheduled download hours as defined in RACONFIG: Options > Files > Download start / Download end EDITHELP.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── - 203 - This text file is displayed if the user asks for help while using the built-in message editor. ENDCHT.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This text file is displayed when the Sysop terminates a chat session. EXPIRED.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This is displayed during the log-on process if the user's password has expired, just before the user is prompted to enter a new password. NOTE: User passwords will only expire if defined in RACONFIG: Options > System > Pwd change FGROUPS.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed in place of the formatted, hard-coded file area group list, if it exists, when a user selects a new file group via menu function type 50-"Select file area". When the /FG=0 parameter is specified in the optional data field of a menu function type 50, the user is presented with either the internal listing (if this file does not exist) or this text file. For full details on file group implementation, see the chapter on Menu Administration. FGR#####.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed, if it exists, when a user selects a new file area within the currently selected file group, via menu function type 50-"Select file area". When using menu function type 50 with the /FG or /FG=<group number> parameters, RemoteAccess displays the text file FGR<group number>.A?? (if it exists) rather than the formatted, hard-coded list. See the Menu Administration chapter for details on file groups. FILEAREA.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If present, this file will be displayed when menu function type 50-"Select file area" is executed. If this file does - 204 - not exist, RemoteAccess displays a formatted, hard-coded list. FLA#####.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This text file is displayed once only to a user when an individual file area (specified as #####) is entered for browsing. This is great for displaying a file which explains guidelines for a given area. For example, the file FLA23.A?? would be displayed to a user who browsed files in file area 23 for the first time. Simply substitute ##### in the filename with the file area number (no zero padding). {+} Registered only. Correct: FLA1.A?? Incorrect: FLA00001.A?? FLEXTIME.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed when a user switches from regular time to flexitime (if the option is enabled). See the section on Limits in the Configuration chapter for details on how flexitime works. GOODBYE.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed when a user elects to log-off, just before the session is terminated. GROUP#.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── These files are displayed to users of a particular group directly after the SEC#.A?? file. For example, the file GROUP1.A?? would be displayed to all users who are in group 1. GUEST.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed whenever a guest logs-on using a guest account as defined in RAMGR. See the User Administration chapter for details on guest accounts. HANDLE.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed just before the user is prompted to - 205 - choose a new handle. This occurs both when menu function type 60-"Change handle" is executed, or when a new user logs-on and handles are enabled in RACONFIG: Options > New users > Handle LANGUAGE.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed (if it exists) in place of the hard-coded, internal language selection menu. LOCKOUT.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if the Sysop presses ALT-L while a user is on-line, to lock the user out of the system. See the Sysop Keys and Status Bar section of the Reference Information chapter for more information on the ALT-L command. LOGO.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed as soon as a connection is established (even before callers are prompted to enter their log-on name). RemoteAccess will attempt to automatically detect whether the remote terminal supports ANSI emulation. If ANSI emulation is detected, the .ANS variation of this file will be displayed, if it exists. NOTE: This file is not displayed when logging-on locally if fast log-ons are enabled in RACONFIG: Options > System > Fast logons MAILHELP.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This text file is displayed if the user asks for help at the mailbox scan prompt. The user is only offered the help prompt if this file exists. For example, the default prompt for the English language when MAILHELP.A?? does not exist: Read mail now? [Y/n]: _ And when MAILHELP.A?? does exist: Read mail now? [Y/n/?]: _ - 206 - MAXPAGE.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This is displayed if a user tries to page the Sysop for a chat more than the number of times allowed as defined in RACONFIG: Options > Paging > Max number MGA#####.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This text file is displayed once only to a user when an individual message area is entered for reading. This is great for displaying a file which explains guidelines for a given area. For example, the file MGA5.A?? would be displayed to a user who selected to read messages in area 5 for the first time. Simply substitute ##### in the filename with the message area number (no zero padding). {+} Registered only. Correct: MGA5.A?? Incorrect: MGA00005.A?? MGR#####.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed, if it exists, when a user selects a new message area within the currently selected message group, via menu function type 49-"Select message area". When using menu function type 49 with the /MG or /MG=<group number> parameters, RemoteAccess displays the text file MGR<group number>.A?? (if it exists) rather than the formatted, hard-coded list. See the Menu Administration chapter for details on message groups. MGROUPS.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed in place of the formatted, hard-coded message area group list, if it exists, when a user selects a new message group via menu function type 49-"Select message area". When the /MG=0 parameter is specified in the optional data field of a menu function type 49, the user is presented with either the internal listing (if this file does not exist) or this text file. For full details on message group implementation, see the chapter on Menu Administration. MM-DD.A?? - 207 - ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess can display a text file on a particular day of the year. Imagine sending a Happy New Year! message on the first day of January every year without intervention. Simply create a text file named MM-DD.A?? where MM is the month number and DD is the day number. Both values must be padded with a leading zero if the number is less than ten. For example, the file 01-01.A?? would be displayed to users on the first of January. MSGAREA.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── If this file exists, it is displayed when a user is prompted to select a message area via menu function type 49-"Select message area". If this file does not exist, a formatted default list is displayed. NEWS.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is intended for use as a general news bulletin that is displayed after RemoteAccess checks for waiting mail. If your system is not configured to check for new mail during the log- on process, then this file is displayed directly after the WELCOME.A?? file. To define whether or not your system checks for unread mail during the log-on process, see RACONFIG: Options > Messages > Logon.Newmail NEWUSER1.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This text file is displayed to new users after they confirm that their log-on name has been entered correctly. For example, when a new user enters a log-on name that RemoteAccess cannot locate in the user database, it is possible that the user typed an incorrect name. Therefore, RemoteAccess prompts the user to confirm that the log-on name was entered correctly: ┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Please enter your full name: Andrew Milner │ │ │ │ Scanning the user file ... │ │ │ │ Your name was not located in the system user file. │ │ │ │ Name entered: Andrew Milner. │ │ │ - 208 - │ Did you neter your name correctly (Y/n)? _ │ └────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ If the user confirms that the log-on name was correctly entered, NEWUSER1.A?? is displayed. NEWUSER2.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This is displayed after a new user confirms that all user information (i.e. name, location, phone numbers, etc.) has been entered correctly. NO300.ASC * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if a 300 BPS caller attempts to log-on during hours when 300 BPS connections are not allowed as defined in RACONFIG: Options > Restrictions > No300 Start / No300 End NOCREDIT.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This text file is displayed when a user attempts to enter a netmail message or download a file, which have an associated cost in credits, but does not have sufficient credits remaining on account to perform the function. It is also displayed when a user attempts to download a file which has an associated cost (in credits) which is greater than the credits remaining in the user's account. NOTAVAIL.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This text file is displayed if a user tries to page the Sysop for a chat when the current time is outside scheduled paging hours, as defined in RACONFIG: Options > Paging NOTFOUND.ASC * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if RemoteAccess cannot locate the name of a user at log-on, but before the user is asked to confirm that the log-on name has been entered correctly. NOTSYSOP.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── - 209 - This file is displayed if a user attempts to post a message addressed to Sysop in an EchoMail message area. Since EchoMail messages are distributed to numerous systems, messages addressed to Sysop cannot be allowed for obvious reasons. ONCEONLY.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed just after the NEWS.A?? file. It is displayed once only when the file has been altered since the user last viewed it. PAGEABRT.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if the Sysop chooses to abort a page for chat by the user. PAGED.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This text file is displayed when the user pages the Sysop for a chat, but the Sysop does not answer the page. This file might contain a message informing the user that the Sysop has been paged and will break-in for a chat if available. The user is also prompted to leave a message to the Sysop when the page is unanswered. PASSWORD.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed before the user is asked to select a new password. This file should stress the importance of choosing a suitable password. PRIVATE.ASC * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if a new user attempts to log-on when your BBS is configured as a private, pre-registration system. You can configure your BBS as a private system by setting the new user security level to 0 in RACONFIG: Options > New users > Security RATIO.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if the user attempts to download a file which would exceed the user's download-to-upload ratio by number of files. - 210 - RATIOK.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if the user attempts to download a file which would exceed the user's download-to-upload ratio by number of kilobytes (Kb). READHELP.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if the user asks for help while reading messages. Unlike the MAILHELP.A?? file, the help prompt is available whether or not this file exists. RTCHELP.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed when a user selects help from within a Real-Time Conference. RTCMHELP.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed when the moderator of a Real-Time Conference asks for help from within a conference. Moderators are afforded some administrative commands within Real-Time- Conferences. Therefore, this file should include a bit more information than the RTCHELP.A?? file. SEC#.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── These files are displayed to users of a particular security level directly after the WELCOME.A?? file, but before the mail- check (if enabled). For example, the file SEC10.A?? (if present), would be displayed to all users with a security level of 10. STARTCHT.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This text file is displayed when the Sysop breaks in for a chat using the ALT-C command. TIMEhh.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed after the WELCOME.A?? and WELCOME1.A?? files when hh matches the current hour number (in 24 hour format). For example, if the current time is 8:00 pm (20:00) and the file TIME20.A?? exists, it is displayed to the user. - 211 - TIMEWARN.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed during the log-on process if the user's time limit has been adjusted to accommodate an upcoming system event. NOTE: When a user's time remaining is decreased due to an upcoming event, the time that is subtracted is restored if the user calls back on the same day after the system event has passed. TODAY.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed to users who attempt to download a file which would exceed the daily download limit as defined in RACONFIG: Manager > Limits > Security Level TOOSLOW.ASC * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if a user attempts to log-on at a speed lower than the minimum required as defined in RACONFIG: Options > Restrictions > Logon Speed TRASHCAN.ASC * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if a user enters a name that is found to contain a text string that has been included in the TRASHCAN.CTL control file. See the Control Files section of this chapter for more information on control files. UPLDSCAN.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed when upload scanning is enabled and your system is configured to ask users if they would like to wait while the upload is scanned online. This gives you an opportunity to explain the file scanning process and how it might effect the current user. A sample of this file is as follows: ┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Thank you for the upload! All uploaded files │ │ are scanned for computer viruses and other data │ │ corruption. Your user account will not be │ │ credited for the upload until the scan has been │ - 212 - │ completed. Files may be scanned after you log- │ │ off and your account updated at that time. Or, │ │ you may choose to proceed now and wait for the │ │ scan to be completed to receive immediate upload │ │ credit. │ │ │ │ Press <ENTER> to continue^A │ └──────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ For more information on upload scanning, see the Configuration chapter. VIP.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed upon logon to any user listed in the VIP.CTL control file. WELCOME.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed when a user logs-on (after the user has entered a correct password), or in the case of a new user, after completing the new user procedure. This might be an elaborate title screen that welcomes users to your BBS. WELCOME1.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed directly after the WELCOME.A?? file, and might contain extra system information (i.e. today in history quote, etc.). XFERHELP.A?? ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed if the user requests help by pressing the "?" key at the file transfer protocol selections menu. It should contain general information about the different protocols themselves. XFERPROT.A?? * ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed in place of the formatted default file transfer protocol selection menu and is displayed to users (if it exists) when prompting for a file transfer protocol to use. XFERTIME.A?? * - 213 - ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is displayed when a user attempts to download a file which would require more time to complete than the user has remaining. CONTROL FILES Control files are used to control certain system functions and user input. They are ASCII text files of specific filenames which must be placed in the system directory. They may be edited with any ASCII text file editor or by the Control Files Manager in RACONFIG (see the Editing Control Files section in this chapter for details on how to edit control files). RemoteAccess uses control files to filter user input. For example, if your TRASHCAN.CTL file contained the name Mad Hatter, users would not be allowed to enter it as a log-on name. Further, RemoteAccess checks to see if the text strings contained in TRASHCAN.CTL are embedded in user log-on names. Therefore, if the TRASHCAN.CTL file contained the word Hatter, and a user entered a log-on name of Mad Hatter, it would not be allowed. In addition to filtering user input, RemoteAccess uses control files to control certain system functions such as network mail costing and message addressing macros. To summarize, control files add to your BBS by giving you even more control over your overall system. Add these to your growing list of tools that allow you to customize your BBS. Editing Control Files ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── As mentioned earlier, control files may be edited using any ASCII text editor. But why use a text editor when one is built into RACONFIG for you? The Control File Manager contains an editor which is available whenever you select a control file from the pick-list menu. This editor features an easy to use interface and supports a maximum of 8192 lines. To edit a control file using RACONFIG: 1) Fire up RACONFIG: RACONFIG <Enter> 2) Select Manager and then select Ctl files. 3) Select the control file to be edited from the control file pick-list menu and press <ENTER>. - 214 - 4) Edit the file to suit your needs. When finished, press "Esc". You will be prompted whether or not you would like to save the changes made. The control file editor in RACONFIG is very versatile and supports many popular editing commands. In addition, almost every command has an equivalent alternate command. The commands supported are outlined in the following table. Command Description Alternate ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── <ESCAPE> Quit BACKSPACE BackSpace CTRL-H HOME Home cursor CTRL-Q CTRL-S PAGE-UP Page up CTRL-R PAGE-DOWN Page down CTRL-C UP Cursor up CTRL-E DOWN Cursor down CTRL-X LEFT Cursor left CTRL-S RIGHT Cursor right CTRL-D END End of line CTRL-Q CTRL-D INSERT Toggle insert CTRL-V DELETE Delete character CTRL-G CTRL-LEFT Word left CTRL-A CTRL-RIGHT Word right CTRL-F CTRL-P Enter literal control character CTRL-O CTRL-W Toggle word wrap CTRL-T Delete word to the right of the cursor CTRL-Y Delete current line CTRL-Q CTRL-Y Delete from cursor to end of line CTRL-END End of screen CTRL-Q CTRL-X CTRL-PAGE-DOWN End of file CTRL-Q CTRL-C CTRL-HOME Top of screen CTRL-Q CTRL-E CTRL-PAGE-UP Top of file CTRL-Q CTRL-R TAB Tab CTRL-I ALT-R Global reformat CTRL-B Reformat paragraph CTRL-W Scroll display up CTRL-Z Scroll display down CTRL-O CTRL-I Toggle auto-indent CTRL-Q CTRL-L Restore last deleted line Comments may be entered within a control file. Comments contain information that is helpful to you. They might be notes or header information that helps you maintain the format of a control file. Comments are so-named because they are not interpretted by RemoteAccess. To enter a textual comment, simply precede it with the semicolon ; - 215 - character. Then, any text on the same line following the semicolon is ignored when the file is read by RemoteAccess. For example, a NAMES.CTL file formatted with comments might look something like this: ; My NAMES.CTL file. I have entered names of my ; friends here so that I can address messages to ; them more quickly. The fields are separated by ; commas and are defined as follows: ; ; Field 1 : macro name ; Field 2 : full user name ; Field 3 : network address (0:0/0 is none) ; Field 4 : message subject ; andrew,Andrew Milner,2:270/18,Hi Andrew! john,John Parlin,1:282/4021,Hi John! In the above example, the comment lines explain in detail the purpose of the file together with field information. As you can see, this would be most helpful since the fields are documented right in the control file. CONTROL FILES LISTING Following is a list of control files used by RemoteAccess along with descriptions and usage examples for each file. BADFILES.CTL ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file is used to specify a list of filenames that users may not upload to your system. Simply specify one filename per line (wildcard characters are valid). Example: *.GIF NORTON*.* COMMAND.COM In this example, filenames with a .GIF extension, filenames beginning with the word NORTON and the specific filename COMMAND.COM may not be uploaded. HANDLES.CTL ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file allows you to list strings of characters that are not allowed within user handles. This file is referenced whenever the user's handle is changed. - 216 - Examples: Sysop Jack Daniels Hacker In the above example, users would not be allowed to enter handles that contain the character strings Sysop, Jack Daniels, or Hacker. But you should also note that this would prevent users from entering the handle Jack Danielson or Jim Hackerman since these handles contain embedded strings that have been disallowed. See also: TRASHCAN.CTL NAMES.CTL ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RemoteAccess allows you to assign short names to users you frequently send messages to. During message entry, these short names act as macros which speed message addressing. This control file should contain one entry per line in the following format: <short name>,<user name>,<address>[,<subject>] Where: <short name> is the abbreviated name you wish to assign values to. For example, this might be a user's first name, nickname, initials, etc. <user name> is the full user name that the message should be addressed to. <address> is the 3-dimensional network address that the message should be sent to. If you are not a member of a network, or you are creating a short name for a local user, you can specify an address of 0:0/0. <subject> is an optional parameter which, when specified, will fill the subject field with the text string specified. Take a look at this example entry: rahq,Andrew Milner,2:270/18,RemoteAccess... To use the short names feature using the above example, select a message area from which to send. Then post a message using menu function type 27-"Post message". When prompted to enter the name that this message should be addressed to, enter the short name preceeded by the asterisk - 217 - * character: To: *rahq The message will be automatically addressed to Andrew Milner and the subject field will be filled with the string RemoteAccess... If the message was entered in a NetMail area, it would be sent automatically to the network address 2:270/18. NODECOST.CTL ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This control file is used to specify the costs that are to be associated with NetMail messages sent from your system. For a complete explanation of the format of this file, refer to the Mail Networking chapter later in this manual. PHONENUM.CTL ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Use this control file to prevent users from entering telephone numbers that you know to be invalid. Take a look at the following three-line example: 00- 555- -0000 Like the HANDLES.CTL and TRASHCAN.CTL control files, RemoteAccess checks for embedded strings of characters when referencing this data in user telephone number entries. Therefore, while the first line would disallow telephone numbers beginning with 00- it would also conveniently disallow 800- and 900- telephone number entries since 00- is embedded in these numbers. Line two would disallow entries that contained 555-. For example, a user would not be allowed to enter a telephone number of 612-555-1212. Line three would prevent users from entering a telephone number that ends in four zeros. PWDTRASH.CTL ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file allows you to specify a list of character strings that may not be contained in user passwords. For example, to prevent users from entering the passwords SECRET, TEST, 123456, or RED FIRETRUCK, your PWDTRASH.CTL might look like - 218 - the following example: 123456 TEST SECRET FIRETRUCK Since RemoteAccess looks for embedded character strings, the password RED FIRETRUCK was disallowed simply by specifying the FIRETRUCK entry. TRASHCAN.CTL ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Allows you to specify a list of names that users may not use to log-on to your system. This file is the same as the HANDLES.CTL control file, except that it contains a list of character strings that may not be embedded in the user real names rather than their handle. Examples: Sysop Jack Daniels Hacker In the above example, users would not be allowed to enter names that contain the character strings Sysop, Jack Daniels, or Hacker. But you should also note that this would prevent users from entering the name Jack Danielson or Jim Hackerman since these names contain embedded strings that have been disallowed. VIP.CTL ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This file allows you to specify a list of users who are to be considered Very Important People. When a user who is listed in this file logs-on to your system, a short paging bell will sound at the local console. The comment information (if any) contained in the user's record will also be displayed on the status bar. The format of this file is the same as that of the TRASHCAN.CTL and HANDLES.CTL files. NOTE: The local bell may be disabled by activating the ScrLck key. - 219 - Chapter 5 User Administration * * * * The user database is possibly the most important database on your BBS. It contains all the information about each user's history, settings, and vital security data. This chapter details information on editing and maintaining the user database as well as the data contained in each user account record. - 220 - NEW USER DEFAULTS In the Configuration chapter, we outlined individual features and options and how to implement them. Among these were the defaults that are assigned to new users. These defaults are used to control access and set up new user accounts to take advantage of menu items you may specifically assign to new users. Once a new user has logged-on to your system, an account record is created and stored in the user database. The new user default values which you assigned in RACONFIG are assigned to and stored in the new user's account. For specific information on new user defaults, see the following section in RACONFIG and in the Configuration chapter: Options > New Users USING REMOTEACCESS MANAGER The RemoteAccess Manager utility program is used to maintain both the user and file databases. RAMGR.EXE resides in the system directory and may be executed by typing RAMGR followed by pressing <ENTER>. When this utility is fired up, you are presented with a pick-list menu which allows you to select a number of options including Users. You can also fire up RAMGR in user administration mode directly by typing the command RAMGR -U followed by pressing <ENTER>. This method bypasses the initial pick-list menu and places you directly in the user administration portion of the program. In addition to the -U parameter, several other switches are supported. They are: -B Run in monochrome (black and white) mode. -N Ingore any missing file area paths (normally RAMGR will not allow you to enter a file area which has an invalid path). -F Edit files only (bypass main menu). -A Auto-update mode (file editing). Forces an automatic update of all files when an area is entered. Once in the user portion of RAMGR, you are presented a full-screen pick-list of user accounts from which to select. You can move the cursor-bar using any of the following keys: UP Moves the cursor-bar up one user record. - 221 - DOWN Moves the cursor-bar down one user record. PAGE-UP Moves the cursor-bar up one screen page. PAGE-DOWN Moves the cursor-bar down one screen page. HOME Moves the cursor-bar to the first record in the database. END Moves the cursor-bar to the last record in the database. Notice the command summary at the bottom of full-screen user pick-list display. It indicates which additional commands can be executed from this screen. Each of these commands will be explained below Modifying a User ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Position the cursor-bar on the user you wish to modify and press <ENTER> to bring up the Edit Screen. Move from field to field by pressing <ENTER>, changing the desired settings until you are satisfied with the changes. Press <ESCAPE> when you are finished and enter "Y" or "N" at the Save changes? prompt. Finding a User ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ From the user pick-list display, you may search for a specific user by pressing ALT-F and entering all or part of the user name you wish to find. If the user name is located, the cursor-bar will be positioned on the matched record. Adding a User ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Users are typically added automatically when a new user logs-on to your system. However, you can add users manually by pressing INSERT from the user pick-list display. This brings up the edit screen with all fields set to blank values. Enter the user data as desired. When you are finished, press <ESCAPE> and answer "Y" or "N" in response to the "Save changes?" prompt. - 222 - Deleting a User ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Users may be deleted by positioning the cursor-bar on the desired user record and pressing the DELETE key. After doing this, you will notice a tag mark in the "Del" column for that user record. This shows that the user record has been marked for deletion. Records marked for deletion are physically removed (or purged) from the database by RAUSER which is discussed later in this chapter. Users marked for deletion may be unmarked using the same process, provided the user record has not been purged by RAUSER. Account Record Fields ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ This section describes the fields and options contained in each user record. Select a user from the pick-list display and press <ENTER> to bring up the edit screen. Field Name Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Name User's full name (35 characters). Handle User's registered handle (35 characters). Location Where the user is calling from. Password User's secret password. This is stored as a CRC value and cannot be viewed. Security Security level (1-65535, 0 to lock out). Home# Home / voice telephone number. Business# Business /data telephone number. A Flags A flag settings (- or x). B Flags B flag settings (- or x). C Flags C flag settings (- or x). D Flags D flag settings (- or x). Credit Number of credits remaining. Pending Number of credits pending deduction. Group Group number assigned to. Sex Gender (male or female). Fwd User name (if any) that messages are forwarded to. Addr1 Address line one. Addr2 Address line two. Addr3 Address line three. Comnt Information comment (can contain anything). Last time Time of last call. Last date Date of last call. 1st date Date of first call. Sub date Subscription expiration date. Birthdate Date of birth. Time used today Number of minutes used on Last date. - 223 - Screen length Length of screen display. Last pwd change Number of calls since last password change. Last DOB check Number of calls since last date of birth verification check. Date format Date entry and display format. Flags Flag settings for this user. For information on access flags, see the Configuration chapter. Uploads Total number of files uploaded. Dnloads Total number of files downloaded. UploadK Total kilobytes of all files uploaded. DnloadK Total kilobytes of all files downloaded. TodayK Total kilobytes of all files downloaded today. Messages posted Total number of messages posted. High msg read Highest message number read. Number of calls Total number of calls user has made. Last msg area Last message area the user had selected. Last file area Last file area the user had selected. Last file group Last file group the user had selected. Last msg group Last message group the user had selected. Protocol Default file transfer protocol user has selected (shows the command character or @ if no protocol is selected). Language Language number selected. Option Flag Settings ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When the cursor is positioned on the Flags field and <ENTER> is pressed, a new pick-list menu is displayed which offers a means of modifying a user's individual option flag settings. These settings have two possible settings; either "Y" or "N" (on or off). An example display is shown below followed by an explanation of each of the flags. Field Name Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Deleted Is the user marked for deletion? Clear screen Send clear screen codes? Page pausing Pause at the end of each screen page? ANSI graphics Send ANSI codes? AVATAR graphics Send AVATAR codes? No-kill Never delete this user during a pack? Xfer priority Ignore download restrictions? Full screen editor Use the full screen message editor? Quiet mode Ignore on-line messages from other users? Hot-keys Use hot-keys? Full screen viewer Use full screen message reader? Hidden Hidden from the user and other caller - 224 - lists? Page priority Allowed to override paging restrictions? No new echomail Exclude EchoMail from mail-box scans? Guest Is this a guest account record? Post bill Allow user to accrue a negative credit balance? Selected mail only Check for new mail only in message areas the user has selected? Guest Accounts ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ RemoteAccess supports the use of Guest Accounts which allow callers to log-on to your system without having to enter actual log-on information. This enables you to allow users to log-on using a generic user account for whatever purposes you desire. One example use of guest accounts is to allow callers to log-on in order to download certain files, without having to become a member user of your BBS. To enable this feature, simply create a new user record (using RAMGR) with a name/handle of Guest (or whatever other name you choose), and enable the Guest flag in the user account record. A guest account record has log-on defaults set to those in the user record, so it's probably wise to disable AVATAR, ANSI and any other capabilities that the simplest terminal program might not have. {+} Registered only. Each time a caller logs-on using a guest account, the following conditions apply: * The Time Used Today and K Downloaded Today fields are reset to zero. * A guest may change terminal display parameters (ANSI, AVATAR, screen length, etc.) but these changes are never saved permanently. * A guest may not modify the password for the guest account. * A guest may log-on to more than one node at the same time. NOTE: It is probably a good idea to enable the No-kill flag for Guest accounts to prevent deletion during user maintenance tasks performed by RAUSER. - 225 - RAUSER RAUSER.EXE is the utility used to perform maintenance functions on the user database files. Not only will it remove users marked for deletion, it can also delete users that have not called your BBS for a certain number of days. It is also used to sort the database in order of security level and surname. RAUSER may be run from any directory and will automatically locate system and user files. An activity summary will be inserted into your system log file as well. The following command-line parameters are excepted by RAUSER: -P Pack the user database files. This will physically remove all records that are marked for deletion. -S Sort users in order of security level and surname. -D[n] Delete users who have not called for "n" days. This parameter will also force a pack operation. -V Verbose logging. Lists any users that were deleted during a pack operation inserting the list in the system log. -R Update account balances according to the FlexTime settings in the Limits section of RACONFIG. -M[s] Specify the maximum security level of users to be affected by a pack or delete operation. For example, if you only wish to delete old users who have not called for 100 days, but wish to only exempt all users with security level 50 and above from being deleted, you should use the command-line: RAUSER -D100 -M50 - 226 - Chapter 6 Message Database Administration * * * * In the Configuration chapter, you learned how to create the message areas used on your BBS. You also learned about the two database formats that RemoteAccess supports. In this chapter, you'll cover the specifications of the database as well as the materials necessary to maintain it. - 227 - SPECIFICATIONS The message system used by RemoteAccess consists of a structured database that allows a great deal of flexibility and speed. As a Sysop, you may already have your message database laid out in your head or even sketched out on paper. If so, we commend you on your ambition though we strongly encourage you to read this section before you dive in so that you have a better understanding of how it all works. RemoteAccess supports two types of message database formats; JAM and Hudson. Your message database may consist solely of one type, or it may be a combination of both JAM and Hudson formats. In the Configuration chapter, we wrote about the history of the two types of supported formats. If you skipped that section or would like to refresh your memory, see the RACONFIG section: Manager > Message Areas > Area Type Knowing the capabilities of each of the supported message database formats, you will be able to make an educated decision on which format is right for you. Our recommendation is that if you do not require the Hudson format, use JAM. JAM Database Files ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The overall JAM database consists of several small databases; one for each JAM message area. Each JAM message area is stored in its own subdirectory, each containing 4 database files. Each of the filenames consists of the base message area name and a specific filename extension. For example, if a JAM message area name is defined as C:\RA\MSG\PUBLIC in the JAMbase field of the message area configuration, the filenames stored in that particular area would be PUBLIC.*. These are: Filename Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── .JDX This file holds the index to all of the messages held in the particular message area. .JHR This file contains the message headers of all messages in the area. .JDT This file contains the actual message text of all messages in the area. - 228 - .JLR This file contains one record for each user on a system and is used to keep track of the last message number that each user has read in the particular message area. Hudson Database Files ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Since all Hudson message areas are stored in one central database, there is only one subdirectory which holds all related files. This subdirectory is specified in RACONFIG: System > Paths > Msg Base The database stored in this subdirectory is heavily-indexed for fast access. The database is composed of several files which are outlined below: Filename Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── LASTREAD.BBS This file contains one record for each user on a system and is used to keep track of the last message number each user has read in any given message area. MSGHDR.BBS This file holds all message and message header information except for the actual message text and is the primary reference file. Due to the amount of information present it can grow to be quite large. Therefore, smaller index files are usually used to locate a particular message where the MSGHDR.BBS can be consulted for greater detail. MSGIDX.BBS This is the primary searching index-file. It is very small, and therefore any search through this file is extremely fast. It is referenced mainly to: * Find a particular message number. * Find the next message in a particular message area. * Find the next active message in any area. MSGINFO.BBS This file contains one record of general information about the entire Hudson database. This provides RemoteAccess with a database information summary without the - 229 - requirement of scanning the enitre message-base. This file holds information such as the lowest and highest message numbers and total number of messages (to name a few). MSGTOIDX.BBS This is an index file used to perform a mail-box check for a particular user as quickly as possible. MSGTXT.BBS This file contains only the textual portions of all messages in the message-base. Something in Common ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Each type of message database format allows fast searches without the need for memory-resident programs such as BTRIEVE which is used in conjunction with some BBS software packages. RemoteAccess maintains both types of message database formats through the use of one utility program; RAMSG. Whether using one message database format or both, RAMSG is the only maintenance utility required. We'll explain more about RAMSG later in this chapter. LIMITATIONS Every database structure has its limitations. Due to the Hudson database file structures, there is a maximum physical limit on the number of messages it can contain. As a whole, the maximum number of messages supported by the Hudson format is approximately 16,000. There is also a limitation on the value of the highest numbered message, which may never exceed 32,767. It is good practice to regularly renumber the message database to ensure that this limit is never exceeded. This is done using the RAMSG maintenance utility outlined in the next section. The JAM database, on the other hand, is limited only by the amount of free disk space available. Each message area is limited to just over 2 billion messages, though we doubt you will encounter this limitation. - 230 - MAINTENANCE RAMSG is the RemoteAccess message database maintenance utility. It's primary function is to trim the number of messages in the database, keeping it at a manageable level. RACONFIG provides the ability to specify thresholds for each individual message area. RAMSG uses this information (stored in MESSAGES.RA) to determine what messages should be deleted and when. For more information on setting message retention thresholds, see RACONFIG: Manager > Msg Areas > Days Old, Days Rcvd, Max Msgs If any of the threshold values of the fields is set to zero, RAMSG ignores that option. For example, if the Max Msgs field is set to zero, RAMSG will not delete messages based on the number of messages contained in that area. You should ensure that the threshold fields are configured prior to running RAMSG to avoid inadvertently deleting messages. RAMSG will also attempt to repair damaged message databases using a number of integrity checks. If RAMSG detects that the message database is damaged in any way, it will automatically re-create index files (even if they are missing) and warn of possible problems. All of RAMSG's activities are recorded in the system log. Some options are provided for statistical information. Examine the following example of a simple RAMSG PACK operation: ---------- Tue 06 Apr 93, RAMSG 2.00 Pack # 12:38:08 2 of 2541 records are deleted # 12:38:09 Writing new message base files # 12:38:27 Space saved: 1732 bytes, 0% Running RAMSG ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Running RAMSG without specifying any switches on the command-line, results in the following help display. RAMSG; RemoteAccess 2.50 Message maintenance utility Copyright (C) 1996 Gerard J. van der Land. All rights reserved. Usage: RAMSG <command> [parameters] Commands: - 231 - Index Create new index files Link Create/update reply chains and clean subjects Pack Pack and renumber the message base Purge Delete messages according to age or number Run 'RAMSG <command> ?' to get information about [parameters]. When invoking RAMSG from the command-line, supply the operation command followed by any optional parameters. Each of the operation commands is explained in the following pages along with any optional parameters it accepts. INDEX ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Usage: RAMSG INDEX [parameters] Creates new index files (MSGIDX.BBS, MSGTOIDX.BBS and MSGINFO.BBS for Hudson format message databases and *.JDX for JAM message databases). Optionally deletes crosslinked messages and messages in invalid areas. The Renumber parameter enables you to renumber all messages if PACK is unable to, however does not update user LastRead pointers. Parameters: -Delete Delete crosslinked messages (Hudson only). -Recover Delete messages in invalid areas (Hudson only). -Renumber Renumber message numbers. LINK ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Usage: RAMSG LINK [parameters] Create/update or remove reply chains in all areas. Reply chains are messages that are linked together, usually by subject matter. Parameters: -Clean Remove "Re:" and "(R)" references from message subjects during operation. These are inserted by some message processors to denote messages which are a part of a reply chain or message thread. -Remove Remove all reply chains. This unlinks all existing message threads. - 232 - PACK ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Usage: RAMSG PACK [parameters] Packs the message database files by removing deleted messages and (optionally) renumbering messages. You can optionally specify to purge messages. Parameters: -Backup Keep the original database files as a backup (.BAK). -Force Force overwriting of existing database files. Use this option when there is not enough free disk space to create backup files during operations (Hudson only). -Overwrite Overwrite existing files only if there is not enough free disk space to create backup files during operations (Hudson only). -Renumber Renumber messages (updates reply chains and LastRead pointers as well. -Purge Delete messages based on the threshold information contained in MESSAGES.RA. -Delete Delete any crosslinked messages (Hudson only). -Recover Delete messages in invalid areas (Hudson only). PURGE ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Usage: RAMSG PURGE Deletes messages according to age and number based on threshold information stored in MESSAGES.RA. This operation accepts no optional parameters. Examples: The following examples illustrate how RAMSG is used in most popular installations. RAMSG INDEX -Delete -Recover Creates new database index files, deletes crosslinked messages and messages in invalid areas and also renumbers the database. - 233 - RAMSG LINK -Clean Creates and/or updates the reply chains in all message areas, removing "Re:" and "(R)" references. RAMSG PACK -Overwrite -Renumber -Purge -Delete Removes deleted messages from the database. Also deletes messages based on the threshold criteria stored in MESSAGES.RA. Deletes crosslinked messages and renumbers the database. Overwrites existing database files only if there is not enough free disk space to make backup files. Errorlevels ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RAMSG returns an errorlevel after each operation to allow management within a batch file. Errorlevel Condition ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 0 Successful completion. 3 Fatal error detected by start up code. 251 Configuration file version ID mismatch. 252 Incorrect DOS version. 253 Insufficient disk space available. 254 Insufficient memory available. 255 Disk error or missing configuration data. - 234 - Chapter 7 File Database Administration * * * * Database files used by RemoteAccess can be processed faster than text files used by other BBS packages. Databases are used to quicken response time and add capabilities and flexibility to the system. This chapter details the specifications of the file database system as well as how this system is administrated and maintained. - 235 - ABOUT THE FILE DATABASE The file database system supports up to 65535 file areas with each area containing up to 65535 database entries. The overall file list size supported is 2 gigabytes. The overall database structure provides fast file operations and offers specialized support through external utility programs which take advantage of the structured database. The first step in setting up your file system is to create the desired file areas and/or file groups using RACONFIG. For specific information, see the Configuration chapter and these RACONFIG sections: Manager > File Areas Manager > File Groups Once file groups (optional) and individual areas have been created, you may take advantage of several utility programs included which are specifically designed to make administration an easy task. Previous versions used a text-file-based file system which was centered around a FILES.BBS text file which contained filenames and descriptions for each file in a given area. One of these files existed in each area that was configured. This system was developed early in the BBS evolution process and was considered an acceptable standard. However, it does not lend itself well to fast, efficient file operations. RemoteAccess uses the database for all aspects of file retrieval. The actual files themselves are not accessed until they are downloaded or otherwise processed by specific menu commands. This means that operations such as file searches realize an increase in speed of up to several hundred percent, especially when using CD-ROM file areas. By using a file database listing, more information about each file can be stored and used by the BBS. In text-based file systems, this is usually limited to information provided by the operating system such as filename, date, and size. That's not a lot to go on, is it? By using a structured database, even more information is stored such as how many times a file has been downloaded, who uploaded the file, the date the file was uploaded, download credit cost and much more. This means that if a file is on disk but not in the database, RemoteAccess will be completely unaware of its existence. It is therefore important that your database be kept up to date. The utilities described in this chapter will help you do just that. - 236 - Administration Utilities ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ In addition to the functions in RACONFIG which allow you to create and modify file areas and groups, three external utilities are also included which provide administrative functions such as converting existing text-based file systems and maintaining the database. Each of these utilities is outlined separately in this section. GENFBASE.EXE ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This utility provides a means of upgrading from a FILES.BBS file system to the current database format. It is likely that you will only need to use this program once when upgrading RemoteAccess, although it is also useful when adding file database entries for new CD-ROMs. This program is used to generate the actual database files from one or more conventional FILES.BBS format lists. It accepts no command-line parameters, and prompts for operational parameters during actual runtime operations. Any file areas that are processed are first deleted from the file database if they already exist. The areas are then rebuilt using the parameters you supply during runtime operations. The following checklist procedure outlines the prompts you must answer when running GENFBASE. Each prompt is given along with an explanation of the information being prompted for. To convert one or more existing FILES.BBS file areas to the new file database format, or to add CD-ROM areas to the database: 1) Define the file areas to be added/processed using RACONFIG, entering the proper directory paths to the areas to be processed. 2) Change to the RemoteAccess system directory. 3) Execute GENFBASE.EXE 4) Previous versions of RemoteAccess used a FILES.CTL file to specify files that are free and/or password protected. If this file exists, it will be processed in order to maintain the settings it contains. For example, if you specified that all files in a given directory were free files, GENFBASE will maintain this setting when the area is processed. - 237 - 5) Next, GENFBASE will ask a series of questions to determine the operational parameters it must use. Each of the questions are explained below: ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Start at area# : │ └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ Enter the first file area number to be processed. For example, if you have areas 1 through 10 defined and would like to process all areas, a value of 1 would be entered as the starting area number. ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Stop at area# : │ └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ Enter the last file area number to be processed. For example, if you have areas 1 through 10 defined and would like to process all areas, a value of 10 would be entered as the area number to stop at. ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Name of file list : │ └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ If all of the file areas to be processed contain a FILES.BBS list in each of the area directories, press <ENTER> to accept the default setting of FILES.BBS. If the areas to be processed are CD-ROM or other areas, continue reading to determine the setting needed in this field. There are a variety of CD-ROMS available for use on BBS. Some of these include a FILES.BBS file list inside each file area directory while others contain a separate directory which holds all file lists. GENFBASE can accommodate either variety through the use of this parameter. If the CD-ROM file areas being imported contain a file listing called FILES.BBS within the same directory, press <ENTER> to select the default FILES.BBS setting. This will instruct GENFBASE to process a file list called FILES.BBS located in the same directory as the files being imported. Most new CD-ROMs use this format. If the file lists reside in the same directories as the files being imported but are not called FILES.BBS, enter the name of the file list. Wildcard characters are valid within the filename. Additionally, specifying the @ macro will cause the file area number being processed to be expanded in its place. - 238 - For example, if each of the file area directories contains a file list called DIRnn (where nn is the area number), and you have built your file areas to match the file area numbers on the CD-ROM (i.e. CD-ROM area 1 is configured as RemoteAccess file area 1) you could enter: DIR@ On the other hand, if each of the file area directories contains a file list called DIRnn but your RemoteAccess file area numbers do not match the CD-ROM area numbers, you can use a wildcard specification. For example, if the CD-ROM file area is number 37 and the file list is called DIR37, you could enter: DIR* If the CD-ROM contains a separate directory which holds all file lists, you should enter the filename with a path (for example, the CD-ROM contains a directory called \TEXT which holds file lists named DIR1 through DIR50). If this is the case, then it is important to note that if your RemoteAccess file area numbers do not match the CD-ROM file area numbers, each file area being imported must be processed individually (i.e. you cannot import a range of areas in this scenario). The following example scenarios illustrate this. Scenario #1 ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Conditions: 1. Your CD-ROM contains file areas numbered 1 through 50. 2. The file lists are contained in one directory called \TEXT. 3. File lists are named DIR1 through DIR50. 4. Your RemoteAccess file areas are built to match the CD-ROM file areas (i.e. RemoteAccess file area number 1 points to the CD-ROM directory for CD-ROM file area number 1). Explanation: In this scenario, you can import a range of file areas. You should enter the path and filename of the file lists using the @ macro. For example: E:\TEXT\DIR@ Then, when GENFBASE is importing file area 1, it will - 239 - process the file list called DIR1 in the \TEXT directory on the CD-ROM (drive E: in this example). Scenario #2 ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Conditions: 1. Your CD-ROM contains file areas numbered 1 through 50. 2. The file lists are contained in one directory called \TEXT. 3. File lists are named DIR1 through DIR50. 4. Your RemoteAccess file areas are not built to match the CD-ROM file areas (i.e. RemoteAccess file area number 100 points to the CD-ROM directory for CD-ROM file area number 1). Explanation: In this scenario, you cannot import a range of file areas. You should process each area individually, entering the full path and filename of the corresponding file list. For example, if you are importing RemoteAccess file area number 100 which points to CD-ROM file area number 1, enter: E:\TEXT\DIR1 Then, when GENFBASE is importing file area 100, it will process the file list called DIR1 in the \TEXT directory on the CD-ROM (drive E: in this example). The flexibility of this parameter will allow you to import CD-ROM file areas quickly and easily. ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Do you have file download counters (y,N)? │ └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ Some third party utility programs and file transfer doors provided counters embedded in file descriptions which provided a means of indicating how many times a file has been downloaded. If the file descriptions contained in the file lists to be processed include such counters, answer Y to this question. ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Counter column offset in FILES.BBS : │ └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ - 240 - If you answered Y to the previous question, GENFBASE will need to know the starting column number for download counters. This should not be the starting column of any characters such as brackets or parenthesis that might surround the counter. Instead, it must be the column number where the actual counter number starts. GENFBASE will read the existing download counters starting at the column number specified, up to the next non-numeric character. The existing download counters will then be imported into the file database. ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ If you have CD-ROM areas, do they have download │ │ counters (y,N)? │ └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ If you indicated that you do have file download counters, GENFBASE will ask if you also have download counters in any CD-ROM areas that are to be processed. If there are CD-ROM areas included in the range of areas to be processed, and the file lists associated with these areas contain download counters, answer "Y" to this question. NOTE: If you are importing areas which reside both on a hard disk and a CD-ROM, OR all areas to be processed do not contain download counters, you should import these areas separately. Additionally, you should not import a range of areas that has download counters which start at varying column positions. In other words, batch import "like" areas only. ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Do you have file descriptions which contain CR/LFs in │ │ FILES.BBS (y,N)? │ └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ Your answer to this question will determine how file list lines beginning with an indent will be processed. Generally, indented lines are considered to be comment lines which are not associated with a filename or description. But some external file transfer doors and most CD-ROM file lists use multiple-line file descriptions which begin with an indented line. Therefore, GENFBASE must be able to distinguish between comment lines and description lines that begin with indents. For example, a file listing that uses this format might look like this: MYFILE.ZIP This is a filename which contains more than one description line. Notice that the additional lines each begin with an - 241 - indent. Or, it might look like this: EA150.ZIP 167733 05-01-93 Game door for RemoteAccess | that is a blast to play. If the file lists that are to be processed contain this format, or use multiple-line file descriptions which begin with the + or | characters, answer "Y" to this question. When this is the case, GENFBASE will process lines beginning with an indent as part of the previous file description up to the next blank line. Therefore, comment lines are still valid as long as they are preceded by a blank line (which is generally the case). If the file descriptions in the listings to be processed do not use this format, answer "N" to this question. NOTE: GENFBASE automatically strips leading + and | characters from multiple-line file descriptions. If your existing file list format includes these characters, there is no need to remove them prior to processing. ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Description column offset (0 for FILES.BBS format) : │ └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ Most conventional file listings contain the filename followed by a space character and the file description. However, in some cases (such as in cases where file download counters are used as well as in CD-ROM file lists) the description of the file might actually start at a specific column number. If this is the case, enter the starting column number of the actual file description. Enter 0 (the default) if you are converting a conventional FILES.BBS listing. ┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Expand wildcards (y,N)? │ └─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ Conventional FILES.BBS listings allowed the use of wildcard characters within the filename. Then, when a file list was displayed, all files in the directory path that matched the wildcard specification were displayed. If you answer "Y" to this question, GENFBASE will import all files that match any wildcard specifications that are found, appending the same file description to each match located. If you answer "N" to this question, GENFBASE will import the single filename and wildcard specification along with the - 242 - associated description. Then, when the file list is displayed by RemoteAccess, a dynamic real-time search is performed in the specified directory path for filenames which match the wildcard specification. 6) Upon answering the last question, GENFBASE will begin processing operations by first deleting any existing file database information for the areas to be processed. New database files will be built to replace any deleted files using the parameters you supplied. This process may be repeated at any time for any area for which a file list exists. Additionally, FILES.BBS lists may be generated for any or all areas using the RAFILE utility discussed later in this section. RAFILE.EXE ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ RAFILE is the file database batch maintenance utility. It is completely command-line driven and provides numerous functions designed to assist you in maintaining and administrating your file database system. Since no interaction is required once a command-line is passed to RAFILE, any of its functions may be performed from within your BBS batch file. To list a summary of command-line parameters accepted by RAFILE, enter "RAFILE ?" followed by pressing <ENTER>. The following information will appear on your display: ADD <area#> <name> [uploader_name] [description] INDEX [area#] CLEAN [area#] [/KM] COMPRESS [area#] EXPORT [area#] [output file] IMPORT [area#] [input file] [/ERASE] [/Uuploader_name] KILL <filespec> [area#] LOCK <filespec> [area#] UNLOCK <filespec> [area#] FILELIST <output file> [area#] [/Ssecurity] [/Ddays old] [/Bbanner] [/Ffooter] [/NOHDR] [/7BIT] [/FORMF] SORT [area#] [DATE] [REVERSE] (default=NAME,FORWARD) ADOPT <filespec> [area#] UPDATE <filespec> [area#] [TOUCH|TOUCHMOD] REARC [area#] Refer to this display for usage syntax throughout this section. Parameters enclosed in "[" and "]" are optional while parameters enclosed in "<" and ">" are required. If an area# of zero (or no area number) is specified, RAFILE - 243 - will process all areas. Wildcards are valid in all <filespec> parameters. It is possible to process multiple, specific file areas in one pass. There are two steps required to do this. First, create a text file which contains the areas you wish to process. The area numbers may be separated by spaces or commas, and a range of areas may be specified by inserting a "-" character between two numbers. Examine the following sample file. Filename: AREA.LST 1 3 5 10 15-23 31-54 57 60 62 To specify all areas within a specific group, prefix the area number with the g character. For example, the line 1 2 3 G5 9 would process file areas 1, 2, 3, 9 and every area in group 5. This format is also valid on the command-line. The second step is to specify the name of this text file on the RAFILE command-line in place of the area number. You must precede the filename with the @ character. For example, to use our example AREA.LST file to create a master file list for those areas, you might use the command-line: RAFILE FILELIST MASTER.LST @AREA.LST NOTE: RAFILE will not process any area that is currently in use by RemoteAccess or RAMGR in order to avoid any possible conflicts. RAFILE Command-line Parameter Descriptions ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The following listing describes each command-line parameter that RAFILE accepts. ADD <area#> <name> [uploader_name] [description]. ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Simply adds a new file to the database. This is like a local upload. Example: "RAFILE ADD 1 C:\DL\MFILE.ARJ Andrew_Milner This is a program to examine and verify your database." This would add the file MFILE.ARJ located in the C:\DL directory to file area 1. The uploader's name will be set - 244 - to Andrew_Milner. The remaining text will be added to the description of the file. ADOPT <filespec> [area#] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Add all matching files to the database in the specified area that are not already in the database. This allows you to add files to the database directly from the DOS command-line. Example: RAFILE ADOPT *.* 100 Adopts all files in the directory for file area 100 which are not already in the database. INDEX [area#] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Regenerate the quick index file for the specified area. This is usually only used if the index becomes corrupted. If no area number is specified, all areas are processed. Example: RAFILE INDEX Regenerates the quick index file for all areas (since no area number was specified on the command-line). CLEAN [area#] [/KM] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Kills and/or moves files from the database (and on disk) based on the threshold information stored for each file area in RACONFIG. Refer to the individual file area settings: DL days, FD days and MoveArea in RACONFIG: Manger > File Areas This also performs a COMPRESS operation. The optional /KM switch will cause all file entries marked a MISSING to be removed from the database. If no area number is specified, all areas are processed. Example: RAFILE CLEAN 10 /KM Removes or moves files from file area 10 based on the DL - 245 - days, FD days and MoveArea settings assigned to that area. Additionally, any missing files are removed from the database. NOTE: RAFILE will never remove comments from the file database. COMPRESS [area#] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Optimizes the database files and removes deleted entries. This function is also performed whenever the CLEAN operation is executed. EXPORT [area#] [output_file] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Generates a conventional FILES.BBS listing for the specified area in the actual file directory unless a full path and output filename is specified. If no area number is specified, all areas are processed. Examples: RAFILE EXPORT Creates a FILES.BBS file listing in each file area directory. RAFILE EXPORT 100 C:\DL\MYFILE.TXT Creates a file listing for area 100 called MYFILE.TXT which is written in the C:\DL directory. IMPORT [area#] [input_file] [/ERASE] /Uuploader_name] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Imports files (and their descriptions) from FILES.BBS in the file directory (or another input file, if specified) into the database. The /ERASE switch will kill the input file after the import has been completed. All imported files will have their upload date set to the current date to make them appear as new. The Uploader field for each imported file will be sent to the Sysop name *as defined in RACONFIG) unless overridden with the optional /U parameter. NOTE: When specifying an alternate Uploader_Name it is important to note that any spaces in the name must be substituted with the underscore "_" character. Examples: - 246 - RAFILE IMPORT 10 Imports the file list FILES.BBS from the directory path for area 10, setting the uploader name to Sysop since none was specified on the command-line. RAFILE IMPORT 10 A:\FILE.LST /UJoe_Doe Imports files in the directory for area 10 using the file list A:\FILE.LST. The uploader name is set to Joe Doe for each file imported. KILL <filespec> [area#] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Kill all matching files from the database and from disk. This also performs a COMPRESS operation. Example: RAFILE KILL MONEY.* Kills all files matching the wildcard pattern MONEY.* from all file areas. LOCK <filespec> [area#] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Lock all matching files from deletion or moving. When a file is locked, it cannot be moved or deleted using the CLEAN function or by the RemoteAccess Manager (RAMGR). Example: RAFILE LOCK ALLFILES.ARJ 10 Locks the file ALLFILES.ARJ in file area 10. UNLOCK <filespec> [area#] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This function is the reverse of the Lock function just described. All matching files are unlocked. FILELIST <output_file> [area#] [/Ssecurity] [/Ddays_old] [/Bbanner] [/Ffooter] [/NOHDR] [/7BIT] [/FORMF] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Generate a master file list of the areas specified. If the /S<security> switch is used, only areas of <security> list - 247 - security or lower will be included in the list. The /D<days_old> option includes only files which are <days_old> old or newer. You may also specify a /B<banner_file> which will be added automatically to the top of the list. Specifying the /NOHDR switch disables the header that is normally inserted at the top of each area. Specifying the /7BIT switch causes all high-ASCII characters in the header to be translated to their 7-bit equivalents. Specifying the /FORM switch causes a formfeed to be inserted at the end of each area. Examples: RAFILE FILELIST MASTER.LST @AREA.LST Creates a master file list including all areas specified in the file AREA.LST, writing the list to the file MASTER.LST. RAFILE FILELIST MASTER.LST G1 /S50 /BC:\RA\BANNER.TXT Creates a master file list including all file areas in group 1. Additionally, only file areas with a list security of 50 or lower will be included. A banner file called BANNER.TXT is inserted at the beginning of the list from the C:\RA directory. SORT [area#] [DATE] [REVERSE] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Sorts files by name or date, in forward or reverse order. Automatically sorts files in between comment lines. If DATE is specified, files are sorted by date rather than by name. If REVERSE is specified, files are sorted in reverse order rather than in forward order. Examples: RAFILE SORT Sorts the files in all areas by name and in forward order. RAFILE SORT DATE REVERSE Sorts the files in all areas by date and in reverse order. RAFILE SORT 100 REVERSE Sorts the files in area 100 by name and in reverse order. - 248 - UPDATE <filespec> [area#] [TOUCH|TOUCHMOD] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Update all matching file database entries from actual DOS file information. If TOUCH is specified, the file upload date (not the actual file date) will be changed to the current date unconditionally. If TOUCHMOD is specified, the file upload date is changed to the current date only if DOS reports that the file has been modified since the last UPDATE operation. This allows you to mark any changed files as new. Example: RAFILE UPDATE *.* 10 TOUCHMOD Updates all files in area 10, changing upload dates to the current date for any file that has changed since the last UPDATE function. REARC [area#] ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Re-archives all files in the specified area using the archive type specified for that area in RACONFIG: Manager > File Areas > ArcType NOTE: The only archive types that can be converted are those that have an entry in RACONFIG: Options > Files > Archivers When RAFILE performs this operation, it uses the Rearchive directory defined in RACONFIG: System > Paths > Rearchive All directories below the defined rearchive directory are deleted before and after each file conversion. Example: RAFILE REARC 10 Rearchives all files in area number 10, converting all archive types to the format selected for that area in RACONFIG. - 249 - RAMGR.EXE ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ As discussed in the User Administration chapter, the RemoteAccess Manager is used not only for user administration but for file database administration as well. It provides a module specifically designed for performing file database administrative functions and replaces any third party programs used in conjunction with previous versions of RemoteAccess. The powerful functions of this module allow you to perform such operations as editing file descriptions, moving files, specifying individual file passwords and costs, locking and unlocking files and much more. Virtually all operations may be performed on individual files as well as groups of tagged (or selected) files. RAMGR.EXE resides in the system directory and may be executed by typing RAMGR followed by pressing <ENTER>. When this utility is fired up, it presents a pick-list menu which allows you to select a number of options including Files. You can also fire up RAMGR in file administration mode directly by typing the command RAMGR /F followed by pressing <ENTER>. This method bypasses the initial pick-list menu and places you directly in the file administration portion of the program. In addition to the -F parameter, RAMGR also supports several other command-line switches. They are: -B Run in monochrome (black and white) mode. -N Ignore any missing file area paths (normally RAMGR will not allow you to enter a file area which has an invalid path). -U Edit users only (bypass main menu). See the User Administration chapter for more information. -A Auto-update mode (file editing). Forces an automatic update of all files when an area is entered. If you use the A-U command (explained later in this section) on a regular basis, you may want to use this parameter instead. Once in the files portion of RAMGR, you are presented with a pick-list of files areas from which to choose. You can move the cursor-bar using any of the following keys. UP Moves the cursor-bar up one area. DOWN Moves the cursor-bar down one area. - 250 - PAGE-UP Moves the cursor-bar up one screen page. PAGE-DOWN Moves the cursor-bar down one screen page. HOME Moves the cursor-bar to the first record in the database. END Moves the cursor-bar to the last record in the database. Position the cursor-bar on a valid file area entry and press <ENTER> to bring up that entry. Once in the selected file area, you will notice another pick- list menu which displays each database entry for the file area. Each line contains information about an individual file, or a comment line, all of which may be modified. When first entering RAMGR, file entries are displayed in non-user mode. That is to say that RAMGR uses its own format display entries. Selecting User Mode (explained in the following pages) switches this display to use the format defined by the File List Format field in RACONFIG: Options > Files > List Format The description window near the bottom of the display shows the file description for the file at the current cursor-bar location. Also at the very bottom of the display, you will see the message "(F1) Command summary". Press F1 to display the summarized list of commands available. <Esc> Escape back to file area selection pick-list. <Enter> Edit the entry at the current cursor-bar location. <F2> Edit the description of the file at the current cursor-bar location <SPACEBAR> Drop anchor for file block. You may select several files to perform operations on. Position the cursor-bar on the first file database entry desired and then press <SPACEBAR>. Next, move the cursor-bar down the list. Notice that all files from the point where you dropped the anchor to the current cursor-bar location have become highlighted. Any operation performed next will be performed on all of the highlighted files. <Del> Delete the highlighted file(s). After selecting this option you will be asked whether to delete - 251 - the files as well as database entries. Answering "Y" will cause the file on disk to be deleted as well as the database entry. <Insert> Insert a new file entry at the highlighted position. This allows you to insert a new file database entry at a specific location. When this command is selected, RAMGR prompts for the filename to be inserted, automatically including the drive and path of the current file area. Wildcard characters may be used within the filename entered and are expanded, except when the filename is preceeded by the @ character. SHIFT- Insert a new comment at the highlighted position. INSERT This allows you to insert a comment line at the current cursor-bar location. ALT-A Adopt orphaned files. This works like the ADOPT function of RAFILE. When selected, you will be prompted to enter a filename to adopt. Wildcard characters are accepted. RAMGR searches for all files matching the specified criteria and displays the filenames in a separate window. From this window, you may select/tag files to adopt. Only files in the specified area that do not already exist in the database will be displayed. ALT-B Buffer operations. This command allows you to copy highlighted entries into a buffer, edit the contents of the buffer, paste the buffer contents to a comment or file description, import a disk file to the buffer or export the buffer contents to a disk file. ALT-C Copy highlighted file(s) to another area. Like the hurl command except that the original database entries and files remain in the original area. (See the ALT-H command for more information). ALT-D Toggle file listing display format (user mode is slower). When listing files in the database, RAMGR can alternately use user mode. This displays entries using the file list format defined in RACONFIG: Options > Files > List Format ALT-F Find a file (wildcards valid). Use this option to locate files that match the search criteria - 252 - you specify. If the file is not located in the current file area, you can optionally search all file areas for matches. ALT-G Generate a text file from the current area (FILES.BBS). This option is used to create a FILES.BBS type listing of the current file area. ALT-H Hurl (move) the highlighted file(s) to another area. The file database entries and disk files are moved to the target area and are removed from the source area. ALT-I Import a text file as a comment line. Used to import a disk file as a comment line which is inserted at the current cursor-bar location. ALT-K Find a file (keyword description search). Like the ALT-F command but searches on the file description rather than the filename. ALT-M Move highlighted file(s) within the current area. This option is used to place the highlighted entries at another position within the same area. ALT-P Put a copy of the highlighted file(s) in any directory. This option is used to copy the source file(s) to any valid DOS directory on disk (does not have to be a valid file database area). ALT-R Rename the highlighted file. ALT-S Sort highlighted files. This option is similar to the RAFILE SORT operation but operates only on the highlighted files. To sort the entire area from within RAMGR, simply drop the file anchor on the first entry and press <END> to mark all entries. Then select this option. ALT-T Touch upload date on highlighted files. This option sets the upload date (not the actual file date) of the highlighted file(s) to the current date. ALT-U Update highlighted entries from DOS information. This option sets the date of the highlighted file(s) to the actual DOS file date(s). NOTE: To edit a specific database entry, position the cursor-bar on the desired entry and press <ENTER>. This brings up all of the fields that are associated with each - 253 - individual entry record. File: The file name and size in bytes. Date: The actual DOS file date. Uploader: The name of the person who uploaded the file. Keyword#1 - Up to 5 keywords which may be entered and Keyword#5: later used to search on. Downloads: The number of times the file has been downloaded. Cost: The cost (in credits) that is charged users who download this file. UL Date: The date the file was uploaded. Last DL: The last date the file was downloaded. To change any of these fields, move to the appropriate field and enter the desired information. You can use the <DELETE> and <BACKSPACE> keys to remove any unwanted characters. Press <Esc> when you are finished. In addition to these fields, the flag fields on the right portion of the screen may also be changed. Since a flag may have one of two settings (Yes or No) they are best illustrated by asking a question. Deleted: Should the file be marked for deletion? Unlisted: Should the file be excluded from file lists? Free: Is the file a free file which does not affect download ratios? Locked: Should the file be locked so that it cannot be deleted or moved? NotAvail: Should the file be marked as being unavailable? Missing: Should the file be listed as missing from the file listing? NoTime: Should users be able to download the file without regard to time restrictions? To change a flag setting, move to the appropriate field and press either "Y" or "N". - 254 - When you are finished editing the entry, press <ESCAPE> and answer "Y" or "N" to the "Save changes (Y/n)?" prompt. - 255 - Chapter 8 Questionnaires * * * * Questionnaires are powerful language scripts that allow you to query users for input and take actions based on that input. They can also be used in support of such areas as usage costing and subscription systems. A simple set of script commands gives you access to the flexibility and power that questionnaires provide. - 256 - WHAT IS A QUESTIONNAIRE? Quite simply, a questionnaire is an interactive script language. So what is a script language? We generally think of a language as something subject to interpretation. When we think of scripts, we usually think of something that is written to be read or played back the same way every time. A questionnaire is a script file that you write which is interpreted by RemoteAccess as it is played back. The interpreter recognizes valid statements and acts on them accordingly. Questionnaires can be used for a variety of purposes. You might use one for a user survey to poll your users on a given topic. Or, you might use one to gather information from new users and adjust their settings based on that information. The questionnaire script language supports statements that allow you to record user input, output formatted text, display files, execute external programs, adjust user security levels and access flags, plus much more. Questionnaire script files are ASCII text files which are stored in the questionnaire directory specified for each language that your system supports. This setting can be found in RACONFIG: Manager > Languages > Ques Path You can create questionnaire files using any ASCII text editor. Or, as discussed in the External Support Files chapter, you can even use the control file editor in RACONFIG. Text file control codes are fully supported within a questionnaire which adds to the power and flexibility of a script file. They may be used to display data in much the same way they are used in text files. Or, they may be used to make comparisons against data (an example of which is given later under the IF script command). Just as text files must have certain filename extensions, so too do questionnaires. You already know that questionnaire files must exist in a directory you've previously specified. In addition to this, all questionnaire files must have a filename extension of .Q-A. When RemoteAccess reads the script, it is interpreted and the appropriate statements are processed. Then, if any information is to be written to disk, RemoteAccess writes the information using the base questionnaire filename with an extension of .ASW. For example, if a questionnaire script has a filename of - 257 - VOTE.Q-A, any information that is written to disk from within the script, is written to the file VOTE.ASW. This is known as an answer file. When RemoteAccess reads and interprets a questionnaire script, it doesn't check for upper or lower-case formatting. Therefore, the statement "ASK" can be entered as "ask" or even "AsK" and it will be interpreted the same way. Automatic Questionnaires ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Questionnaires can be executed by using menu function type 12-"Questionnaire" from any menu. In addition to this method, RemoteAccess also supports several questionnaires that are executed automatically under certain conditions. These questionnaires compliment important aspects of running a BBS. Automatic questionnaires are especially useful in adjusting user settings or executing specific functions depending on the conditions that cause the questionnaire to be executed. For example, whenever a new user logs-on, the questionnaire NEWUSER.Q-A is executed. In this script, you might query a new user for specific information such as hobbies or BBS interests. You could also adjust the user's security level and/or access flags based on data that the user has entered. If the conditions required to display an automatic questionnaire are met but the script file itself does not exist, RemoteAccess won't take any action and no error message will be displayed. After all, questionnaires are used to enhance your system and are not mandatory. The automatic questionnaires supported are detailed below. An example of each questionnaire is given in the last section of this chapter. DOBCFAIL.Q-A RemoteAccess can prompt users to re-enter their birth date for verification purposes every certain number of log-ons. This is set in RACONFIG: Options > System > Check DOB This questionnaire is executed if the user fails to enter the correct birth date. It can be used to automatically lower the user's security level or alter access flags which might restrict the user from using the system until properly verified. Upon completion of this questionnaire, the call is terminated. - 258 - NEWUSER.Q-A If this questionnaire file exists, it will be executed automatically whenever a new user logs-on to your system. This is useful for obtaining additional information about your users that is not gathered in the internal new user log-on procedures. NOCREDIT.Q-A Usually used in conjunction with subscription systems, this questionnaire is executed when a user's credit reaches zero if; 1) the user runs out of credits due to the time per-minute cost as defined in the Limits Manager of RACONFIG, or; 2) the user runs out of credits in the menu item per minute cost. If, for whatever reason, a user's credit reaches zero, this questionnaire would give the Sysop the flexibility in what action is to be taken. For example, the system may display a message and lower the user's security level, or perhaps run an external credit card program, or even terminate the session. You can define a usage cost on a per-minute basis in RACONFIG: Manager > Limits > PerMin SUBDATE.Q-A This questionnaire is automatically executed if the user's subscription has expired. You can define the length of each user's subscription in RACONFIG: Options > New Users > Sub days This questionnaire may be used to automatically lower user security levels and notify users that their subscription has expired. It might also be used to execute another questionnaire, a menu function, or even an external program. SUBDAYnn.Q-A This questionnaire provides pre-subscription expiration support. If it exists, this questionnaire will be executed nn days prior to subscription expiration during the log-on process. For example, the questionnaire SUBDAY30.Q-A would be executed if a user whose subscription expires in 30 days logs-on. As you can see, these automatic questionnaires can be quite useful on your system. And by using the script commands outlined in this chapter, you can create questionnaires that - 259 - are indeed quite powerful. Script Command Listing ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The script commands that are supported by RemoteAccess are outlined throughout this section. Each command name is given along with the expected syntax, description and usage example for each. Finally, the last section of this chapter includes some example questionnaire scripts which show you how a script might be practically applied. Ask ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: Ask <len> <var num> Description: Waits for the user to enter a string of up to <len> characters and stores the string in the variable <var num>. Valid values for <len> are 1 to 255 and <var num> may be any number between 1 and 50. Example: Ask 30 5 Waits for the user to enter a string of up to 30 characters in length. The user's input is stored in variable number 5. Assign ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: Assign <var num> <"literal" | #<var num>> Description: Assigns the text specified in <"literal"> to variable number <var num>. The literal portion of the assignment must be enclosed in quotation marks. Alternatively this command can be used to copy one questionnaire variable into another, by using the "#" symbol followed by the variable number you want to copy from. Example: Assign 1 "Hi There!" Display "|Var 1 is: " ListAnswer 1 Would assign "Hi There!" to variable number one and output "Var 1 is: Hi There!" to the display. - 260 - Capitalise ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: Capitalise <ON | OFF> Description: Turns on or off automatic input capitalization. This allows you to force user input into all upper or lower-case letters. The state to which this is set remains in effect until another Capitalise command is used. Example: Capitalise ON Forces all user input to be capitalized until a Capitalise OFF command is encountered. ChangeColor ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: ChangeColor <foreground> <background> Description: Changes the color of the text if the user has ANSI graphics enabled. The color selected remains the default color for all subsequent text displayed, until the end of the questionnaire script or until the next ChangeColor command is encountered. The valid color codes are the same as those listed in the Control Codes Listing section of the External Support Files chapter. Example: ChangeColor 1 0 Changes the text color to a blue foreground on a black background until the end of the script is reached or until another ChangeColor command is encountered. ClearScreen ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: ClearScreen Description: Clears the user's screen if the user has enabled screen clearing codes. Otherwise, this command is ignored by the interpreter. Example: ClearScreen This would simply clear the user's screen. - 261 - Commit ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: Commit Description: Normally, user responses are stored in a buffer and written to disk when the questionnaire terminates. The COMMIT command will force the contents of the buffer to be written to disk immediately. Example: Commit This would cause all user responses stored in memory to be written to disk immediately. DefineOutput ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: DefineOutput <filename> Description: Normally, questionnaire responses are written to a file called nnn.ASW (where nnn is the original questionnaire name) in the system directory. This command allows the sysop to specify the name of the output file. Example: DefineOutput C:\RA\ANSWERS\NEWUSER.TXT This would cause all user responses to be stored in the file C:\RA\ANSWERS\NEWUSER.TXT. Display ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: Display "<text> [ | ]" Description: Displays the specified text on the screen. If the pipe symbol "|" is included, a carriage return line feed sequence is displayed in its place. If the pipe symbol is omitted, the cursor remains positioned at the end of the text displayed. Text file control codes are fully supported and may be embedded in <text> (see the External Support Files chapter for information on text file control codes). All text to be displayed (including the pipe symbol, if specified) must be enclosed in quotation marks as shown in the example below. Example: Display "Welcome aboard! | " - 262 - In this example, the text Welcome aboard! would be displayed to the user. The cursor would be positioned at the beginning of the next line since the pipe symbol was specified. DisplayFile ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: DisplayFile <1-8 character filename> Description: Causes a text file to be displayed in the same manner used by menu function type 5-"Display text file". The text file must exist in the text files directory and must also conform to filename conventions as outlined in the chapter on External Support Files. Example: DisplayFile BBSRULES Would display the file BBSRULES.A?? from the text files directory. Once the file has been displayed the user is returned to the questionnaire. EndIF ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: EndIF Description: Used in conjunction with the IF command, this signifies the end of an IF. The function of IF and EndIF are more fully explained under the EndIF command in this section. Example: See the IF script command. Exec ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: Exec <command line> Description: Executes an external program in a DOS shell in the same manner as that of menu function type 7 - Run an external program in a shell. All command-line parameters that are valid in menu function type 7 may be used here as well. Example: Exec C:\RA\NEWMAIL.EXE *M This would cause RemoteAccess to execute the DOS command NEWMAIL.EXE from the C:\RA directory while the user is on-line. The *M - 263 - parameter instructs RemoteAccess to swap itself out of memory before executing the command (useful for running programs that require large amounts of memory). For full details on the parameters available, see menu function type 7 in the Menu Administration chapter. GetChoice ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: GetChoice <valid choices> <var num> Description: Waits for the user to enter one of the characters in <valid choices> and stores the response in the variable <var num>. The character entered is not case-sensitive. Example: GetChoice YN 2 This command would wait for the user to press either the "Y" or the "N" character, storing the response in variable number 2. Gosub ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: Gosub <label> Description: Causes the script interpreter to jump to the label specified as <label>. The label may be 1 to 12 characters in length and may contain any combination of letters and numbers. Labels should be preceded by the colon ":" character. The point at which the jump occurs from is saved, and may be returned to by executing the "Return" questionnaire command. Multiple "Gosub" commands may be used in a row, and may be nested up to 50 deep. Example: IF 5 = "Y" Gosub MyLabel EndIF Display "Continue processing..|" Quit :MyLabel Display "Here we are!|" Return In this example, if variable number five is equal to "Y", the script interpreter will jump - 264 - to the label MyLabel, display "Here we are", and then return to the command immediately after the Gosub. Goto ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: Goto <label> Description: Causes the script interpreter to jump to the label specified as <label>. The label may be 1 to 12 characters in length and may contain any combination of letters and numbers. Labels should be preceded by the colon ":" character. Each questionnaire script may contain up to 50 labels. Example: IF 5 = "Y" Goto MyLabel EndIF Quit :MyLabel Display "Here we are!|" Quit In this example, if variable number five is equal to "Y", the script interpreter will jump to the label MyLabel and continue processing from that point. IF ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: IF <var num[~]> <operator> <operand> Description: This command is used to perform comparisons within your script file and take actions based on the results of the comparisons. The result of an IF comparison is considered to be either true or false. If the comparison is found to be true, then all lines up to the next EndIF are processed by the interpreter. In case you aren't familiar with logical comparisons, refer to the examples listed below and later in this chapter. They will help you to better understand the purpose and functionality of this command. Specifically, this command compares the contents of the variable <var num> with the contents of <operand> using the type of - 265 - comparison specified in <operator>. <Var num> may be any variable number between 1 and 50 followed by the optional numeric identifier "~". When a tilde character "~" is specified after <var num> it indicates that a numeric comparison is to be made instead of a text string comparison. <Operator> may be any combination of: = Equal to... < Less than... > Greater than... <Operand> values may be: * Literal text enclosed in quotation marks. * A variable number specified as <#var num>. * Any text file control code. When comparing the contents of a variable specified as <var num> with the contents of another variable specified as <operand>, the <operand> variable number must be preceded by the # character. NOTE: This command may not be nested. That is to say that you cannot use an IF command between other IF and EndIF commands. Examples: IF 1 <> #2 Would return true if the contents of variable number one was not equal to the contents of variable number 2. IF 5~ <= ^KO Would return true if the value of variable number five was less than or equal to the user's time remaining. Notice that the "~" was used to indicate that a numeric comparison was to be made. Also notice the usage of the text file control code that returns the user's time remaining. IF 5 = "LUXEMBOURG" Display "Hey, that's where I live!|" EndIF In this example, the interpreter would check - 266 - to see if variable number 5 was equal to the string LUXEMBOURG. If true, the text "Hey, that's where I live!" would be displayed. If the contents of variable number 5 did not match, the statement would have been considered to be false and the interpreter would jump to the EndIF statement. IF 1 <> #2 Display "Variables 1 and 2 are different!|" EndIF In this example, the contents of variable numbers one and two would be compared. If they were not equal, the text "Variables 1 and 2 are different!" would be displayed. ListAnswer ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: ListAnswer <var num> Description: Displays the contents of variable number <var num> followed by a carriage return and line feed sequence. Example: Display "Enter your name: " Ask 30 5 Display "You entered: " ListAnswer 5 In this example, the user is prompted to enter their name which can contain a maximum of 30 characters. The name entered is stored in variable number 5. Next, the text "You entered:" is displayed followed by the contents of variable number 5 and a carriage return and line feed sequence. MenuCmnd ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: MenuCmnd <num> <data> Description: Executes a menu command just as if it were executed from within a menu. Simply specify the menu function number <num> followed by the contents of the optional data field <data>. NOTE: For obvious reasons, menu function types for Goto (type 1), Gosub (type 2), Return from Gosub (type 3) and Questionnaire (type 12), etc. may not be used. - 267 - Example: MenuCmnd 27 60 /T=Andrew_Milner This example would run menu function type 27- "Postmessage" with an optional data field of 60 /T=Andrew_Milner which would post a message in message area 60 and address it to Andrew Milner. For a full list of menu function types, refer to the Menu Administration chapter. OutputAnswer ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: OutputAnswer <"descriptor"> <var num> Description: Writes the literal text string specified as <"descriptor"> followed by the contents of variable number <var num> to the questionnaire answer file. Text file control codes are fully supported within the text descriptor (see the External Support Files chapter for information on control codes). As described earlier, the answer file is given the same name as the questionnaire file but has a filename extension of .ASW. Example: OutputAnswer "Hobbies : " 6 In this example the string "Hobbies : " followed by the string stored in variable number 6 are written to the answer file. If this answer is the first answer written to the answer file, it is a good idea to first use the PostInfo command which writes a header to the answer file. For example, if a PostInfo command was used followed by the above example with Chess stored in variable number 6, the resulting entry in the answer file would look similar to this: **Joe Doe completed questionnaire at 20:00 on 21-Jan-93** Hobbies : Chess PostInfo ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: PostInfo Description: This command is used to write a header to the answer file which contains the user's name - 268 - along with the date and time that the information was posted to the answer file. Example: PostInfo In this example, if the user's name was Joe Doe, the following line would be written to the answer file: **Joe Doe completed questionnaire at 20:00 on 21-Jan-93** Quit ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: Quit Description: Terminates the script and returns operation to the BBS. Example: Quit This command would simply cause RemoteAccess to stop processing the script and return to the BBS. Return ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: Return Description: (See the Gosub command). Transfers control back to the command immediately after the last Gosub command executed. SetFlag ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: SetFlag <flag set> <flag number> <ON|OFF> Description: This command can be used to turn the specified user access flag ON or OFF. The <flag set> variable is either A, B, C, or D and <flag number> is a number from 1 to 8. Changes made using this statement are permanently recorded within the user database. Example: SetFlag C8 OFF In this example, user access flag C8 would be turned OFF. - 269 - SetSecurity ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: SetSecurity <sec level> Description: This command is used to change the user's security level. The level may be any number between 1 and 65,535. Any changes to the user's security level will be permanently recorded in the user database. Example: SetSecurity 1000 In this example, the current user's security level would be set to 1000. Notice that a comma should not be used when specifying a number greater than 999. WaitEnter ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Syntax: WaitEnter Description: Waits for the user to press the <ENTER> key. Any other keys the user might press are ignored. Example: Display "Press [Enter] to continue" WaitEnter Displays the text "Press [Enter] to continue" and then waits for the user to press <ENTER>. Also, the communications driver outbound buffer is flushed prior to processing this command. Example Questionnaires ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ The following examples demonstrate the use of the automatic questionnaire script files that RemoteAccess supports. While these are not extremely elaborate, they will give you an idea of how you might apply these to your system. You may wish to read through each questionnaire, cross-referencing the script commands listed in the previous section. DOBCFAIL.Q-A ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This example script file notifies the Sysop of a possible security violation. It also prompts the user to enter the reason that an incorrect date of birth was entered. The - 270 - user is prompted to enter a good time for the Sysop to call to straighten things out. The user is disonnected automatically when this questionnaire is completed. PostInfo Assign 1 "Date Of Birth Verfication Failure" OutputAnswer "Security violation: " 1 ClearScreen ChangeColor 12 0 Display "You have failed to verify your date of birth!|" Display "Since this is a security violation, please enter|" Display "the reason that you entered an incorrect date.|" Display "|Reason: " Ask 50 2 OutputAnswer "Reason: " 2 ChangeColor 15 0 Display "|The System Operator will review your response as|" Display "soon as possible. If the Sysop needs to contact|" Display "you, when would be a good time to call?|" Display "|When: " Ask 50 3 OutputAnswer "Good time to call: " 3 ChangeColor 14 0 Display "|Your answers have been recorded and the Sysop|" Display "will contact you as soon as possible. Goodbye!|" Quit NEWUSER.Q-A ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This is a simple example of a new user questionnaire script. If the user elects not to answer the questions, the script is exited. However, if the user completes the questionnaire, security level and access flags are altered. PostInfo Display "Do you wish to continue?" GetChoice YN 1 IF 1 = "N" Display "|Sorry, your security has not been upgraded.|" OutputAnswer "User did not answer questions" 1 Quit EndIf Display "Please enter your FULL name: " Ask 35 2 Display "What is your occupation? " Ask 40 3 Display "What is the main reason you're calling?" Ask 40 4 Display "Please enter any comments you might have:" Ask 50 5 OutputAnswer "Name : " 2 - 271 - OutputAnswer "Occupation : " 3 OutputAnswer "Reason : " 4 OutputAnswer "Comments : " 5 Display "Thank you for completing this questionnaire|" SetSecurity 50 SetFlag C3 OFF Quit NOCREDIT.Q-A ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── This questionnaire takes action when the user's credit reaches zero. The user may elect to purchase more system credit either by mailing a personal check to an address listed or use a credit card door to charge the purchase. PostInfo Assign 1 "Reached zero credits" OutputAnswer "User account: " 1 ClearScreen ChangeColor 12 0 Display "Your account credit has reached zero. You|" Display "will not be able to access certain functions|" Display "on the system.|" ChangeColor 10 0 Display "If you would like to purchase more credits, you|" Display "may either send a personal check or use the on-|" Display "line credit card door.|" ChangeColor 14 0 Display "|Would you like to purchase credits? (Y,N): " GetChoice YN 2 IF 2 = "N" Display "|Should you reconsider at a later date, simply|" Display "select the <C>redits command off the Main|" Display "Menu. Thank you.|" OutputAnswer "Elected not to purchase credits" 2 Quit EndIF Display "|Would you like to mail in your payment?|" GetChoice YN 3 IF 3 = "Y" Display "|Please mail your payment to:||" Display "Address line 1|" Display "Address line 2|" Display "Address line 3||" ChangeColor 10 0 Display "Press <ENTER> to continue" WaitEnter Display "|When your payment is received, the Sysop will|" Display "credit your account accordingly. Thank you.|" OutputAnswer "User elected to mail payment" 3 Quit - 272 - EndIF ChangeColor 13 0 Display "|The credit card door will now be loaded...|" MenuCmd 7 C:\RA\CREDIT.EXE *M OutputAnswer "User ran credit card door" 3 Quit SUBDATE.Q-A ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In this example, the user's sixty-day trial membership has expired. The user's security level and access flags are altered accordingly, after being informed how to obtain a regular subscription. PostInfo Assign 1 "Sixty-day subscription expired" OutputAnswer "User account: " 1 ClearScreen ChangeColor 12 0 Display "Your 60-day trial membership has expired!|" Display "If you would like to continue to be a subscriber,|" Display "please select the <S>ubscribe command off the|" Display "Main Menu. Thank you.|" SetSecurity 150 SetFlag A1 OFF ChangeColor 14 0 Display "|Press ^K[0F<ENTER>^K[0E to continue" WaitEnter Quit SUBDAYnn.Q-A ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In this example, the filename SUBDAY10.Q-A was used which is displayed to callers whose subscription expiration is in ten days. PostInfo Assign 1 "User is 10 days from expiration" OutputAnswer "User account: " 1 ClearScreen ChangeColor 12 0 Display "As a reminder, your subscription expires in ten|" Display "days.|" ChangeColor 10 0 Display "Would you like to renew it now? " GetChoice YN 2 IF 2 = "N" ChangeColor 11 0 Display "|Very well. At any time you may select the|" Display "<S>ubscribe command from the Main Menu to renew|" - 273 - Display "your subscription.|" ChangeColor 15 0 Display "|Press <ENTER> to continue" WaitEnter Quit EndIF ChangeColor 14 0 Display "|Loading credit card door...|" MenuCmd 7 C:\RA\CREDIT.EXE *M Quit - 274 - Chapter 9 Multi-node Operation * * * * The concept of multi-node operation is that more than one user can be on-line at the same time on the same BBS. To accomplish this, RemoteAccess manages the configuration and data files it uses very carefully, making it possible for certain key files to be shared. If you intend to run a multi-node BBS, it is advisable that you first set-up your system and test it on a single node. This will allow you to familiarize yourself with RemoteAccess and will make multi- node installation a simpler process. NOTE: The shareware version of RemoteAccess only supports a maximum of 2 concurrent nodes. The Professional version is required to run more than 2 nodes. - 275 - CONFIGURATION ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ This chapter takes you through each step of the multi-node configuration process. Complete each step in turn and the requirements necessary for multi-node operation will become clear. RACONFIG ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── First, it is necessary to make a few changes to your system configuration using RACONFIG. System > Paths > System Log Ensure the System Log field contains a filename without a path specified. This will force RemoteAccess to create a separate log file for each node in their respective directories (this will be discussed later in this section). If you specify a path name in this field, RemoteAccess will only create one log file and will mix entries from all nodes in it. Options > System > Check Multi This option instructs RemoteAccess to ensure a user may only log-on to one node at a time. If a user attempts to log-on to more than one node simultaneously, RemoteAccess will display the text file 1ATATIME.A?? (if it exists) or a brief message informing the user of the one-node log-on restriction. If this option is disabled, users could use their time and download limits on each node simultaneously. Options > System > Multi Node When enabled, this option activates the internal file sharing procedures. This will enable users to download the same file at the same time, read and write messages at the same time, along with other options which require simultaneous access to the same files. Paths ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── When running a multi-node system it is necessary for each node to have its own home directory. This directory will contain any configuration files specific to each node. For example, we will assume that you wish to set up a three node system and that your System path is defined as C:\RA in RACONFIG: System > Paths > System - 276 - Create the following directories: C:\RA\NODE1 C:\RA\NODE2 NOTE: The actual names of the subdirectories are not important. For convenience, you may assign names which reflect the node number to which the directory is assigned. CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── It's likely that you'll need to increase the FILES= setting in your CONFIG.SYS file if RemoteAccess is running several nodes under a multitasker. It is essential that you load SHARE.EXE when operating multi-node. SHARE.EXE is a DOS utility which RemoteAccess uses to lock the database files it uses, ensuring that no conflicts occur. If SHARE.EXE is not loaded, you run the risk of severe data corruption of the database files used by RemoteAccess. Individual Node Configuration ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Additional configuration flexibility is provided by the method RemoteAccess uses to locate the configuration files. Configuration files are those with a filename extension of .RA. If one or more of the configuration files is present in a particular node directory, then the information contained in those files will override the information contained in the corresponding configuration files in the main system directory. For example, it may be necessary for each node to use different modem configuration information. The following check-list procedure illustrates how you would achieve this. 1) Copy the MODEM.RA file from the main RemoteAccess system directory into each node subdirectory: For example: COPY C:\RA\MODEM.RA C:\RA\NODE1 COPY C:\RA\MODEM.RA C:\RA\NODE2 This will copy the default modem configuration file which contains modem information from the system directory to the node directories. 2) To edit the modem configuration for node 1 without affecting any other nodes, change to the C:\RA\NODE1 directory and run RACONFIG. Make the necessary changes to the modem configuration, save and exit. - 277 - 3) Repeat this process for node 2. This same principal applies to any *.RA configuration file. For example, the LIMITS.RA file contains access level information. You can copy this file into one or more of the individual node directories where you wish to impose separate access limitations and edit the settings for that node by following the same process just described. This would allow you to have different access configurations for each node in use. Each of the configuration files used by RemoteAccess, along with a brief description of its contents, are described as follows: CONFIG.RA This is the main configuration file. Any information not stored in any of the following files is contained in this file. EVENTS.RA System event information. FGROUPS.RA File group configuration information. FILES.RA File area configuration information. LANGUAGE.RA Language configuration information. MESSAGES.RA Message area configuration information. MGROUPS.RA Message group configuration information. MODEM.RA Modem configuration information. PAGE.RA Paging configuration information. PROTOCOL.RA Internal and external file transfer protocol information. LIMITS.RA Security level access configuration information. Exit and Log Files ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ RemoteAccess will maintain a separate system log file and usage graph file (TIMELOG.BBS) in each line directory. The system log filename used is defined in RACONFIG: System > Paths > System Log As long as a directory path is not included in the System Log field, RemoteAccess will write a system log file in the - 278 - appropriate node directory. This allows you to maintain separate log files for each individual node. By specifying a path along with the filename in the System Log field, RemoteAccess will only use one log file for all nodes, mixing log entries from all nodes. The placement of the EXITINFO.BBS, DORINFO1.DEF and DOOR.SYS exit files is handled differently in a multi-node environment. In a single-node environment, these files are written to the RemoteAccess system directory. In a multi-node environment, they are written to the current (default) directory (which is usually the subdirectory of the particular node in use). For example, if RemoteAccess is started from the C:\RA\NODE1 directory, that directory is the default directory where exit files will be written. This type of operation ensures that each node has its own set of exit files to which external programs known as doors may refer. NOTE: Regardless of the node number that is generating the exit files, RemoteAccess always creates a DORINFO1.DEF file. Some implementations of this type of exit file write a DORINFOn.DEF where "n" is the node number for which the file was created. This type of naming convention can only accommodate nodes 1 through 9. For this reason, RemoteAccess does not support this type of operation. Batch Files ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ A batch file which runs each individual node is required for proper multi-node operation. While it is beyond the scope of this manual to teach batch file operations, examples are provided in the Reference Information chapter to help you understand what is required. The following simple batch file segment illustrates the most basic requirements for running node 2. REM Start up node 2 :START CD \RA\NODE2 RA -N2 GOTO START The use of the -N2 parameter in the above example indicates which node is being run and is necessary for RemoteAccess to operate correctly. NOTE: The above example does not include or explain any errorlevel detection. For a full example of errorlevel checking, see the Batch Files section of the Reference - 279 - Information chapter. - 280 - Chapter 10 Mail Networking * * * * A mail network is a collection of bulletin board systems which transfer mail and files between member systems. This transfer of mail is normally carried out automatically and during predefined schedules without the need for human intervention. This chapter explains the principals of such mail networks as well as how they are supported and implemented from within RemoteAccess. - 281 - PRINCIPALS OF A MAIL NETWORK All of the explanations that follow relate to FidoNet, the world's largest amateur mail network. FidoNet consists of approximately 23,000 bulletin board systems. Each system (also referred to as a node) is assigned a unique network address which is entered into a master list of all FidoNet systems. This list, commonly referred to as a nodelist, is distributed to each node in the network and is used much like a telephone directory. Being part of a network has two basic attractions; NetMail and EchoMail. NetMail allows you to send a private message to a user of any one of the bulletin boards in the network at little or no cost to you. EchoMail is a method of creating a huge message area that many hundreds of systems can potentially participate in. Usually, EchoMail areas contain only public messages, and are organized into either general discussion areas, or areas that deal with specific issues, or topics. The network is organized into several levels which are usually based on geographical proximity. At the highest level there are six zones; zone 1 is the USA, zone 2 is Europe, zone 3 is the Pacific Rim, zone 4 is South America, zone 5 is Africa and zone 6 is Asia. Within each zone are a number of regions that span large geographical areas. Typically, there will be between 5 and 18 regions per zone. Each region is further divided into nets. Each net has a unique net number, and the distribution of these nets is also based on geographical and technical considerations. Finally, within the individual nets are a number of nodes. A node refers to a single bulletin board system. To find out how to obtain a node listing, contact your nearest FidoNet bulletin board. The Sysop will usually be more than happy to help. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS To operate RemoteAccess within a mail network such as FidoNet, you will require some additional software. First, you will need a program that supports non-human callers. That is, a program which can originate and receive calls to and from other nodes within the network for the purpose of transferring mail and files. This type of program is often referred to as a Front End Mailer. The basic principal of a Front End Mailer is that it is loaded before the BBS and uses its own internal event schedule and configuration to determine its operational characteristics. - 282 - When an incoming call is received, a Front End Mailer answers the call instead of RemoteAccess. It determines whether the caller is another network node or a human caller. If the caller is another node, the Front End Mailer performs network transfers as required. However, if the caller is human (not another network node), the Front End Mailer exits to the calling batch file which then loads RemoteAccess. Some suitable Front End Mailers are: FrontDoor, by Joaquim Homrighausen Intermail, by Scandinavian PC Systems AB D'Bridge, by Chris Irwin These packages are usually available from other FidoNet systems. The other piece of software you'll need is an EchoMail Processor, which is a program that unpacks received network mail and imports it into your message database. It also exports outgoing mail from your message database, packing it up for delivery. There are several EchoMail processors which support RemoteAccess, including: TosScan, by Joaquim Homrighausen GEcho, by Gerard J. van der Land FastEcho, by Software Technik Burchhardt FMail, by Folkert Wijnstra RA-Echo, by Roger Kirchhoff CONFIGURING REMOTEACCESS Once you have acquired and installed a Front End Mailer and EchoMail Processor, there are a few configuration items which need to be changed in RemoteAccess. Node Number ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The node number is a number by which individual members of a mail network are identified. In FidoNet, node numbers are assigned by a member of the administrative structure and take on the format: Zone:Net/Node.Point This initial network address should be entered into your RemoteAccess configuration. Enter this information in RACONFIG: System > Addresses > Main - 283 - Don't concern yourself with AKA addresses at this stage. They are only used when participating in more than one mail network. Message Areas ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The next step is to setup your EchoMail message areas. You will usually be given a list of areas that are available by a local network administrator. Each area is identified by an uppercase alphanumeric tag name. As far as RemoteAccess is concerned, all you need is a description of each area you plan to plug into. Setup the EchoMail areas just as you would any other message area with the following exceptions: Fire up RACONFIG: Manager > Msg Areas > (individual area) Set the Status field to Public and the Type field to EchoMail. Most EchoMail areas don't allow the use of handles, so you should also ensure that the area is configured to use Real names only. The AKA field shows your assigned node number. If it doesn't, press <ENTER> on this field and select the correct network address. Origin Lines ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Each EchoMail message that is posted on your system could potentially be read by hundreds of other Sysops and their users, so you can put a one-liner at the end of each message automatically. This should contain at least the name of your system, and possibly where it is located or the telephone number, so that other users know where the message originated. Your node number is automatically appended to the end of the origin line. A typical origin line might read: * Origin: RemoteAccess Central (2:270/18) The text "* Origin:" is automatically inserted by RemoteAccess and/or your EchoMail Processor. Most EchoMail Processors allow you to define a different origin line for each EchoMail area. RemoteAccess allows you to define a default origin line which will be used unless replaced by other software. This is configured in RACONFIG: Options > Messages > Default Origin If you are running a multi-node system and each node has a different network address, the proper address may be - 284 - inserted in the origin line by specifying the @ macro character. For example, the origin line: RemoteAccess Central @ Would be appended as: * Origin: RemoteAccess Central 1 (2:270/18) NetMail Areas ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The next step is to configure RemoteAccess to support NetMail. This step is optional since most Front End Mailers support a NetMail message area directly and have access to a nodelist directory. However, RemoteAccess can be configured to include a NetMail message area and supports node costing as well. Define a message area using RACONFIG, giving it an appropriate name such as NetMail. Next, set the Type field to NetMail and the Status field to Private. RemoteAccess incorporates a comprehensive on-line nodelist browsing facility, which allows users to search for nodes within particular zones, regions or nets. The next section explains how to enable this feature. Once this step is complete, RemoteAccess is fully configured for receiving and sending mail via a mail network. To utilize this setup, you should ensure that the additional software explained earlier in this chapter is installed and configured properly. Full instructions are available with each respective package. Installing the Nodelist Files ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Most other BBS software requires you to maintain large and unwieldy custom nodelist files for NetMail operation. RemoteAccess uses the raw (St. Louis) nodelist that you already have installed for your Front End Mailer, for which it builds small (around 5K) index files. The index files are compiled quickly and allow fast nodelist searches and references. The key to this system is the nodelist index compiler RANODE.EXE. You should adjust your batch files so that it is run each time any changes are made to your raw nodelist (when you receive an update to your nodelist, for example). RANODE locates your raw nodelist file using the path defined in RACONFIG: - 285 - System > Paths > Nodelist RANODE scans the most recent nodelist present in this directory and produces the index files NODEIDX.RA and NODEINC.RA which it places in your RemoteAccess system directory. If you have multiple nodelists to process, simply specify the names of any additional nodelists on the command-line when RANODE is executed. Examples ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Task: Compile a FidoNet nodelist only. Conditions: The raw nodelist is in the C:\NODELIST directory. Actions: Simply set the Nodelist Path in RACONFIG to C:\NODELIST and run RANODE whenever you process updates to the raw nodelist. No command-line parameters are needed. Task: Compile a FidoNet and ParaNet combined nodelist. Conditions: The FidoNet NODELIST.nnn and ParaNet PARALIST.PVT raw nodelist files are in the C:\NODELIST directory. Actions: Set the Nodelist Path in RACONFIG to C:\NODELIST. Run RANODE with the following command-line parameter: RANODE PARALIST.PVT Up to ten nodelists (including the default FidoNet nodelist) may be specified on the command-line. Wildcard and pattern matching characters are valid. It is not necessary to specify the FidoNet nodelist name on the command-line since RANODE automatically includes the most recent FidoNet nodelist present in the nodelist directory (as defined in RACONFIG). Cost Control ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ Typically, there is a cost associated with sending NetMail. Unlike EchoMail, NetMail is usually sent directly to other systems. This usually means long distance telephone line charges will show up on your telephone bill. It is therefore common practice to have users who wish to send - 286 - NetMail prepay a number of credits to cover the cost of messages sent by them, from your system. The defined cost for sent NetMail is then deducted from the user's Credit field in the user account record. You can define the cost of sending a single message to a particular zone, region, net, or even a node in a control file called NODECOST.CTL which is located in the RemoteAccess system directory. (See the Control Files section of the External Support Files chapter for information on editing this file.) Each time a user sends a NetMail message, its cost is deducted from the user's account. In fact, users are not permitted to send NetMail messages which require a number of credits greater than what the user has on account, except when the user's Post Bill flag is enabled. The cost structure for your entire nodelist is setup by one or more entries of five keywords: DEFAULT <cost> Assigns <cost> to any nodes that are not assigned a specific cost later in the control file. ZONE <zone> <cost> Assigns <cost> to all nodes in zone <zone>. This overrides the DEFAULT keyword. REGION <region> <cost> Assigns <cost> to all nodes in region <region>. This overrides the DEFAULT and ZONE keywords. NET <net> <cost> Assigns <cost> to all nodes in net <net>. This overrides the DEFAULT, ZONE and REGION keywords. NODE <node> <cost> Assigns <cost> to node <node>. <Node> is a fully qualified network address (i.e. 2:270/18). This overrides all other keywords. A Sample NODECOST.CTL File ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The control file may contain a maximum of 150 entries of each keyword. Duplicate entries are not permitted. - 287 - DEFAULT 200 ;A message to anywhere costs 200 credits, ZONE 3 60 ;except zone 3 where cost is 60 credits. ZONE 2 260 ;Messages to zone 2 cost 260 credits. REGION 55 30 ;Within our region only costs 30 credits. NET 690 0 ;Msgs in our net are free, NODE 690/99 5 ;except this node which isn't local. Once the NODECOST.CTL file is created, RANODE can be run to build the nodelist index files (NODEIDX.RA and NODEINC.RA) which are stored in the nodelist directory specified in RACONFIG. These files are required when entering NetMail messages or browsing the nodelist from within RemoteAccess. - 288 - Chapter 11 Reference Information * * * * This chapter provides information not suited for other chapters in this manual, including the local status bar, Sysop keys, command-line parameters, errorlevels and batch file examples. Where possible, reference material has been placed together with the information to which it applies in an effort to keep information grouped logically. - 289 - Sysop Keys and the Status Bar ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ While a user is logged-on to your BBS either remotely or locally, several keys (called Sysop keys) are available for your use. If there is a security password defined in RACONFIG, it must be entered before using any of the Sysop ALT keys. Sysop function keys may be used without entering the password. The security password is defined in RACONFIG: System > Security Sysop Function Keys ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The first set of Sysop keys we will outline are the Sysop function keys. These keys are used to change the status bar displayed in the window at the bottom of the local console screen, while a user is on-line. F1 This displays the user's name, location, security level, time remaining, connection speed and the node number in use. If the user has ANSI or AVATAR emulations enabled, they too are displayed. NOTE: The (F1) status line shows both the users daily time limit, as well as the time limit for the current session only. If the time limit for the current session is LESS than the overall dail time limit, it will be displayed to the right of the daily time limit. Eg: Time: 90/30 .. would indicate that the users daily limit is 90 minutes, and there are 30 minutes remaining before the user will have to log off and call again. Note that if the user goes into 'overtime' due to the FlexiTime option, this will be indicated by a negative number on the left: Time: -25/15 .. would indicate that the user has gone overtime by 25 minutes, and the time limit for the current session will expire in 15 minutes. F2 This displays the user's voice and data telephone numbers, the date and time on which the user last called, the date the user first called, the number of times the user has called and the age and date of birth of the user. - 290 - F3 This displays the number of files the user has uploaded and downloaded, including the total kilobytes of the uploads and downloads. The user's security flag settings are also displayed. F4 This displays some system statistics such as the name of the last caller, total number of calls to the system, current time, printer status, local screen status and the time and errorlevel of the next system event. F5 This displays the total number of messages posted by the user, the highest message number the user has read, the user's selected language, the user's group number, the number of credits the user has remaining and the user's handle. F6 This displays the comments stored in the user's account record. Additionally, the user's reason for requesting a chat is displayed if the user attempted to page the Sysop. F7 This displays the user's interactive EMSI session information. If the user on-line is not using a terminal program that supports this functionality, the status bar becomes blank when this key is pressed. F9 This displays a Sysop key command summary. F10 Pressing this key turns the status bar off in order to provide an accurate view of what the on- line user sees. Pressing any of the other valid Sysop function keys turns the status bar back on again. Sysop ALT Keys ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The second set of Sysop keys available are the Sysop ALT keys. These are keys that are pressed in conjunction with the A key while a user is on-line, although some of these are also available while RemoteAccess is waiting for a call (these are noted). Remember, if a system security password is defined in RACONFIG, you will be prompted to enter it when one of these keys is selected. Upon successful entry of the security password, RemoteAccess will prompt Remove password lock (y,N)? which gives you the opportunity, since the password was entered correctly initially, to not require the password for subsequent Sysop ALT keys pressed during the current session only. - 291 - ALT-F1 Activates one of ten predefined functions. through RemoteAccess allows you to configure up to ten ALT-F10 functions that may be activated at any time that a user is on-line. For specific information, see RACONFIG: Manager > AltFn Keys ALT-A When RemoteAccess is waiting for a call, selecting this option will toggle call answering. For example, if RemoteAccess is waiting for a call and ALT-A is pressed, incoming calls will not be answered. Pressing this option a second time enables call answering. ALT-C Break in for a chat if there is a user logged-on remotely. Pressing <ESCAPE> exits chat mode and returns the user to the BBS. ALT-D Toggles snoop mode. For example when snoop is on, the local console displays all that is displayed to the user. When toggled off, only the status bar is displayed. This option may be selected while a user is on-line or while RemoteAccess is waiting for a call. ALT-E Activates a pop-up user attribute editor for the user currently on-line. This allows you to edit the user's account record in real-time. See the User Administration chapter for detailed information on user account records. ALT-H Hang up on the user immediately. This drops the telephone connection (if the user is logged-on remotely). ALT-J Drop to a DOS shell. A brief message is displayed to the user when this option is selected and when the DOS shell is exited. This option may be selected while a user is on-line or while RemoteAccess is waiting for a call. ALT-L Lock the user out of the system by dropping the user's security level to zero and hanging up. Just before the call is terminated, the text file LOCKOUT.A?? is displayed to the user, if it exists. See the External Support Files chapter for more information on this text file. ALT-N Toggles the Sysop on next flag. When this mode is activated (indicated by "(SN)" on the F1 status bar), RemoteAccess will pause and page the Sysop for - 292 - up to two minutes after the current user logs-off. The page may be interrupted by pressing <ENTER> at the local console keyboard. Whether or not the page is interrupted, RemoteAccess will exit with an errorlevel of 2 set which may be trapped by your BBS batch file. {+} Registered only. ALT-O This option allows you to enable or disable Sysop paging regardless of the paging schedule defined in RACONFIG. You should note that the override is permanent and affects all nodes until it is reset. This option may be selected while a user is on-line or while RemoteAccess is waiting for a call. ALT-P This option toggles printer logging. When enabled, any entries that are written to the system log file are also sent to the printer port. This option may be selected while a user is on- line or while RemoteAccess is waiting for a call. ALT-S This option allows you to modify the security level of the user currently on-line and records the new level in the user's account record. Other Sysop Keys ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── In addition to the Sysop function and ALT keys, a few other keys are also available. CTRL-A This option may only be selected while in chat mode. Selecting it the first time opens a chat log file which then records everything that is typed during a chat with an on-line user. Selecting it a second time or ending chat mode by pressing the <ESCAPE> key, closes the log file. UP Pressing the up-arrow increases the user's time remaining by one minute. DOWN Pressing the down-arrow decreases the user's time remaining by one minute. PG-UP Pressing the page-up key will increase the current users time limit for the current session only. PG-DN Pressing the page-down key will decrease the current users time limit for the current session only. SCROLL- Disables the paging tune. If this is on when a LOCK user pages the Sysop, no sound will be produced at - 293 - the local console. This option may be activated and deactivated whether or not a user is on-line. {+} Registered only. L Pressing this key while RemoteAccess is waiting for a call will allow you to log-on locally. ESCAPE Pressing this key while RemoteAccess is waiting for a call will terminate the program and return to DOS. NOTE: Terminating in this manner will always return an errorlevel of 0 to DOS regardless of whether the -E command-line parameter was passed when invoking RemoteAccess. RemoteAccess Environment Variables ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ RemoteAccess recognizes three environment variables; RA, RAOVR and RATEMP. These are used to determine the locations of various program support files. Environment Variable Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── RA This variable is used to specify the location of the RemoteAccess system directory. This is usually set in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file during program installation. For example, if your RemoteAccess system directory is C:\RA, the installation program inserted the following line in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: SET RA=C:\RA RAOVR This variable is used to specify the location of the RemoteAccess overlay file RA.OVR. If this variable is set, RemoteAccess will look for its overlay file in the directory contained therein. This allows you to load the overlay file on a RAM disk which speeds up program execution considerably. For example, if you have a RAM disk configured as drive D: and have copied RA.OVR into a directory called TEMP on that disk, you would set the variable: SET RAOVR=D:\TEMP - 294 - RATEMP When RemoteAccess swaps out of memory and onto disk, the swap file is written to the system directory by default. Setting this variable to a valid path and directory allows you to specify where RemoteAccess will write its swap file. RA.EXE Command-line Parameters ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ When you installed RemoteAccess for the first time, a default batch file was created for you. If you are upgrading from a previous version, you've no doubt made changes to your BBS batch file since it was first installed. In either case, the line in your BBS batch file that executes the main program executable file (RA.EXE) may be modified to include command-line parameters that alter the way in which RemoteAccess loads or operates. Command-line parameters are instructions you can give to a program when you run it from the DOS command-line or from within a batch file. Each parameter is separated by a space which informs DOS of the locations where a command- line parameter ends. The parameters supported by RemoteAccess all begin with the dash - or / characters and end with a space character. The sections of this manual which discuss various utility programs included with RemoteAccess also explain any available command-line parameters supported by each utility. The following list of command-line parameters are accepted by the main program executable itself; RA.EXE. -NOEMS This parameter forces RemoteAccess to ignore any available EMS memory. By default, RemoteAccess uses available XMS memory first, and then looks for available EMS memory which is used if insufficient XMS memory is available. When this parameter is specified, RemoteAccess will use any available XMS memory (unless the -NOXMS parameter is also specified) when swapping itself out of conventional memory or when loading its overlays, instead of using any available EMS memory. -NOXMS This parameter forces RemoteAccess to ignore any available XMS memory. By default, RemoteAccess uses available XMS memory first, and then looks for available EMS memory which is used when insufficient XMS memory is available. When this parameter is specified, - 295 - RemoteAccess will use any available EMS memory (unless the -NOEMS parameter is also specified) when swapping itself out of conventional memory or when loading its overlays, instead of using any available XMS memory. NOTE: Overlay XMS support does not work with the DR DOS 6.0 EMM386 memory manager. Therefore, if you are using this memory manager and running DR DOS 6.0, you must disable XMS support using the -NOXMS parameter. -SMALLOVRBUF If you load the RA.OVR overlay file onto a RAM disk, you can reclaim an extra 12K of conventional memory by specifying this parameter. This should only be used if you are loading RA.OVR onto a RAM disk and have the RAOVR environment variable set accordingly. -An Run RemoteAccess with NetBIOS functions enabled, using LAN adapter n. For example, -A0 specifies the default LAN adapter should be used. -Bxxxxx Log user on-line at connection speed xxxxx. This parameter is typically used in conjunction with a Front End Mailer where RemoteAccess is loaded while a caller is already connected to the modem. When fired up, RemoteAccess will use the connection speed specified, which must be a valid BPS connection rate. In addition to the BPS rate, the secure connection response may also be specified (i.e. -B9600/ARQ). -Cx This parameter specifies the communications port to use. By default, RemoteAccess gets this information from the MODEM.RA file (which is created and maintained by RACONFIG) from the current directory. If this file cannot be located in the current directory, RemoteAccess searches its system directory. This command-line parameter can be used to override the setting in the modem configuration file. -D Disable the status bar by default. Specifying this parameter instructs RemoteAccess not to display the status bar window at the bottom of the local console screen. -Exxx Exit at errorlevel xxx after the caller - 296 - logs-off. This setting is used to specify the errorlevel RemoteAccess should return to DOS after a caller logs off . -G This parameter is used in conjunction with the -R parameter and instructs RemoteAccess to return to the last menu the user was in at the time of the previous exit to DOS. The default is to return to the TOP menu when the -R parameter is specified. {+} Registered only. -L Run RemoteAccess in local mode. When this parameter is used, RemoteAccess will present the logon screen on the local console. -M<F> Load RemoteAccess in Shell to Mailer mode. See the Shell to Mailer section immediately following this section for a detailed explanation of this feature. When this parameter is specified, the Front End Mailer command-line must be specified immediately following the -M parameter. Further, the Mailer command-line must not contain any spaces since a space indicates the end of a command-line parameter to DOS itself. Instead, spaces within the command-line must be substituted with the underscore _ character. See the Batch File Examples section in this chapter for a usage example of this parameter. -Nxxx This parameter specifies the node number (xxx) in a multi-node system. Acceptable values are from 1-250. For example, to load RemoteAccess as node 20, the parameter -N20 would be used. -P This parameter instructs RemoteAccess to log user activity to the printer. -R Log user back on-line after a menu function type 15-"Exit to DOS with errorlevel". When this parameter is specified, RemoteAccess loads just as it would for a new caller except that instead of prompting the user to log-on, it reads the exit file information which was created when a menu function type 15 was executed. For more information, see menu function type 15 in the Menu Administration chapter. -S Set snoop mode off when RemoteAccess is loaded. By default, snoop mode is enabled, allowing you to see all that is displayed to - 297 - the user on-line. Specifying this parameter leaves only the status bar displayed on the local console screen. -Txxxx This parameter specifies the time (in minutes) until the next system event. This is used in conjunction with a Front End Mailer where the mailer passes the time until its next system event. This ensures that RemoteAccess will not allow a user to remain on-line beyond the Front End Mailer event starting time. Shell to Mailer Mode ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ When RemoteAccess is used in conjunction with a Front End Mailer, it can be loaded in what is referred to as Shell to Mailer mode. This mode allows you to first load RemoteAccess which in turn loads a Front End Mailer. When the mailer receives a call and exits to load the BBS, RemoteAccess only needs to swap itself back into conventional memory from disk or from XMS/EMS memory. This causes RemoteAccess to load faster since it is in fact already loaded into memory. There are two variations of the Shell to Mailer mode. The first (as in the scenario just described), is where RemoteAccess detects the errorlevel returned by the Front End Mailer and loads or passes the errorlevel accordingly. For example, if the Front End Mailer is configured to exit with an errorlevel of 100 when a 2400 BPS caller is detected, RemoteAccess can be configured to intercept this errorlevel, check its own internal errorlevel definition table, and fire up to accommodate the 2400 BPS connection. This method is fully explained in the Configuration chapter under: Options > Errorlevels A sample batch file is also included later in this chapter which illustrates this type of operation. The second variation of the Shell to Mailer mode is where RemoteAccess is used in conjunction with a DOBBS.BAT batch file created by some Front End Mailers. In this variation, the DOBBS.BAT file contains the speed at which the caller is connected, the communications port number in use, the number of minutes remaining until the next event and possibly a string indicating that a secure connection has been established (the string ARQ or MNP, for example). You should keep in mind that this method, though used by some mailers, is not a defined standard. For this reason, you - 298 - should know what RemoteAccess looks for in this file. First, RemoteAccess uses a pattern matching search to locate a file called DOBBS*.BAT in the current directory. For example, some mailers such as FrontDoor, can create these files which are named according to their task number (DOBBS1.BAT for example). Once this one-line file is located, RemoteAccess reads the fourth word in the file which is the number of minutes remaining until the next event. Next, RemoteAccess compares the error-free secure connection string from its modem configuration file with the entire line contained in DOBBS*.BAT. If this string is found, RemoteAccess detects that the caller is using an error- correcting modem and enables functionality only available during error-free connections. Once this information has been read, RemoteAccess closes the DOBBS*.BAT file. It then loads according to the errorlevel passed by the Front End Mailer, as in the first variation of the Shell to Mailer mode. Errorlevels Returned by RemoteAccess ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ When RemoteAccess exits to DOS either after a user logs-off or when a menu function type 15-Exit to DOS with errorlevel is executed, your BBS batch file should trap the errorlevel and act accordingly. The errorlevels RemoteAccess reserves for its own use are outlined below. If these errorlevels are duplicated and passed from a Front End Mailer, RemoteAccess adds a value of 10 to the errorlevel and passes it to the BBS batch file. Errorlevel Description ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── 0 User logged-off OK (default value). This default value can be overridden with the -E command- line parameter. 1 Modem initialization error; could not find the communications driver, or the modem failed to initialize. 2 Sysop Next function was active when the user logged off. 3 The user entered one or more NetMail messages during the session. The message database should be scanned for outgoing NetMail. - 299 - 4 The user entered one or more EchoMail messages during the session. The message database should be scanned for outgoing EchoMail. 5 The user entered both NetMail and EchoMail messages during the session. The message database should be scanned for outgoing NetMail and EchoMail. ┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │ Here's a Tip! │ │ │ │ You can force RemoteAccess to exit with a specific │ │ errorlevel by creating a file called RAXITn.e in the │ │ Semaphore directory. Then, node n will terminate with │ │ errorlevel 'e' set. This file is very powerful and will │ │ disconnect any caller currently on-line for the affected │ │ node. │ │ │ │ For example, to cause node 2 to exit to DOS at errorlevel│ │ 25, create the following file in the semaphore directory:│ │ │ │ RAXIT2.25 │ └──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ Batch Files Examples ════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ RemoteAccess requires a batch file in order to recycle after each caller disconnects. Refer to your DOS reference manual if you are not at all familiar with the concept of batch files. When RemoteAccess terminates, it passes an errorlevel back to the batch file. The batch file should trap this errorlevel and act accordingly. An errorlevel may be in the range of 1 to 255. Errorlevels 1 to 5 are reserved for use by RemoteAccess to indicate certain events which have occurred since it was activated. See the Errorlevels section earlier in this chapter for a full list of reserved errorlevels. A Single-node System ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── The following batch file example illustrates how the batch file is used to run a single-node system. This example shows how RemoteAccess is run in standalone (without a Front End Mailer) mode. Filename: RUNRA.BAT Comments: This batch file accepts one command-line parameter and that is the node number that is to be started. The node number is referenced - 300 - within the batch file using the %1 variable. Since this batch file will be used to run a single- node system, the proper method of starting the batch file to run node 1 would be: RUNRA 1 Comment lines have been added which make the batch file more readable. Comment lines begin with the text REM and are not processed. ------------------------------------------------------------ @echo off REM Set environment variables. SET RA=C:\RA :Start REM Start the main batch file loop. Cls Echo Starting RemoteAccess Node %1 CD \RA\NODE%1 \RA\RA -E10 -N%1 REM After RA exits, trap the errorlevel. :AfterRA IF ERRORLEVEL 20 GOTO Maintain IF ERRORLEVEL 10 GOTO Start IF ERRORLEVEL 2 GOTO Local IF ERRORLEVEL 0 GOTO Quit :Maintain REM Since this is a 1 node system, we can REM do maintenance tasks outright CD \RA REM Pack the user database deleting users REM who have not called in 60 days. Also REM sort the user file. RAUSER -S -P -D60 REM Pack the message database purging REM messages according to the threshold REM information contained in MESSAGES.RA. REM Renumber the database updating reply REM chains and user LastRead pointers. RAMSG PACK -Purge -Renumber REM This concludes maintenance tasks. REM Recycle the batch file. GOTO Start :Local REM Local logon mode CD \RA\NODE%1 - 301 - \RA\RA -E10 -L -N%1 REM When finished, goto AfterRA to trap REM the errorlevel returned. GOTO AfterRA :Quit REM Exit the batch file. ------------------------------------------------------------ This simple batch file example assumes that a system event is defined which returns an errorlevel of 20. When this errorlevel is detected, RemoteAccess goes to the ':Maintain' label and processes the commands to maintenance tasks on the user and message databases. A Multi-node System ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Multi-node systems usually have more complex batch files than single-node systems. However, much of what applies to the single-node example, applies to the multi-node example as well. The following batch file example illustrates how the batch file is used to run a multi-node system. This example shows how RemoteAccess is run in standalone (without a Front End Mailer) mode. This batch file is similar to ones that can be created automatically by the installation utility, RAINSTAL. Filename: RUNRA.BAT Comments: This batch file accepts one command-line parameter and that is the node number that is to be started. The node number is referenced within the batch file using the %1 variable. Since this batch file will be used to run a multi- node system, the proper method of starting the batch file would be: RUNRA <node number> Comment lines have been added which make the batch file more readable. Comment lines begin with the text REM and are not processed. ------------------------------------------------------------ @echo off REM Set environment variables. SET RA=C:\RA :Start REM Start the main batch file loop. - 302 - Cls Echo Starting RemoteAccess Node %1 CD \RA\NODE%1 \RA\RA -E10 -N%1 REM After RA exits, trap the errorlevel. :AfterRA IF ERRORLEVEL 20 GOTO Maintain IF ERRORLEVEL 10 GOTO Start IF ERRORLEVEL 2 GOTO Local IF ERRORLEVEL 0 GOTO Quit :Maintain REM Since this is a multi-node system, we REM should leave maintenance tasks to one REM node only to avoid having two nodes REM performing the same tasks at the same REM time. If node 2 is running the event, REM it will stop and wait until node 1 is REM finished. It then continues batch file REM execution. CD \RA REM If not node 1 go wait while node 1 does REM maintenance tasks. IF NOT %1 == 1 GOTO Wait REM Create a semaphore file called REM RAWAIT.SEM ECHO ... >RAWAIT.SEM REM Pack the user database deleting users REM who have not called in 60 days. Also REM sort the user file. RAUSER -S -P -D60 REM Pack the message database purging REM messages according to the threshold REM information contained in MESSAGES.RA. REM Renumber the database updating reply REM chains and user LastRead pointers. RAMSG PACK -Purge -Renumber REM This concludes maintenance tasks. REM Delete the semaphore file and then REM recycle the batch file. ERASE RAWAIT.SEM GOTO Start :Local REM Local logon mode CD \RA\NODE%1 \RA\RA -E10 -L -N%1 REM When finished, goto AfterRA to trap REM the errorlevel returned. GOTO AfterRA - 303 - :Wait REM Wait here until the file RAWAIT.SEM REM no longer exists IF EXIST RAWAIT.SEM GOTO Wait REM If it doesn't exist, recycle. Goto Start :Quit REM Exit the batch file. ------------------------------------------------------------ This simple batch file example assumes that a system event is defined which returns an errorlevel of 20. When this errorlevel is detected, RemoteAccess goes to the ':Maintain' label and processes the commands to maintain the user and message databases. Since each node will recognize the system event and in order to avoid two nodes performing the same maintenance tasks at the same time, only node 1 is allowed to actually process the maintenance task commands. Any other node goes to the batch file label ':Wait'. There, it simply waits until the semaphore file RAWAIT.SEM (created by node 1) no longer exists. A Multi-node System in Shell to Mailer Mode ──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Although it is beyond the scope of this manual to explain how individual Front End Mailers are used, we believe you should at least understand how to implement a batch file which uses the Shell to Mailer feature. The following batch file example illustrates how the batch file is used to run a multi-node system. This example shows how RemoteAccess is run in conjunction with FrontDoor, by Joaquim Homrighausen. Filename: RUNRA.BAT Comments: This batch file accepts one command-line parameter and that is the node number that is to be started. The node number is referenced within the batch file using the %1 variable. Since this batch file will be used to run a multi- node system, the proper method of starting the batch file to run node 1 would be: RUNRA <node number> Notice the line that calls RemoteAccess using the -M parameter. The command-line used to - 304 - call the Front End Mailer directly follows this parameter. No spaces may be used within this parameter. Any spaces embedded in the parameter must be replaced by underscore _ characters. After RemoteAccess loads into conventional memory, it swaps itself out of memory and loads a DOS shell which executes the Front End Mailer. When the Front End Mailer exits with an errorlevel set, RemoteAccess traps the errorlevel and compares it to the errorlevels defined in RACONFIG. This is the method used to determine the connection type and speed. If a DOBBS*.BAT file is created by the Front End Mailer, RemoteAccess also reads the information in that file to determine the time until the next Front End Mailer event as well as whether the caller has established an error-free connection. When RemoteAccess loads for a caller, it only needs to swap itself back into memory which results in an increase in apparent loading speed. ------------------------------------------------------------ @echo off REM Set environment variables. SET RA=C:\RA SET FD=C:\FD :Start REM Start the main batch file loop. Cls Echo Starting RemoteAccess and shelling to mailer CD \RA\NODE%1 \RA\RA -M\FD\FD.EXE*M -E10 -N%1 REM After RA exits, trap the errorlevel. :AfterRA IF ERRORLEVEL 20 GOTO Maintain IF ERRORLEVEL 10 GOTO Start IF ERRORLEVEL 2 GOTO Local IF ERRORLEVEL 0 GOTO Quit :Maintain REM Since this is a multi-node system, we REM should leave maintenance tasks to one REM node only to avoid having two nodes REM performing the same tasks at the same REM time. If node 2 is running the event, REM it will stop and wait until node 1 is - 305 - REM finished. It then continues batch file REM execution. CD \RA REM If not node 1 go wait while node 1 does REM maintenance tasks. IF NOT %1 == 1 GOTO Wait REM Create a semaphore file called REM RAWAIT.SEM ECHO ... >RAWAIT.SEM REM Pack the user database deleting users REM who have not called in 60 days. Also REM sort the user file. RAUSER -S -P -D60 REM Pack the message database purging REM messages according to the threshold REM information contained in MESSAGES.RA. REM Renumber the database updating reply REM chains and user LastRead pointers. RAMSG PACK -Purge -Renumber REM This concludes maintenance tasks. REM Delete the semaphore file and then REM recycle the batch file. ERASE RAWAIT.SEM GOTO Start :Local REM Local logon mode CD \RA\NODE%1 \RA\RA -E10 -L -N%1 REM When finished, goto AfterRA to trap REM the errorlevel returned. GOTO AfterRA :Wait REM Wait here until the file RAWAIT.SEM REM no longer exists IF EXIST RAWAIT.SEM GOTO Wait REM If it doesn't exist, recycle. Goto Start :Quit REM Exit the batch file. ------------------------------------------------------------ As you can see, this batch file example is identical to the multi-node example except for the line that executes RemoteAccess in Shell to Mailer mode. - 306 -